Host Command Reference

Host Command Reference
Host Command Reference
Q and SCL commands for servo and stepper drives
Includes RS-232, RS-485,
Ethernet UDP, Ethernet TCP/IP
and EtherNet/IP communication
APPLIED MOTION PRODUCTS, INC.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Contents
Getting Started.................................................................. 8
Servo Drives......................................................................................8
Stepper Drives...................................................................................8
Commands........................................................................ 9
Buffered Commands..........................................................................9
Stored Programs in Q Drives............................................................................ 9
Multi-tasking in Q Drives.................................................................................. 9
Immediate Commands.......................................................................9
Using Commands...............................................................................9
Commands in Q drives......................................................................10
SCL Utility software............................................................................11
Command Summary..........................................................................12
Motion Commands.............................................................................13
Servo Commands..............................................................................14
Configuration Commands..................................................................14
I/O Commands...................................................................................16
Communications Commands.............................................................17
Q Program Commands......................................................................17
Register Commands..........................................................................18
Command Listing...............................................................................19
AC - Acceleration Rate......................................................................20
AD - Analog Deadband......................................................................21
AF - Analog Filter...............................................................................22
AG - Analog Velocity Gain..................................................................23
AI - Alarm Reset Input ......................................................................24
AL - Alarm Code................................................................................27
AM - Max Acceleration.......................................................................28
AO - Alarm Output.............................................................................29
AP - Analog Position Gain.................................................................31
AR - Alarm Reset (Immediate)...........................................................32
AS - Analog Scaling...........................................................................33
AT - Analog Threshold........................................................................34
AV - Analog Offset Value....................................................................35
AX - Alarm Reset (Buffered)..............................................................36
AZ - Analog Zero...............................................................................37
BD - Brake Disengage Delay.............................................................38
BE - Brake Engage Delay..................................................................39
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
2
Host Command Reference
BO - Brake Output.............................................................................40
BR - Baud Rate .................................................................................42
BS - Buffer Status..............................................................................43
CA - Change Acceleration Current....................................................44
CC - Change Current.........................................................................45
CD - Idle Current Delay Time.............................................................47
CE - Communication Error.................................................................48
CF - Anti-resonance Filter Frequency................................................49
CG - Anti-resonance Filter Gain.........................................................50
CI - Change Idle Current....................................................................51
CJ - Commence Jogging...................................................................53
CM - Command Mode (AKA Control Mode)......................................54
CP - Change Peak Current................................................................56
CR - Compare Registers ...................................................................57
CS - Change Speed...........................................................................58
CT - Continue.....................................................................................59
DA - Define Address..........................................................................60
DC - Change Distance.......................................................................61
DE - Deceleration...............................................................................62
DI - Distance/Position........................................................................63
DL - Define Limits..............................................................................64
DR - Data Register for Capture..........................................................66
ED - Encoder Direction......................................................................67
EF - Encoder Function.......................................................................68
EG - Electronic Gearing.....................................................................70
EI - Input Noise Filter.........................................................................71
EP - Encoder Position........................................................................72
ER - Encoder Resolution...................................................................73
FC - Feed to Length with Speed Change..........................................74
FD - Feed to Double Sensor..............................................................76
FE - Follow Encoder..........................................................................77
FI - Filter Input...................................................................................78
FL - Feed to Length...........................................................................81
FM - Feed to Sensor with Mask Distance..........................................82
FO - Feed to Length and Set Output.................................................83
FP - Feed to Position.........................................................................84
FS - Feed to Sensor...........................................................................85
FX - Filter select inputs......................................................................86
FY - Feed to Sensor with Safety Distance.........................................87
3
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
GC - Current Command.....................................................................88
HG - 4th Harmonic Filter Gain...........................................................89
HP - 4th Harmonic Filter Phase.........................................................90
HW - Hand Wheel..............................................................................91
Immediate Status Commands...........................................................92
IA - Immediate Analog.......................................................................93
IC - Immediate Current (Commanded)..............................................95
ID - Immediate Distance....................................................................96
IE - Immediate Encoder.....................................................................97
IF - Immediate Format.......................................................................98
IH - Immediate High Output...............................................................99
IL - Immediate Low Output.................................................................100
IO - Output Status..............................................................................101
IP - Immediate Position......................................................................103
IQ - Immediate Current (Actual).........................................................104
IS - Input Status.................................................................................105
IT - Immediate Temperature...............................................................108
IU - Immediate Voltage.......................................................................110
IV - Immediate Velocity......................................................................111
IX - Immediate Position Error.............................................................112
JA - Jog Acceleration.........................................................................113
JC - Velocity (Oscillator) mode second speed...................................114
JD - Jog Disable.................................................................................115
JE - Jog Enable..................................................................................116
JL - Jog Decel....................................................................................117
JM - Jog Mode...................................................................................118
JS - Jog Speed..................................................................................119
KC - Overall Servo Filter....................................................................120
KD - Differential Constant..................................................................121
KE - Differential Filter.........................................................................122
KF - Velocity Feedforward Constant...................................................123
KI - Integrator Constant......................................................................124
KJ - Jerk Filter Frequency..................................................................125
KK - Inertia Feedforward Constant....................................................126
KP - Proportional Constant................................................................127
KV - Velocity Feedback Constant.......................................................128
LV - Low Voltage threshold.................................................................129
MD - Motor Disable............................................................................130
ME - Motor Enable.............................................................................131
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
4
Host Command Reference
MN - Model Number..........................................................................132
MO - Motion Output...........................................................................133
MR - Microstep Resolution.................................................................135
MT - Multi-Tasking..............................................................................136
MV - Model & Revision......................................................................137
NO - No Operation.............................................................................139
OF - On Fault.....................................................................................140
OI - On Input......................................................................................141
OP - Option board..............................................................................142
PA - Power-up Acceleration Current..................................................143
PB - Power-up Baud Rate .................................................................145
PC - Power-up Current.......................................................................146
PF - Position Fault..............................................................................147
PI - Power-up Idle Current.................................................................148
PL - Position Limit..............................................................................149
PM - Power-up Mode.........................................................................150
PP - Power-up Peak current...............................................................151
PR - Protocol.....................................................................................152
PS - Pause.........................................................................................153
PW - Password..................................................................................154
QC - Queue Call................................................................................155
QD - Queue Delete............................................................................156
QE - Queue Execute..........................................................................157
QG - Queue Goto..............................................................................158
QJ - Queue Jump...............................................................................159
QK - Queue Kill..................................................................................160
QL - Queue Load...............................................................................161
QR - Queue Repeat...........................................................................162
QS - Queue Save...............................................................................163
QU - Queue Upload...........................................................................164
QX - Queue Load & Execute.............................................................165
RC - Register Counter.......................................................................166
RD - Register Decrement...................................................................168
RE - Restart or Reset........................................................................169
RI - Register Increment......................................................................170
RL - Register Load - immediate.........................................................171
RM - Register Move...........................................................................172
RR - Register Read...........................................................................173
RS - Request Status..........................................................................174
5
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
RU - Register Upload.........................................................................175
RV - Revision Level............................................................................176
RW - Register Write...........................................................................177
RX - Register Load - buffered............................................................178
R+ - Register Add..............................................................................179
R- - Register Subtract........................................................................180
R* - Register Multiply.........................................................................181
R/ - Register Divide............................................................................182
R& - Register AND.............................................................................183
R| - Register OR................................................................................184
SA - Save Parameters.......................................................................185
SC - Status Code...............................................................................186
SD - Set Direction..............................................................................187
SF - Step Filter Frequency.................................................................188
SH - Seek Home................................................................................189
SI - Enable Input Usage.....................................................................190
SJ - Stop Jogging .............................................................................192
SK - Stop & Kill..................................................................................193
SM - Stop Move.................................................................................194
SO - Set Output.................................................................................195
SP - Set Position................................................................................196
SS - Send String................................................................................197
ST - Stop............................................................................................198
TD - Transmit Delay...........................................................................199
TI - Test Input.....................................................................................200
TR - Test Register..............................................................................201
TS - Time Stamp................................................................................202
VC - Velocity Change.........................................................................203
VE - Velocity.......................................................................................204
VI - Velocity Integrator Constant........................................................205
VM - Maximum Velocity......................................................................206
VP - Velocity Mode Proportional Constant.........................................207
WD - Wait Delay.................................................................................208
WI - Wait for Input..............................................................................209
WM - Wait on Move............................................................................210
WP - Wait Position.............................................................................211
WT - Wait Time..................................................................................212
ZC - Regen Resistor Continuous Wattage.........................................213
ZR - Regen Resistor Value................................................................214
ZT - Regen Resistor Peak Time.........................................................215
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
6
Host Command Reference
Data Registers.............................................................. 216
Read-Only data registers...................................................................216
Read/Write data registers..................................................................216
User-Defined data registers...............................................................216
Storage data registers........................................................................216
Using Data Registers.........................................................................217
Loading (RL, RX)...............................................................................217
Uploading (RL, RU)............................................................................218
Writing Storage registers (RW) (Q drives only)..................................218
Reading Storage registers (RR) (Q drives only)................................218
Moving data registers (RM) (Q drives only).......................................218
Incrementing/Decrementing (RI, RD) (Q drives only)........................218
Counting (RC, “I” register) (Q drives only).........................................218
Math & Logic (R+, R-, R*, R/, R&, R|) (Q drives only).......................218
Conditional Testing (CR, TR) (Q drives only).....................................219
Data Register Assignments...............................................................219
Read-Only data registers: a - z..........................................................219
Read/Write data registers: A - Z........................................................223
User-Defined data registers: 0 - 9, other characters..........................227
Appendices................................................................... 228
Appendix A: Non-Volatile Memory in Q drives................................229
Appendix B: Host Serial Communications......................................230
Appendix C: Host Serial Connections.............................................234
Appendix D: The PR Command........................................................238
Appendix E: Alarm and Status Codes..............................................242
Appendix F: Working with Inputs and Outputs...............................249
Appendix G: eSCL (SCL over Ethernet) Reference.........................257
Appendix H: EtherNet/IP....................................................................271
Appendix I: Troubleshooting............................................................301
Appendix J: List of Supported Drives..............................................303
7
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Getting Started
The basic procedures for integrating an Applied Motion drive into your application are the same for every
drive offered. The first step is to configure and/or tune the drive using either ST Configurator (stepper) or
Quick Tuner (servo). Depending on the specific drive, the user may now use SCL Utility, Q Programmer or Si
Programmer software for testing and advanced programming.
Servo Drives
•
This series includes all SV7, SVAC3, BLuAC5, BLuDC9, and BLuDC4 drives.
•
For Ethernet-enabled drives, see Appendix G of this document and your drive’s Hardware Manual for
information regarding Ethernet communications.
•
Use Quick Tuner software to tune and configure your drive. See the Quick Tuner Software Manual for
details on tuning servo drives.
•
For SCL applications choose the SCL Operating Mode; for Q applications choose either the SCL or Q
Program Operating Mode.
•
For SCL applications, theSCL Setup Utility is a useful tool to gain familiarity with the SCL command
syntax and to test commands that will be used in the final product.
•
For Q applications use Q Programmer both for creating stored programs and for sending commands to
your drive.
•
For Si applications use Si Programmer for creating stored programs.
•
Note: SV7-Si and BLu-Si drives are not recommended for multi-drop communications over the RS-485
port.
Stepper Drives
•
This series includes all ST5/10, STM, STAC5 and STAC6 drives.
•
For Ethernet-enabled drives, see Appendix G of this document and your drive’s Hardware Manual for
information regarding Ethernet communications.
•
Use ST Configurator software to define your motor, configure the operating mode and encoder (if
applicable), as well as any application-specific I/O requirements.
•
For SCL applications choose the SCL Operating Mode; for Q applications choose either the SCL or Q
Program Operating Mode.
•
For SCL applications, theSCL Setup Utility is a useful tool to gain familiarity with the SCL command
syntax and to test commands that will be used in the final product.
•
For Q applications use Q Programmer both for creating stored programs and for sending commands to
your drive.
•
For Si applications use Si Programmer for creating stored programs.
•
Note: ST5/10-Si and STAC6-Si drives are not recommended for multi-drop communications over the RS485 port.
•
STAC5-Q, STAC6-Q, STAC6-QE, and STAC6-Si drives can be used in Q applications.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
8
Host Command Reference
Commands
There are two types of host commands available: buffered and immediate. Buffered commands are loaded
into and executed out of the drive’s volatile command buffer, also known as the queue. Immediate commands are
not buffered: when received by the drive they are executed immediately.
Buffered Commands
After being loaded into the command buffer of a drive, buffered commands are executed one at a time. (See
“Multi-tasking in Q Drives” below for an exception to this rule). If you send two buffered commands to the drive in
succession, like an FL (Feed to Length) command followed by an SS (Send String) command, the SS command
sits in the command buffer and waits to execute until the FL command is completed. The command buffer can
be filled up with commands for sequential execution without the host controller needing to wait for a specific
command to execute before sending the next command. Special buffer commands, like PS (Pause) and CT
(Continue), enable the buffer to be loaded and to pause execution until the desired time.
Stored Programs in Q Drives
Stored Q Programs, created with the Q Programmer application software, are created by using only buffered
commands.
Multi-tasking in Q Drives
Multi-tasking allows for an exception to the “one at a time” rule of buffered commands. The multi-tasking
feature of a Q drive allows you to initiate a move command (FL, FP, CJ, FS, etc.) and proceed to execute other
commands without waiting for the move command to finish.
Immediate Commands
Immediate commands are executed right away, running in parallel with a buffered command if necessary.
For example, this allows you to check the remaining space in the buffer using the BS (Buffer Status) command,
or the immediate status of digital inputs using the IS (Input Status) command, while the drive is processing other
commands. Immediate commands are designed to access the drive at any time.
Applied Motion recommends waiting for an appropriate Ack/Nack response from the drive before sending
subsequent commands. This adds limited overhead but ensures that the drive has received and executed the
current command, preventing many common communication errors. If the Ack/Nack functionality cannot be
used in the application for any reason, the user should allow a 10ms delay between commands to allow the drive
sufficient time to receive and act on the last command sent.
This approach allows a host controller to get information from the drive at a high rate, most often for
checking drive status or motor position.
Using Commands
The basic structure of a command packet from the host to the drive is always a text string followed by a
carriage return (no line feed required). The text string is always composed of the command itself, followed by any
parameters used by the command. The carriage return denotes the end of transmission to the drive. Here is the
basic syntax.
YXXAB<cr>
In the syntax above, “Y” symbolizes the drive’s RS-485 address, and is only required when using RS-485
networking. “XX” symbolizes the command itself, which is always composed of two capital letters. “A” symbolizes
the first of two possible parameters, and “B” symbolizes the second. Parameters 1 and 2 vary in length, can
be letters or numbers, and are often optional. The “<cr>” symbolizes the carriage return which terminates the
command string. How the carriage return is generated in your application will depend on your host software.
Once a drive receives the <cr> it will determine whether or not it understood the preceding characters as a
valid command. If it did understand the command the drive will either execute or buffer the command. If Ack/Nack
9
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
is turned on (see PR command), the drive will also send an Acknowledge character (Ack) back to the host. The
Ack for an executed command is % (percent sign), and for a buffered command is * (asterisk).
It is always recommended that the user program wait for an ACK/NACK character before subsequent
commands are sent. If the ACK/NACK functionality cannot be used in the application, a 10ms delay is
recommended between non-motion commands.
If the drive did not understand the command it will do nothing. If Ack/Nack is turned on a Nack will be sent,
which is signified by a ? (question mark). The Nack is usually accompanied by a numerical code that indicates a
particular error. To see a list of these errors see the PR command details in the Appendix.
Responses from the drive will be sent with a similar syntax to the associated SCL command.
YXX=A<cr>
In the syntax above, “Y” symbolizes the drive’s RS-485 address, and is only present when using RS-485
networking. “XX” symbolizes the command itself, which is always composed of two capital letters. “A” symbolizes
the requested data, and may be presented in either Decimal or Hexadecimal format (see the IF command). The
“<cr>” symbolizes the carriage return which terminates the response string.
Commands in Q drives
Q drives have additional functionality because commands can also be composed into a stored program
that the Q drive can run stand-alone. The syntax for commands stored in a Q program is the same as if the
commands were being sent directly from the host, or “XXAB”. Q Programmer software is used to create stored Q
programs and can be downloaded for free from www.applied-motion.com/support/software.php.
The diagram below shows how commands sent from the host’s serial port interact with the volatile command
buffer (AKA the Queue), and the drive’s non-volatile program memory storage. Loading and Uploading the Queue
contents via the serial port are done with the QL and QU commands, respectively. Similarly, the Queue’s contents
can be Loaded from NV memory using the QL and QX commands, and can be saved to NV memory with the QS
command. Finally, commands currently in the Queue can be executed with the QE or QX command.
RS-232 /
RS-485 /
Ethernet
Communications
Serial /
Ethernet
Port
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
10
Host Command Reference
The Q Programmer software automates many of the functions shown in the diagram above.
SCL Utility software
The SCL Utility software is an excellent application for familiarizing yourself with host commands. SCL Utility
can be downloaded for free from www.applied-motion.com.
To send commands to your drive from SCL Utility simply type a command in the Command Line and press
the ENTER key to send it. (Remember that all commands are capital letters so pressing the Caps Lock key first
is a good tip). Pressing the ENTER key while in SCL Utility does two things: it terminates the command with a
carriage return and automatically sends the entire string. Try the example sequence below. In this example, note
that <ENTER> means press the ENTER key on your keyboard, which is the same as terminating the command
with a carriage return.
IMPORTANT: We recommend practicing with SCL commands with no load attached to the motor
shaft. You want the motor shaft to spin freely during startup to avoid damaging mechanical components
in your system.
AC25<ENTER>
Set accel rate to 25 rev/sec/sec.
DE25<ENTER>
Set decel rate to 25 rev/sec/sec
VE5<ENTER>
Set velocity to 5 rev/sec
FL20000<ENTER>
Move the motor 20000 steps in the CW direction.
If your motor didn’t move after sending the FL20000 check the LEDs on your drive to see if there is an error
present. If so send the AR command (AR<ENTER>) to clear the alarm. If after clearing the alarm you see a solid
green LED it means the drive is disabled. Enable the drive by sending the ME command (ME<ENTER>) and
verify that the you see a steady, flashing green LED. Then try the above sequence again.
Here is another sample sequence you can try.
JA10<ENTER>
Set jog accel rate to 10 rev/sec/sec
JL10<ENTER>
Set jog decel rate to 10 rev/sec/sec
JS1<ENTER>
Set jog speed to 1 rev/sec
CJ<ENTER>
Commence jogging
CS-1<ENTER>
Change jog speed to 1 rev/sec in CCW direction
SJ<ENTER>
Stop jogging
In the above sequence notice that the motor ramps to the new speed set by CS. This ramp is affected by
the JA and JL commands. Try the same sequence above with different JA, JL, JS, and CS values to see how the
motion of the motor shaft is affected.
11
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Command Summary
This section contains a set of tables that list all of the Host Commands available with your drive. In each
table there are a number of columns that give information about each command.
•
“Command” shows the command’s two-letter Command Code.
•
“Description” shows the name of each command.
•
“NV” designates which commands are Non-volatile: that is, which commands are saved in non-volatile
memory when the SA (Save) command is sent to the drive. Note that certain commands (PA, PB, PC, PI,
and PM) save their parameter data to non-volatile memory immediately upon execution, and need not be
followed by an SA command.
•
“Write only” or “Read only” is checked when a command is not both Read/Write compatible.
•
“Immediate” designates an immediate command (all other commands are buffered).
•
“Compatibility” shows which drives use each of the commands.
The different categories for these tables - Motion, Servo, Configuration, I/O, Communications, Q Program,
Register - are set up to aid you in finding particular commands quickly.
•
“Motion” commands have to do with the actual shaft rotation of the step or servo motor.
•
“Servo” commands cover servo tuning parameters, enabling / disabling the motor, and filter setup.
•
“Configuration” commands pertain to setting up the drive and motor for your application, including tuning
parameters for your servo drive, step resolution and anti-resonance parameters for your step motor drive,
etc.
•
“I/O” commands are used to control and configure the inputs and outputs of the drive.
•
“Communications” commands have to do with the configuration of the drive’s serial ports.
•
“Q Program” commands deal with programming functions when creating stored programs for your Q drive.
•
“Register” commands deal with data registers. Many of these commands are only compatible with Q
drives.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
12
Host Command Reference
Motion Commands
Command
Description
NV
write
only
read Immediate Compatibility
only
AC
Accel Rate
•
AM
Accel Max
•
CJ
Commence Jogging
DC
Distance for FC, FM, FO, FY
•
All drives
DE
Decel Rate
•
All drives
DI
Distance or Position
•
All drives
ED
Encoder Direction
•
Servos and steppers with encoder
feedback
EF
Encoder Function
•
Servos and steppers with encoder
feedback
EG
Electronic Gearing
•
All drives
EI
Input Noise Filter
•
All drives
EP
Encoder Position
FC
Feed to Length with Speed Change
•
All drives
FD
Feed to Double Sensor
•
All drives
FE
Follow Encoder
•
All drives
FL
Feed to Length
•
All drives
FM
Feed to Sensor with Mask Dist
•
All drives
FO
Feed to Length & Set Output
•
All drives
FP
Feed to Position
•
All drives
FS
Feed to Sensor
•
All drives
FY
Feed to Sensor with Safety Dist
•
All drives
HW
Hand Wheel
•
All drives
JA
Jog Accel/Decel rate
•
All drives
JC
Velocity mode second speed
•
All drives
JD
Jog Disable
•
All drives
JE
Jog Enable
•
All drives
JL
Jog Decel rate
•
All drives
JM
Jog Mode
•
Al drives (see JM command)
JS
Jog Speed
•
All drives
MD
Motor Disable
ME
Motor Enable
MR
Microstep Resolution
•
Stepper drives only
PA
Power-up Accel Current
•
STM stepper drives only
SD
Set Direction
•
STM stepper drives with Flex I/O
only
SH
Seek Home
•
SJ
Stop Jogging
•
SM
Stop the Move
•
SP
Set Absolute Position
All drives
All drives
•
All drives
Servos and steppers with encoder
feedback
•
All drives
•
All drives
All drives
•
All drives
Q drives only
All drives
13
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Motion Commands (continued)
ST
Stop Motion
•
•
All drives
VC
Velocity for Speed Change (FC)
•
All drives
VE
Velocity Setting (For Feed Commands)
•
All drives
VM
Velocity Max
•
All drives
WM
Wait on Move
•
Q drives only
WP
Wait on Position
•
Q drives only
Servo Commands
Command
Description
CP
Change Peak Current
EP
Encoder Position
GC
Current Command
IC
Immediate Current Command
IE
IQ
NV
write
only
read Immediate Compatibility
only
•
Servo drives only
Servo drives only
•
•
Servo drives only
•
•
Servo drives only
Immediate Encoder Position
•
•
Servo drives only
Immediate Actual Current
•
•
Servo drives only
IX
Immediate Position Error
•
•
Servo drives only
KC
Overall Servo Filter
•
Servo drives only
KD
Differential Constant
•
Servo drives only
KE
Differential Filter
•
Servo drives only
KF
Velocity Feedforward Constant
•
Servo drives only
KI
Integrator Constant
•
Servo drives only
KJ
Jerk Filter Frequency
•
SV7 Servo drives only
KK
Inertia Feedforward Constant
•
Servo drives only
KP
Proportional Constant
•
Servo drives only
KV
Velocity Feedback Constant
•
Servo drives only
PF
Position Fault
•
Servo drives, drives with encoder
feedback
PL
Position Limit
•
Servo drives only
PP
Power-Up Peak Current
•
Servo drives only
VI
Velocity Integrator Constant
•
Servo drives only
VP
Velocity Mode Proportional Constant
•
Servo drives only
Configuration Commands
Command
Description
AL
Alarm Code
AR
Alarm Reset
BD
Brake Disengage Delay time
•
All drives
BE
Brake Engage Delay time
•
All drives
BS
Buffer Status
CA
Change Acceleration Current
•
STM stepper drives only
CC
Change Current
•
All drives
CD
Idle Current Delay
•
Stepper drives only
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
NV
write
only
read Immediate Compatibility
only
•
•
•
14
•
All drives
•
All drives
•
All drives
Host Command Reference
Configuration Commands (continued)
CF
Anti-resonance Filter Frequency
•
Stepper drives only
CG
Anti-resonance Filter Gain
•
Stepper drives only
CI
Change Idle Current
•
Stepper drives only
CM
Control mode
•
All drives
CP
Change peak current
•
Servo drives only
DA
Define Address
•
All drives
DL
Define Limits
•
All drives
DR
Data Register for Capture
ED
Encoder Direction
•
Servo drives, drives with encoder
feedback
ER
Encoder or Resolution
•
Servo drives, drives with encoder
feedback
HG
4th Harmonic Filter Gain
•
Stepper drives only
HP
4th Harmonic Filter Phase
•
Stepper drives only
IA
Immediate Analog
•
•
All drives
ID
immediate Distance
•
•
All drives
IE
Immediate Encoder
•
•
Servo drives, drives with encoder
feedback
IF
Immediate Format
•
All drives
IQ
Immediate Current
•
•
Servo drives only
IP
Immediate Position
•
•
All drives
IT
Immediate Temperature
•
•
All drives
IU
Immediate Voltage
•
•
All drives
IV
Immediate Velocity
•
•
All drives
LV
Low Voltage Threshold
MD
Motor Disable
•
All drives
ME
Motor Enable
•
All drives
MN
Model Number
•
All drives
MO
Motion Output
•
All drives
MR
Microstep Resolution
•
All drives (deprecated - see EG
command)
MV
Model & Revision
OF
On Fault
•
Q drives only
OI
On Input
•
Q drives only
OP
Option Board
•
PA
Power-up Acceleration Current
•
PC
Power up Current
•
All drives
PF
Position Fault
•
Servo drives, drives with encoder
feedback
PI
Power up Idle Current
•
Stepper drives only
PL
In Position Limit
•
Servo drives only
PM
Power up Mode
•
All drives
PP
Power up peak current
•
Servo drives only
PW
Pass Word
•
Q servo drives only
•
•
All drives
•
•
•
•
15
•
•
All drives except Blu servos
All drives
Q drives only
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Configuration Commands (continued)
RE
Restart / Reset
•
•
All drives
RL
Register Load
RS
Request Status
•
•
All drives
•
All drives
RV
Revision Level
•
•
All drives
SA
Save all NV Parameters
SC
Status Code
SD
Set Direction
•
STM stepper drives with Flex I/O
only
SF
Step Filter Frequency
•
Stepper drives only
SI
Enable Input usage
•
SK
Stop & Kill
ZC
Regen Resistor Continuous Wattage
•
BLuAC5 and STAC6 drives only
ZR
Regen Resistor Value
•
BLuAC5 and STAC6 drives only
ZT
Regen Resistor Peak Time
•
BLuAC5 and STAC6 drives only
•
All drives
•
•
All drives
•
•
All drives
I/O Commands
Command
Description
AD
Analog Deadband
•
All stepper drives and SV servo
drives
AF
Analog Filter
•
All drives
AG
Analog Velocity Gain
•
All stepper drives and SV servo
drives
AI
Alarm Input usage
•
All drives
AO
Alarm Output usage
•
All drives
AP
Analog Position Gain
•
All drives
AS
Analog Scaling
•
All stepper drives and SV servo
drives
AT
Analog Threshold
•
All drives
AV
Analog Offset
•
All drives
AZ
Analog Zero (Auto Zero)
BD
Brake Disengage Delay time
•
All drives
BE
Brake Engage Delay time
•
All drives
BO
Brake Output usage
•
All drives
DL
Define Limits
•
All drives
EI
Input Noise Filter
•
All drives
FI
Filter Input
•
All drives (Note: not NV on Blu
servos)
FX
Filter Selected Inputs
IH
Immediate High Output
•
•
All drives
IL
Immediate Low Output
•
•
All drives
IO
Output Status
•
All drives
IS
Input Status request
•
All drives
MO
Motion Output
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
NV
write
only
read Immediate Compatibility
only
•
All drives
Blu, STAC5, STAC6, SVAC3
•
•
All drives
16
Host Command Reference
I/O Commands (continued)
OI
On Input
•
Q drives only
SI
Enable Input usage
SO
Set Output
•
All drives
TI
Test Input
•
Q drives only
WI
Wait on Input
•
All drives
•
All drives
Communications Commands
Command
Description
NV
write
only
read Immediate Compatibility
only
BR
Baud Rate
BS
Buffer Status
•
All drives
CE
Communications Error
•
All drives
IF
Immediate Format
•
•
All drives
PB
Power up Baud Rate
•
All drives
PR
Protocol
•
All drives
TD
Transmit Delay
•
All drives
•
All drives
Q Program Commands
Command
Description
NV
write
only
read Immediate Compatibility
only
AX
Alarm Reset
MT
Multi-Tasking
NO
No Operation
•
Q drives only
OF
On Fault
•
Q drives only
OI
On Input
•
Q drives only
PS
Pause
•
All drives
QC
Queue Call
•
Q drives only
QD
Queue Delete
•
Q drives only
QE
Queue Execute
•
QG
Queue Goto
•
Q drives only
QJ
Queue Jump
•
Q drives only
QK
Queue Kill
•
Q drives only
QL
Queue Load
•
QR
Queue Repeat
•
QS
Queue Save
•
QU
Queue Upload
QX
Queue Load & Execute
•
Q drives only
SM
Stop Move
•
Q drives only
SS
Send String
•
All drives
TI
Test Input
•
Q drives only
WD
Wait Delay using Data Register
•
Q drives only
WI
Wait for Input
•
All drives
WM
Wait for Move to complete
•
Q drives only
WP
Wait for Position in complex move
•
Q drives only
WT
Wait Time
•
Q drives only
•
All drives
Q drives only
•
•
Q drives only
Q drives only
•
17
Q drives only
•
Q drives only
•
Q drives only
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Register Commands
Command
Description
CR
Compare Register
•
Q drives only
DR
Data Register for Capture
•
Q drives only
RC
Register Counter
•
Q drives only
RD
Register Decrement
•
Q drives only
RI
Register Increment
•
Q drives only
RL
Register Load
RM
Register Move
•
RR
Register Read
•
RU
Register Upload
•
RW
Register Write
•
RX
Register Load
R+
Register Addition
•
Q drives only
R-
Register Subtraction
•
Q drives only
R*
Register Multiplication
•
Q drives only
R/
Register Division
•
Q drives only
R&
Register Logical AND
•
Q drives only
R|
Register Logical OR
•
Q drives only
TR
Test Register
•
Q drives only
TS
Time Stamp read
•
Q drives only
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
NV
write
only
read Immediate Compatibility
only
•
Q drives only
Q drives only
Q drives only
•
Q drives only
Q drives only
18
Host Command Reference
Command Listing
This section is an alphabetical listing of all the commands available with your drive. Each page in this
section contains the details of one available command. Below is a sample of what these pages look like, with an
explanation of the information you will find on each page.
Title - shows the command’s two-letter code
followed by the command’s name.
Compatibility - shows which drives use this
command.
Host Command Reference
DI - Distance/Position
Affects - a summary of parameters or other
commands the command affects.
Compatibility:Alldrives
Affects:Allmovecommands
Seealso:AC,DC,DEandVEcommands
Setsorrequeststhemovedistanceinencodercounts(servo)orsteps(stepper).ThesignofDIindicatesmove
direction:nosignmeansCWand“-”meansCCW.DIsetsboththedistanceforrelativemoves,likeFL,andthe
positionforabsolutemoves,likeFP.DIalsosetsthedirectionofrotationforjogging(CJ).
CommandDetails:
Structure
DI{Parameter#1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
RegisterAccess
“D”(020)
distance
-units
encodercounts(servo)orsteps(stepper)
-range
-2,147,483,647to2,147,483,647
signdeterminesdirection:“-”forCCW,nosignforCW
Examples:
CommandDrivesendsNotes
DI20000-
Setdistanceto20000countsintheCWdirection
DI
DI=20000
DI-8000-
FL
-
920-0002 Rev. D
5/7/2007
Description- an explanation of what the
command does and how it works.
Command Details - shows the command’s
Structure, Type, Usage, Non-Volatile status,
and Register Access. Structure always
shows the two-letter command code followed
by the number of parameters it uses. Not
all commands have parameters, some
commands have optional parameters, and
other commands always have a parameter.
Optional parameters are designated by { },
and required parameters are designated by (
). Type can be BUFFERED or IMMEDIATE.
Usage can be Read Only, Read/Write, or
Write Only. Non-Volatile will show if the
command can be saved (YES) or not (NO).
Saving Non-Volatile commands to memory
requires the SA (Save) command. Register
Access shows any data registers associated
with the command. If the command transfers
data to a register that is accessible via the
RL and RX commands, that register will be
shown here.
ParameterDetails:
Parameter#1
See Also - related commands
Setdistanceto8000countsintheCCWdirection
InitiateFLmove
Parameter Details - shows a description,
the units, and the range of the parameter(s)
available with a given command. Some
commands will also have a Response
Details section which shows how the drive’s
response to the given command is formatted.
70
Examples - shows what to expect when you
use this command. Under “Command” are
the command strings you would send from a
host controller or write into a stored program.
Under “Drive Sends” are the responses
from the drive: no response from the drive
is denoted by “-”. “Notes” give additional
information about the results of the command
string.
19
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
AC - Acceleration Rate
Compatibility: All drives
Affects: FC, FD, FE, FL, FM, FS, FP, FY, SH commands
See also: AM, DE, DI, DC, VE commands
Sets or requests the acceleration rate used in point-to-point move commands in rev/sec/sec.
Command Details:
Structure
AC{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
“A” (017)
Note: Units of AC command and “A” register are different.
See Data Registers section for details of “A” register.
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Acceleration rate
- units
rev/sec/sec (rps/s)
- range
0.167 to 5461.167 (resolution is 0.167 rps/s)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
AC100
-
ACAC=100
Notes
Set Acceleration to 100 rev/sec/sec
AC25
DE25
VE1.5
FL20000
Set acceleration rate to 25 rev/sec/sec
Set deceleration rate to 25 rev/sec/sec
Set velocity to 1.5 rev/sec
Execute Feed to Length move of 20000 steps
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
-
-
-
-
20
Host Command Reference
AD - Analog Deadband
Compatibility: All stepper drives and SV servo drives
Affects: Analog input
See also: CM command
Sets or requests the analog deadband value in millivolts. The deadband value is the zone around the “zeroed”
value of the analog input. This deadband defines the area of the analog input range that the drive should interpret
as “zero”. This zero point can be used as the zero velocity point in analog velocity mode, or as the zero position
point in analog position mode (see CM command). The deadband is an absolute value that in usage is applied to
either side of the zero point.
Note that in Analog Positioning mode (CM22), the AD setting is used as a hysteresis value rather than a standard
deadband setting. As such, it will work over the entire analog range, not just at zero volts.
Command Details:
Structure
AD{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
Setting the AD command will affect the contents of the “a”
(Analog Command) register
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Analog deadband value
- units
millivolts
- range
0 - 255
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
AD100
-
ADAD=100
Notes
Set analog deadband to 0.1 volts
21
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
AF - Analog Filter
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
All commands using the analog inputs
See also:
IA, CM commands
Applies a digital filter to the analog input(s). This is a simple single pole filter that rolls off the analog input. The
filter value of the AF command is related to the desired value of the analog filter in Hz by the following equation:
Filter value = 72090 / [ (1400 / x ) + 2.2 ]
where x = desired value of the analog filter in Hz
Command Details:
Structure
AF{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
Setting the AF command will affect the responsiveness of
the “a”, “j”, and “k” registers to changes in analog voltage
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Filter value
- units
integer (see formula above)
- range
0 - 32767* (0 disables the filter)
* An AF value of 28271 equates to 4000.425 Hz. Setting the AF command to anything higher than 28271 has
a negligible effect on the analog filter. In other words, the maximum value of the filter is approximately 4000
Hz.
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
AF5000
-
AFAF=5000
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Make the analog input bandwidth 114.585 Hz
22
Host Command Reference
AG - Analog Velocity Gain
Compatibility: All stepper drives and SV servo drives
Affects: Analog velocity modes
See also: CM command
Sets or requests the gain value used in analog velocity / oscillator modes. The gain value is used to establish the
relationship between the analog input and the motor speed. The units are 0.25 rpm. For example, if the analog
input is scaled to 0 - 5 volt input and the gain is set to 2400, when 5 volts is read at the analog input the motor will
spin at 10 rps. TIP: To set the analog velocity gain to the desired value, multiply the desired motor speed in rps by
240, or the desired motor speed in rpm by 4.
Command Details:
Structure
AG{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Analog velocity gain value
- units
0.25 rpm
- range
-32767 to 32767
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
AG3000
-
AGAG=3000
Notes
Set top speed of analog velocity mode to 12.5 rps
23
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
AI - Alarm Reset Input
Compatibility: All drives, see below
Affects: Alarm Reset input usage
See also: AL, CM, DL, SI, SD commands
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si
Defines the function of the X4 input. This input can be used to clear a drive fault and reset the Alarm Code (see
AL command). When the Alarm Reset function is not needed at input X4, such as when operating with a host
controller where faults and alarms can be cleared via serial commands, it may be useful to reconfigure X4 as a
general purpose input, which allows it to be used by other types of input commands.
There are three Alarm Reset Input states that can be defined with the AI command:
AI1: For normal operation the
X4 input must be open
(inactive, high). Alarm
reset occurs when the input is closed (active,
low). This is an edgetriggered event. If the
switch is closed when an
alarm is activated no reset
will occur. The input must
be opened (inactive, high)
and then closed to reset
the alarm.
AI1
(high)
(high)
(low)
time
A B
A
B
C
C
(low)
D
time
A B
Input is open, normal operation
Alarm occurs
Input closed, alarm is reset
A
B
C
D
(high)
(high)
(low)
(low)
C
D E
Input is closed
Alarm occurs
Input opened, no reset occurs
Input closed, alarm is reset
AI2
time
AI2: For normal operation the
A
B
C
D
A B C D E
X4 input must be closed
(active, low). Alarm reset
A Input is closed, normal operation
A Input is open
occurs when the input is
B Alarm occurs
B Alarm occurs
opened (inactive, high).
C Input opened, alarm is reset
C Input closed, no reset occurs
D Input opened, alarm is reset
This is an edge-triggered
event. If the switch is open
when an alarm is activated
no reset will occur. The input must be closed and then opened to reset the alarm.
time
AI3: Input is not used for Alarm Reset and can be used as a general purpose input.
ST-S, STM17, STM23
Defines the EN input as an Alarm Reset Input. If you want to use the EN input as an Alarm Reset input you can
define it as such in two ways, with the ST Configurator software, or with the AI command. AI takes no effect if the
drive is set in Command Mode (CM) 13, 14, 17 or 18, because these modes use the EN input as a speed change
input and take precedence over the AI command. Also, setting the SI command after setting the AI command
reassigns the EN input to drive enable usage and turns off any alarm reset usage (AI3). In other words, the AI and
SI commands, as well as Command Modes (CM) 13, 14, 17 and 18 each assign a usage to the EN input. Each of
these must exclusively use the EN input.
There are three Alarm Reset Input states that can be defined with the AI command:
AI1: For normal operation the EN input must be open (inactive, high). Alarm reset occurs when the EN
input is closed (active, low). This is an edge-triggered event. If the switch is closed when an alarm is
activated no reset will occur. The input must be opened and then closed to reset the alarm. After the
alarm is cleared, the drive will be enabled when the input is opened again.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
24
Host Command Reference
AI2 : For normal operation the EN
input must be closed (active,
low). Alarm reset occurs when
the input is opened (inactive,
high). This is an edge-triggered
event. If the switch is open
when an alarm is activated no
reset will occur. The input must
be closed and then opened
to reset the alarm. After the
alarm is cleared, the drive will
be enabled when the input is
closed again.
AI1
(high)
(high)
(low)
time
A B
A
B
C
D
C
D
time
A B
Input is open, normal operation
Alarm occurs
Input closed, alarm is reset
Input opened, drive is re-enabled
A
B
C
D
E
(high)
(high)
C
D E
Input is closed
Alarm occurs
Input opened, no reset occurs
Input closed, alarm is reset
Input opened, drive is re-enabled
AI2
(low)
AI3: The EN Input is not used for
Alarm Reset and may be used
as a general purpose input. AI will be automatically set to 3 if
CM is set to 13, 14, 17, or 18 or
if SI is set to either 1 or 2 after
the AI command is set.
(low)
time
A B
A
B
C
D
C
(low)
D
time
A B
Input is closed, normal operation
Alarm occurs
Input opened, alarm is reset
Input closed, drive is re-enabled
A
B
C
D
E
C
D
E
Input is open
Alarm occurs
Input closed, no reset occurs
Input opened, alarm is reset
Input closed, drive is re-enabled
STM24
Drives with Flex I/O allow a second parameter which allows the user to specify the I/O point used as the Alarm
Reset input. Before an I/O point can be used as an Alarm Reset input it must first be configured as an input with
the SD command. See the STM24 Hardware Manual for details of which inputs may be used as the Alarm Reset
input.
Possible uses for the AI command on the
STM24 are as follows (‘n’ denotes the I/O
point to be used):
AI1n
(high)
(high)
(low)
AI1n: For normal operation the
designated input ‘n’ must be
open (inactive, high). Alarm
reset occurs when the input
is closed (active, low). This
is an edge-triggered event. If
the switch is closed when an
alarm is activated no reset
will occur. The input must be
opened (inactive, high) and then
closed to reset the alarm. The
drive will be enabled when the
input is returned to the opened
state (inactive, high), unless the
SI command has been used
to configure hardware enable
functionality.
time
A B
A
B
C
D
C
(low)
D
time
A B
Input is open, normal operation
Alarm occurs
Input closed, alarm is reset
Input opened, drive is re-enabled
A
B
C
D
E
C
D E
Input is closed
Alarm occurs
Input opened, no reset occurs
Input closed, alarm is reset
Input opened, drive is re-enabled
AI2n
(high)
(high)
(low)
time
A B
A
B
C
D
C
(low)
D
Input is closed, normal operation
Alarm occurs
Input opened, alarm is reset
Input closed, drive is re-enabled
time
A B
A
B
C
D
E
C
D
E
Input is open
Alarm occurs
Input closed, no reset occurs
Input opened, alarm is reset
Input closed, drive is re-enabled
AI2n: For normal operation the designated input ‘n’ input must be closed (active, low). Alarm reset occurs
when the designated input is opened (de-energized). This is an edge-triggered event. If the switch is
open when an alarm is activated no reset will occur. The input must be closed (energized) and then
opened to reset the alarm. The drive will be enabled when the input is returned to the closed state
25
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
(active, low), unless the SI command has been used to configure hardware enable functionality.
AI3n: The designated input ‘n’ is not used for Alarm Reset and may be used as a general purpose input.
NOTE: A rule of thumb when using the Alarm Reset function is to toggle the designated input twice whenever an
alarm occurs. That is, if the input is normally open (inactive, high), it should be closed and then opened again. If
the input is normally closed (active, low), it should be opened and then closed again.
Command Details:
Structure
AI{Parameter #1}{Parameter #2 (Flex I/O only)}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Input Usage
- units
integer code
- range
1, 2, or 3
Parameter #2 (Flex I/O only)
I/O Point (if applicable, see note below)
- units
Integer Code
- range
2 or 4 (See STM24 Hardware Manual for details)
NOTES:
• For drives equipped with Flex I/O, the SD command must be executed to set an I/O point as an input before it
can be used as the Alarm Reset Input.
• Parameter #2 only applies to drives equipped with Flex I/O. Parameter #2 is not defined for drives equipped
with standard I/O.
Examples:
All drives with standard I/O:
Command
Drive sends
AI1
-
AIAI=1
Drives with Flex I/O:
Command
Drive sends
SD4I
-
AI14
-
AIAI=14
Notes
Enables input to reset alarm when closed (active, low)
Notes
Configures I/O 4 as input (see SD command for details)
Assigns input 4 to reset the alarm when closed (active, low)
NOTE: When working with digital inputs and outputs it is important to remember the designations low and high.
If current is flowing into or out of an input or output, i.e. the circuit is energized, the logic state for that input/
output is defined as low or closed. If no current is flowing, i.e. the circuit is de-energized, or the input/output is
not connected, the logic state is high or open. A low state is represented by the “L” character in parameters of
commands that affect inputs/outputs. For example, WI3L means “wait for input 3 low”, and SO1L means “set
output 1 low”. A high state is represented by the “H” character.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
26
Host Command Reference
AL - Alarm Code
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
AI, AR, AX commands, Appendix
Reads back an equivalent hexadecimal value of the Alarm Code’s 16-bit binary word.
Command Details:
Structure
AL
Command Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“f” (054)
Note: response to AL command is a different format than
the response to the RLf command. See Appendix F for
details.
Units
Hexadecimal value of 16-bit binary word (see below)
Response Details:
Hex Value
BLu
SV
STAC6
0001
Position Limit
0002
CCW Limit
0004
CW Limit
0008
Over Temp
0010
Excess Regen*
Internal Voltage
Under Voltage*
Under Voltage
Under Voltage
Bad Hall Sensor
Internal Voltage
Under Voltage
Under Voltage
Open Motor Winding
Bad Encoder
0200
0400
Comm Error
0800
Bad Flash
1000
Wizard Failed
2000
Current Foldback
4000
8000
Internal Voltage
Over Current
0080
0100
STM
Over Voltage
0020
0040
Excess Regen
ST
(not used)
No Move
Motor Resistance
Out of Range
(not used)
(not used)
Blank Q Segment
No Move
(not used)
* BLuAC drives only
NOTE: Items in bold italic represent Drive Faults, which automatically disable the motor. Use the OF
command in a Q Program to branch on a Drive Fault.
NOTE: See Appendix for more detailed information on Alarm Codes.
Examples:
Command
AL
AL
AL
Drive sends
AL=0000
AL=0001
AL=0201
Notes
No alarms
Position limit alarm
Position limit and bad encoder signal alarms
27
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
AM - Max Acceleration
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
ST, SK , SM, QK commands; analog velocity and oscillator modes
See also: VM command
Sets or requests the maximum acceleration/deceleration allowed when using analog velocity and oscillator modes.
Also sets the deceleration rate used when an end-of-travel limit is activated during a move or when an ST (Stop)
or SK (Stop & Kill) command is sent.
Command Details:
Structure
AM{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Maximum acceleration/deceleration
- units
rev/sec/sec (rps/s)
- range
0.167 - 5461.167 (resolution is 0.167 rps/s)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
AM2000
-
AMAM=2000
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set maximum acceleration/deceleration values to 2000 rev/sec/sec.
28
Host Command Reference
AO - Alarm Output
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Alarm Output usage
See also:
AI, BO, MO, SD, SI commands
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si, SVAC3-Q/S/IP, STAC5-Q/S/IP
Defines usage of digital output Y3. Normally this output is used to indicate an Alarm caused by a Drive Fault. This
output can being reconfigured as a general purpose output for use with other types of output commands. There
are three states that can be defined:
AO1: Output is closed (active, low) when a Drive Fault is present.
AO2: Output is open (inactive, high) when an Drive Fault is present.
AO3: Output is not used as an Alarm Output and can be used as a general purpose output.
ST-S, STM17, STM23, STM24-C
Defines the drive’s digital output as an Alarm Output. The output of a drive can be assigned to one of five
functions: Alarm Output, Brake Output, Motion Output, Tach Output or General Purpose Output. Each of these
functions must exclusively use the output, so only one function is allowed. There are two ways to define the
function of this output: via the ST Configurator or via SCL commands. To set the output as an Alarm Output, use
the AO command and one of the codes below. There are three Alarm Output states that can be defined with the
AO command:
AO1: Output is closed (active, low) when a Drive Fault is present.
AO2: Output is open (inactive, high) when a Drive Fault is present.
AO3: Output is not used as an Alarm Output and can be used for another automatic output function or as a
general purpose output.
STM24-SF/QF
Drives with Flex I/O allow a second parameter which allows the user to specify the I/O point used. Before an I/O
point can be used as an Alarm Output it must first be configured as an output with the SD command.
Possible uses for the AO command on the STM24 are as follows (‘n’ denotes the I/O point to be used):
AO1n: Designated output ‘n’ is closed (active, low) when a Drive Fault is present.
AO2n: Designated output ‘n’ is open (inactive, high) when a Drive Fault is present.
AO3n: Designated output ‘n’ is not used as an Alarm Output and can be used for another automatic output
function or as a general purpose output.
NOTE: Setting the AO command to 1 or 2 overrides previous assignments of this output’s function. Similarly, if
you use the BO or MO command to set the function of the output after setting the AO command to 1 or 2, usage
of the output will be reassigned and AO will be automatically set to 3.
Command Details:
Structure
AO{Parameter #1}{Parameter #2 (Flex I/O only)}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
29
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Output Usage (see above)
- units
integer code
- range
1, 2 or 3
Parameter #2 (Flex I/O only)
I/O Point (if applicable, see note below)
- units
integer code
- range
1-4
NOTES:
• For drives with Flex I/O, the SD command must be executed to set an I/O point as an input or output before that
output can be designated as the Alarm Output.
• Parameter #2 only applies to drives equipped with Flex I/O. This includes the STM24SF and STM24QF.
Parameter #2 is not defined for drives equipped with standard I/O.
Examples:
All drives with standard I/O:
Command
Drive sends
AO1
-
AOAO=1
Drives with Flex I/O only:
Command
Drive sends
SD4O
-
AO14
-
AOAO=14
Notes
Alarm Output will close when a Drive Fault occurs
Notes
Configures I/O 4 as output (see SD command for details)
Alarm Output is mapped to output #4, and will close when a Drive Fault occurs.
NOTE: When working with digital inputs and outputs it is important to remember the designations low and high.
If current is flowing into or out of an input or output, i.e. the circuit is energized, the logic state for that input/
output is defined as low or closed. If no current is flowing, i.e. the circuit is de-energized, or the input/output is
not connected, the logic state is high or open. A low state is represented by the “L” character in parameters of
commands that affect inputs/outputs. For example, WI3L means “wait for input 3 low”, and SO1L means “set
output 1 low”. A high state is represented by the “H” character.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
30
Host Command Reference
AP - Analog Position Gain
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
CM22 (Analog Positioning Command Mode)
See also: AD, AF, AZ, CM, SF commands
Sets or requests the analog Input gain that relates to motor position when the drive is in analog position command
mode (see CM command, parameter value 22). Gain value sets the commanded position when the analog input
is at the configured full scale value. Quick Tuner (BLu, SV), STAC6 Configurator (STAC6), or ST Configurator (ST,
STM) can be used to configure the analog inputs for the desired input type, scaling and offsetting.
Command Details:
Structure
AP{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
“X” (040)
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Analog position gain value
- units
encoder counts
- range
0 - 32767
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
AP8000
-
APAP=8000
Notes
Position range over full scale of analog input is 8000 steps
31
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
AR - Alarm Reset (Immediate)
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Alarm Code
See also:
AL, ME, MD commands
Clears Alarms and Drive Faults. If an Alarm or Drive Fault condition persists after sending the AR command the
Alarm is not cleared.
NOTE: Does not re-enable the drive. Use ME (Motor Enable) command to re-enable drive.
Command Details:
Structure
AR
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
AR
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
Notes
Reset Drive Fault and clear Alarm Code (if possible)
32
Host Command Reference
AS - Analog Scaling
Compatibility: All stepper drives and SV servo drives
Affects:
Analog input
See also:
CM command
Sets or requests the analog input scaling setting. This is a code that determines what type of analog input scaling
is desired. The codes for selecting the various settings are in the Details table below.
Command Details:
Structure
AS{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Code
- units
integer number
- range
0 = single-ended +/- 10 volts
1 = single-ended 0 - 10 volts
2 = single-ended +/- 5 volts
3 = single-ended 0 - 5 volts
4 = differential +/- 10 volts
5 = differential 0 - 10 volts
6 = differential +/- 5 volts
7 = differential 0 - 5 volts
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
AS2
-
ASAS=2
Notes
Analog input scaling set to single-ended +/- 5 volts
33
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
AT - Analog Threshold
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
All “Feed to Sensor” type commands
See also:
AF, AZ, FS, FY, FD commands
Sets or requests the Analog Input Threshold that is used by the “Feed to Sensor” command. The threshold value
sets the Analog voltage that determines a sensor state or a trigger value.
Command Details:
Structure
AT{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
“Y” (041)
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Analog threshold value
- units
volts
- range
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si, STAC5, SVAC3: -10.000 to
10.000
ST-S, STM: 0.000 to 5.000
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
AT4.5
-
ATAT=4.5
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Analog input threshold set to 4.5 volts
34
Host Command Reference
AV - Analog Offset Value
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
All Analog input functions
See also:
AF, AP, AZ, CM & Feed commands
Sets or requests the analog offset value in volts.
Command Details:
Structure
AV{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
“Z” (042)
Note: Units of AV command are different than units of “Z”
register; see Data Registers section for more details
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Analog offset value
- units
Volts
- range
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si, STAC5, SVAC3: -10.000 to
10.000
ST-S, STM: -5.000 to 5.000
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
AV0.25
-
AVAV=0.25
Notes
Set analog offset to 0.25 Volts
35
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
AX - Alarm Reset (Buffered)
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Alarm Code
See also:
AR, ME, OF, WT Commands
Clears Alarms and Drive Faults. This command functions the same as AR (Alarm Reset) but is a Buffered type
command.
Typically used in conjunction with OF within a Q program. Please note that while immediately executing AX will
clear the alarm code, it does not guarantee that the condition that caused the alarm has been resolved. Therefore
it is recommended to include a short delay or wait for user input before clearing the alarm and resuming normal
operation.
In addition to clearing alarms and faults, the AX command resets the LED blink timer. As such, if the AX
command is used within a tight loop in a Q program, the LED may actually appear to be solid green.
NOTE: Does not re-enable the drive. Use ME (Motor Enable) command to re-enable drive.
Command Details:
Structure
AX
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
In segment 1 of a Q program...
OF9
-
Notes
When a drive fault occurs load and execute program segment 9
In segment 9 of the same Q program...
WT0.1
-
Short delay to allow the system to settle
AX
-
Alarm reset
ME
-
Motor enable
QX1
-
Load and execute segment 1, which will also reset the OF function.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
36
Host Command Reference
AZ - Analog Zero
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
All Analog input functions
See also:
AF, AP, AV, CM & Feed commands
Activates the analog “auto offset” algorithm. It is useful in defining the current voltage present at the analog input
as the zero reference point, or offset.
Command Details:
Structure
AZ
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
AZ
Drive sends
-
Notes
Start analog offset algorithm
Example: Apply 1 VDC across the AIN and GND terminals of the drive. Then send the AZ command to the
drive. Next apply 4 VDC across the AIN and GND terminals. Send the IA command and the response will be
very close to IA=3.00 (or 4 - 1 VDC).
37
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
BD - Brake Disengage Delay
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
All “F” (Feed) and Jog commands.
See also:
BE command
This command only takes effect if the BO command is set to 1 or 2. After a drive is enabled this is the time value
that may delay a move waiting for the brake to disengage. When beginning a move the delay value must expire
before a move can take place. The delay timer begins counting down immediately after the drive is enabled and
the brake output is set. The BD command sets a time in milliseconds that a move may be delayed.
Command Details:
Structure
BD{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Delay time
- units
seconds
- range
0 - 32.767
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
BD0.2
-
BDBD=0.2
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Sets brake disengage delay to 200 ms
38
Host Command Reference
BE - Brake Engage Delay
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
All “F” (Feed) and Jog commands.
See also:
BD command
This command only takes effect if the BO command is set to 1 or 2. After a drive is commanded to be disabled,
this is the time value that delays the actual disabling of the driver output. When using the dedicated brake output
(see BO command) the output is activated immediately with the disable command, then the drive waits the delay
time before turning off the motor current.
Command Details:
Structure
BE{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Delay time
- units
seconds
- range
0 - 32.767
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
BE0.25
-
BEBE=0.25
Notes
Sets brake engage delay to 250 ms
39
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
BO - Brake Output
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Function of digital output
See also:
AI, AO, BD, ME, MD, MO, SD, SI commands
NOTE: The digital output circuits available on Applied Motion drives are not sized for directly driving a typical
holding brake. An external relay must be wired in circuit between the digital output of the drive and the holding
brake. See the appropriate drive hardware manual for an example wiring diagram.
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si
Defines usage of digital output Y1 as the Brake Output, which can be used to automatically activate and
deactivate a holding brake. Output Y1 can also be configured as a general purpose output for use with other
types of output commands. There are three states that can be defined:
BO1: Output is closed (energized) when drive is enabled, and open when the drive is disabled.
BO2: Output is open (de-energized) when drive is enabled, and closed when the drive is disabled.
BO3: Output is not used as a Brake Output and can be used as a general purpose output.
ST-S, STM17, STM23, STM24-C
Defines the drive’s digital output as a Brake Output. The output of a drive can be assigned to one of five functions:
Alarm Output, Brake Output, Motion Output, Tach Output, or General Purpose Output. Each of these functions
must exclusively use the output, so only one function is allowed. There are two ways to define the function of this
output: via ST Configurator or via SCL commands. To set the output as a Brake Output, use the BO command
and one of the codes below.
BO1: Output is closed (active, low) when the drive is enabled, and open when the drives is disabled.
BO2: Output is open (inactive, high) when the drive is enabled, and closed when the drive is disabled.
BO3: Output is not used as a Brake Output and can be used for another automatic output function or as a
general purpose output.
STM24-SF/QF
Drives with Flex I/O allow a second parameter which allows the user to specify the I/O point used. Before an I/O
point can be used as a Brake Output it must first be configured as an output with the SD command.
Possible uses for the BO command on the STM24 are as follows (‘n’ denotes the I/O point to be used):
BO1n: Designated output ‘n’ is closed (active, low) when the drive is enabled and open when the drive is
disabled.
BO2n: Designated output ‘n’ is open (inactive, high) when the drive is enabled and closed when the drive is
disabled.
BO3n: Designated output ‘n’ is not used as a Brake Output and can be used for another automatic output
function or as a general purpose output.
STAC5-S, SVAC3-S
Defines usage of digital output Y2 as the Brake Output, which can be used to automatically activate and
deacti¬vate a holding brake. Output Y2 can also be configured as a Motion Output, a Tach Output, or a General
Purpose output for use with other types of output commands. There are three states that can be defined:
BO1: Output is closed (energized) when drive is enabled, and open when the drive is disabled.
BO2: Output is open (de-energized) when drive is enabled, and closed when the drive is disabled.
BO3: Output is not used as a Brake Output and can be used as a general purpose output.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
40
Host Command Reference
STAC5-Q/IP, SVAC3-Q/IP
Defines usage of digital output Y2 as the Brake Output, which can be used to automatically activate and
deactivate a holding brake. Output Y2 can also be configured as a Tach Output, or a General Purpose output for
use with other types of output commands. There are three states that can be defined:
BO1: Output is closed (energized) when drive is enabled, and open when the drive is disabled.
BO2: Output is open (de-energized) when drive is enabled, and closed when the drive is disabled.
BO3: Output is not used as a Brake Output and can be used as a general purpose output.
NOTE: Setting the BO command to 1 or 2 overrides previous assignments of this output’s function. Similarly, if
you use the AO or MO command to set the function of the output after setting the BO command to 1 or 2, usage
of the output will be reassigned and BO will be automatically set to 3.
Command Details:
Structure
BO{Parameter #1}{Parameter #2 (Flex I/O only}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Output Usage (see above)
- units
integer code
- range
1, 2 or 3
Parameter #2 (Flex I/O only)
I/O Point (if applicable, see note below)
- units
integer code
- range
1-4
NOTES:
• For drives with Flex I/O, the SD command must be executed to set an I/O point as an output before that
output can be assigned as the Brake Output.
• Parameter #2 only applies to drives equipped with Flex I/O. This includes the STM24SF and STM24QF.
Parameter #2 is not defined for drives equipped with standard I/O.
Examples:
All drives with standard I/O:
Command
Drive sends
BO1
-
BOBO=1
Notes
Brake Output will be closed when drive is enabled
Drives with Flex I/O only:
Command
Drive sends
Notes
SD4O -
Configures I/O 4 as output (see SD command for details)
BO14
-
Brake Output is mapped to I/O point 4 and will be Closed when drive is enabled
BOBO=14
41
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
BR - Baud Rate
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Serial communications
See also:
TD, PB, PM, PR commands
Sets or requests the bit rate (baud) for serial communications. At power up a drive will send its power-up packet
at 9600 baud. If a response from a host system (such as a software application from Applied Motion) is not
detected after 1 second and the drive is configured for SCL or Q operation (see PM command) the drive will set
the baud rate according to the value stored in the Baud Rate NV parameter. A Host system can set the baud rate
at anytime using this command. See Appendix B, “Host Serial Communications” for details.
NOTE 1: Setting the value takes effect immediately.
NOTE 2: Due to processor speed limitations, -Si drives can accept only parameter values 1, 2 or 3. -S and -Q
drives will accept parameter values of 1-5.
Command Details:
Structure
BR{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Baud rate (see above)
- units
integer code
- range
1 = 9600 bps
2 = 19200
3 = 38400
4 = 57600 (-S and -Q drives only)
5 = 115200 (-S and -Q drives only)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
BR2
-
BRBR=2
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Baud rate is immediately set to 19200
42
Host Command Reference
BS - Buffer Status
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
CT, PS commands
Requests from the drive the number of available command locations in the command buffer. This technique
simplifies sending commands by eliminating the need to calculate if there is enough space in the buffer for a
command. If the drive responds with at least a “1”, a command can be sent.
If a drive responds to the BS command with the value “63” it means the buffer is empty. If a “0” is returned the
buffer is full and no more buffered commands can be accepted (a buffer overflow will occur if another command is
sent).
Command Details:
Structure
BS
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Units
Empty command spaces in buffer
Examples:
Command
BS
Drive sends
BS=20
Notes
There is room in the buffer for 20 more commands
43
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
CA - Change Acceleration Current
Compatibility: STM Integrated Step Motors
Affects:
Motor accel/decel current and torque
See also:
PA, CC, PC commands
Sets or requests the accel/decel current setting (“peak of sine”) of the stepper drive, also known as the peak
current. CA will only accept parameter values equal to or larger than the current CC setting.
NOTE: CA has no effect in Command Mode 7 (CM7 - Step and Direction mode).
Command Details:
Structure
CA{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
“M” (029)
Note: The CA command uses different units than the “M”
register; see Data Registers section for details
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Accel/Decel Current
- units
amps (resolution is 0.01 amps)
- range
STM23: 0 - 5.0
STM17: 0 - 2.0
Configurator software may also be used to set all current levels.
Example:
STM17, STM23
Command
Drive Sends
Notes
CA1.75
-
Set accel/decel current to 1.75 amps (peak of sine)
CACA=1.75
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
44
Host Command Reference
CC - Change Current
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Motor current and torque
See also:
CA, CI, CP, PC commands
BLu, SV
Sets or requests the continuous (RMS) current setting of the servo drive.
STAC6
Sets or requests the current setting (“peak of sine”) of the stepper drive, also known as the running current. The
range of the CC command may be limited from the ranges shown in the Parameters table below based on the
settings defined in the STAC6 Configurator software. Use STAC6 Configurator to select a motor and set the
maximum current setting. Note that setting CC automatically sets CI to the same value if the new CC value is less
than the starting CI value.
ST-Q/Si, ST-S, STM
Sets or requests the current setting (“peak of sine”) of the stepper drive, also known as the running current. The
range of the CC command may be limited from the ranges shown in the Parameters table below based on the
settings defined in the ST Configurator software. Use ST Configurator to select a motor and set the maximum
current setting. Note that setting CC automatically sets CI to 50% of CC. If a CI value different than 50% of CC is
needed be sure to always set CI after setting CC.
Command Details:
Structure
CC{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
“N” (030)
Note: The CC command uses different units than the “N”
register; see Data Registers section for details
Parameter Details:
BLu, SV, SVAC3
Parameter #1
Continuous current setting
- units
amps rms (resolution is 0.01 amps)
- range
BLuDC4: 0 - 4.5
BLuDC9: 0 - 9.0
BLuAC5: 0 - 5.0
SV: 0 - 7.0
SVAC3 (120V): 0 - 3.5
SVAC3 (220V): 0 - 1.8
STAC6, ST-Q/Si, ST-S, STM, STAC5
Parameter #1
Running current
- units
amps (resolution is 0.01 amps)
- range*
STAC6: 0 - 6.0
ST5 : 0 - 5.0
ST10: 0 - 10.0
STM: 0 - 5.0
STAC5 (120): 0 - 5
STAC5 (220): 0 - 2.55
45
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
*Current setting in stepper drives depends on the selected motor. Use Configurator software to select a motor
and set the maximum current setting.
Examples:
BLu, SV, SVAC3
Command
Drive sends
CC4.50
-
CCCC=4.5
Notes
Set continuous current to 4.5 amps rms
STAC6
Command
Drive sends
Notes
CC4.50
-
Set running current to 4.5 amps
CI2
-
Set idle current to 2.0 amps
CC1.8
-
Set idle current to 1.8 amps
CCCC=1.8
CI
CI=1.8
CI automatically set to 1.8 amps along with CC1.8 command
ST-Q/Si, ST-S, STM, STAC5
Command
Drive sends
CC3
-
CI
CI=1.5
CI1
-
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set running current to 3.0 amps
CI automatically set to 1.5 amps along with CC3 command
Set idle current to 1.0 amps
46
Host Command Reference
CD - Idle Current Delay Time
Compatibility: Stepper drives only
Affects:
Motor current at rest
See also:
CC, CI commands
Sets or requests the amount of time the drive will delay before transitioning from full current (CC) to idle current
(CI). This transition is made after a step motor takes the final step of a move. Operating in any form of pulse &
direction mode the drive will reset the idle current delay timer each time a step pulse is received by the drive.
Command Details:
Structure
CD{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Delay time
- units
seconds
- range
0.00 to 10.00
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
CD0.4
-
CDCD=0.4
Notes
Idle current delay time set to 0.4 seconds
47
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
CE - Communication Error
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
AL command
Requests the hexadecimal equivalent of the communication error’s 8-bit binary word. The presence of a comm
error will also be shown in the Alarm Code (AL command) as well as the status LEDs at the front of the drive
(Appendix F). Bit assignments for the 8-bit word are shown in the Response Details table below.
Command Details:
Command Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Response Details:
Response
Communication error code
- units
hexadecimal code
- range
bit 0 = parity flag error
bit 1 = framing error
bit 2 = noise flag error
bit 3 = overrun error
bit 4 = Rx buffer full
bit 5 = Tx buffer full
bit 6 = bad SPI op-code
bit 7 = Tx time-out
Examples:
Command
CE
CE
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
CE=0010
CE=0002
Notes
Rx buffer full
Framing error
48
Host Command Reference
CF - Anti-resonance Filter Frequency
Compatibility: Stepper drives only
Affects:
Mid-range performance of step motors
See also:
CG command
Sets or requests the anti-resonance filter frequency setting. This setting is in Hz and works in conjunction with the
anti-resonance filter gain setting (CG) to cancel instabilities due to mid-band resonance.
NOTE: We strongly suggest using the appropriate Configurator software application to set this value by entering
as accurate a load inertia value as possible in the motor settings window.
Command Details:
Structure
CF{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Filter frequency
- units
Hz
- range
1 - 2000
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
CF1400
-
CFCF=1400
Notes
Set anti-resonance filter frequency to 1400 Hz
49
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
CG - Anti-resonance Filter Gain
Compatibility: Stepper drives only
Affects:
Mid-range performance of step motors
See also:
CF command
Sets or requests the anti-resonance filter gain setting. This setting is unit-less and works in conjunction with the
anti-resonance filter frequency setting (CF) to cancel instabilities due to mid-band resonance.
NOTE: We strongly suggest using the appropriate Configurator software application to set this value by entering
as accurate a load inertia value as possible in the motor settings window.
Command Structure:
CG{Parameter #1}
Command Details:
Structure
CG{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Filter gain
- units
integer number
- range
0 - 32767
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
CG800
-
CGCG=800
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set anti-resonance filter gain to 800
50
Host Command Reference
CI - Change Idle Current
Compatibility: Stepper drives only
Affects:
Motor current at standstill, holding torque
See also:
CC, PI, CD commands
Idle current is the level of current supplied to each motor phase when the motor is not moving. Using an idle
current level lower than the running motor current level (see CC command) aids in motor cooling. A common
level used for the idle current setting is 50% of the running current. After a motor move, there is a time delay after
the motor takes its last step before the reduction to the idle current level takes place. This delay is set by the CD
command.
STAC6
CI cannot be greater than CC. If you attempt to set CI higher than CC it will be automatically limited to the CC
value. Furthermore, setting CC automatically sets CI to the same value if the new CC value is less than the
starting CI value.
ST-Q/Si, ST-S, STM
CI cannot be greater than 90% of CC. If you attempt to set CI to a higher value than this CI is automatically
limited to 90% of CC. Furthermore, setting CC automatically sets CI to 50% of the CC value. If a CI value
different than 50% of CC is needed be sure to always set CI after setting CC.
Command Details:
Structure
CI{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
“O” (031)
Note: The CI command uses different units than the “O”
register; see Data Registers section for more details
Parameter Details:
STAC6
Parameter #1
Idle current
- units
amps
- range
0 - 100% of running current
ST-Q/Si, ST-S, STM, STAC5
Parameter #1
Idle current
- units
amps
- range
0 - 90% of running current
Examples:
STAC6
Command
Drive sends
CI1.0
-
CICI=1
CC0.5
-
CI
CI=0.5
Notes
Set idle current to 1.0 amps
Set running current to 0.5 amps
CI automatically set 0.5 amps along with CC0.5 command
51
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
ST-Q/Si, ST-S, STM, STAC5
Command
Drive sends
CI2
-
CC2
-
CI
CI=1
CI1.8
-
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set idle current to 2 amps
Set running current to 2 amps
CI automatically set to 1 amp to match 50% of CC2 command
Set idle current to 1.8 amps, or 90% of last CC value
52
Host Command Reference
CJ - Commence Jogging
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
JS, JA, JL, SJ, CS and DI commands.
Starts the motor jogging. The motor accelerates up to the jog speed (JS) at a rate defined by the jog accel (JA)
command, then runs continuously until stopped. To stop jogging, use the SJ (Stop Jogging) command for a
controlled decel rate (decel rate set by JL command). For a faster stop, use the ST command (decel rate set by
AM command), but beware that if the speed or load inertia is high, the drive may miss steps, stall, or fault. The
jogging direction is set by the last DI command. Use the CS command to change jog speed and direction while
already jogging. CS does not affect JS.
Use in Q Programs (Q drives only)
Within a stored Q program jog moves are most commonly initiated with the CJ command. However, because
the SJ and ST commands are immediate type they cannot be used within a Q program to stop the jog move. So
the procedure to stop a jog move within a Q program involves both the MT (Multi-tasking) and SM (Stop Move)
commands. See Examples below for a sample command sequence.
Command Details:
Structure
CJ
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
JA10
JL25
JS1
CJ
CS10
SJ
Drive sends
-
-
-
-
-
-
Notes
Set jog accel to 10 rps/s
Set jog decel to 25 rps/s
Set jog speed to 1 rps
Start jogging with speed set by last JS command
Change jog speed to 10 rps
Stop jogging using decel rate set by last JL command
The following example changes the jog speed during program execution by directly loading a value into the “J”
register. This method allows for dynamically calculated jog speeds, and does not affect the original JS or DI
setting. CJ always starts a jog move using JS and DI, so this is the recommended method of changing speed
dynamically during program execution.
Sample Q program sequence
MT1
Turn Multi-tasking ON
FI58
Filter input X5 for 8 processor ticks (2 msec)
WIX5L
Wait for input X5 low
CJ
Commence jogging
RLJ480
Change speed to 2 rev/sec by directly loading the J register. Note, units are 0.25rpm.
WIX5H
Wait for input X5 high
SMD
Stop Move using the decel ramp set by JL
53
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
CM - Command Mode (AKA Control Mode)
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Drive mode of operation
See also:
PM command
Sets or requests the Command Mode that the drive operates in. For more automated setup of command modes
use the appropriate Configurator or Quick Tuner software application. The most common command mode is
Point-to-Point (21), in which all move commands can be executed. Move commands (like FL, FP, FS, and CJ) can
still be executed when the command mode is set to Step & Direction (7), because the drive will temporarily switch
to command mode 21 to execute the move, then revert back to command mode 7 when the move is finished.
However move commands are either ignored or do not function properly when the command mode is set to any
velocity mode (11-18) or the Analog Position mode (22).
WARNING: Changing the Command Mode without proper care may cause the motor to spin at a high rate of
speed or give other unexpected results. For this reason it is suggested that the appropriate Configurator or Quick
Tuner software application be used to test specific Command Modes first before changing them in the application
using the CM command.
Command Details:
Structure
CM{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
“m” (061)
Note: Because a drive can change Command Mode on it’s
own to complete certain moves, the CM command and the
“m” register may not always match.
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Command mode
- units
integer code
- range
1 - Commanded Torque (servo only)
2 - Analog Torque (servo only)
7 - Step & Direction
10 - Commanded Velocity (jog mode)
11 - Analog velocity
12 to 18 - (see below)
21 - Point-to-Point
22 - Analog Position
NOTE: In Command Modes 11, 12, 13 and 14, input X2 will function to reverse the direction of motion.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
54
Host Command Reference
Command Modes 12 to 18 are for stepper drives and SV servo drives only:
12 - Analog velocity mode with input X1 as run/stop input
13 - Analog velocity mode with input X5 (X4 for STAC5 drives) as speed change input
14 - Analog velocity mode with input X1 as run/stop input and input X5 (X4 for STAC5 drives) as speed change
input
15 - Velocity mode (JS for speed)
16 - Velocity mode (JS for speed) with input X1 as run/stop input
17 - Velocity mode (JS for speed) with input X5 (X4 for STAC5 drives) as speed change input
18 - Velocity mode (JS for speed) with input X1 as run/stop input and input X5 (X4 for STAC5 drives) as speed
change input
NOTE: It is recommended to use Configurator or Quick Tuner software for setting up velocity mode operation.
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
CM2
-
Notes
Sets the servo drive to Analog Torque mode, at which time there is a
linear relationship between the voltage at the drive’s analog input and the
motor current.
CM7
-
Sets the drive to Step & Direction input mode, which is used for all digital
positioning schemes like Step (Pulse) & Direction, CW/CCW Pulse, and
A/B Quadrature. Use the appropriate Configurator or Quick Tuner
application to set the proper scheme within this mode.
CM10
-
Sets the drive to Command Velocity, or jog mode, which in practice is
very similar to Point-to-Point mode (CM21). When in CM21 and a jog
command is issued, like CJ, the drive automatically switches to CM10
during the jog move and then back to CM21 when the jog move is
stopped. Conversely, when in CM10 and a feed move is commanded,
like FL, the drive automatically switches to CM21 during the move and
then back to CM10 when the move is finished.
CM10 is most useful with servo drives, and when the JM (Jog Mode) is
set to 2. This puts the drive into a jog mode in which position error is
ignored. Then, when the motor is at rest the drive acts somewhat like a
constant friction device in that a certain amount of torque (set by CC and
CP commands) is required to move the shaft.
CM11
-
Sets the drive to Analog Velocity mode. In servo drives this will be similar
to the Analog Torque mode, where voltage level at the analog input
relates to motor speed. In stepper drives this puts the drive into
continuous oscillator mode, with speed set by the JS command.
CM22
-
Sets the drive to Analog Positioning mode. In this mode it is also
possible to control the position through the use of an external encoder.
55
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
CP - Change Peak Current
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Affects:
Motor current, especially during acceleration and deceleration
See also:
CC, PC, PP commands
Sets or requests the peak (RMS) current setting of the servo drive. Peak current sets the maximum current that
should be used with a given motor. When the motor position requires more than the continuous value, the peak
current time calculation is done using I2/T which integrates current values for more accurate modeling of drive
and motor heating. The servo drive will allow peak current for nor more than one second. After one second of
operation at peak current the current is reduced to the continuous current setting (see CC command).
Command Details:
Structure
CP{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
“O” (031)
Note: The CP command uses different units than the “O”
register; see Data Registers section for more details
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Peak current limit
- units
amps RMS
- range
BLuDC4: 0 - 13.5 A
BLuDC9: 0 - 18.0 A
BLuAC5: 0 - 15.0 A
SV7: 0 - 14.0 A
SVAC3 (120V): 0 - 7.5
SVAC3 (220V): 0 - 3.75
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
CP9.0
-
CPCP=9.0
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Peak current is set to 9.0 amps RMS
56
Host Command Reference
CR - Compare Registers
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
Contents of condition code register “h”
See also:
RI, RD, RM, RL, QJ commands
Compare the contents of two data registers. The first data register (Parameter #1) is tested by comparing it
against the data value in the second data register (Parameter #2). The result is a condition code that can be used
for program conditional processing (see QJ command). For Example, if the first data register is greater than the
second the “greater than” flag is set and the QJGx command can be used to create a conditional jump.
Command Details:
Structure
CR(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
All data registers
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
First data register assignment
- units
character
- range
All data register assignments
Parameter #2
Second data register assignment
- units
character
- range
All data register assignments
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
CRE1
-
QJG5
-
Notes
Compare data register “E” to data register “1”
If “E” register is greater than “1” register jump to line 5 of Q segment,
otherwise proceed to next line.
57
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
CS - Change Speed
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Jog speed while jogging
See also:
CJ, JS, JA, JL commands
Sets or requests the jogging speed in rev/sec while jogging. When Jogging using the CJ command the Jog speed
can be changed dynamically by using this command. The sign of CS can be positive or negative allowing the
direction of jogging to be changed dynamically also. Ramping between speeds is controlled by the JA and JL
commands. Setting CS does not change JS or DI.
Command Details:
Structure
CS{Parameter #1}
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
“J” (026)
Note: The CS command uses different units than the “J”
register; see Data Registers section for more details.
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Jog Speed
- units
rev/sec
- range
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si, ST-S, STAC5, SVAC3:
-133.3333 to 133.3333 (resolution is 0.0042)
STM: -80.0000 to 80.0000 (resolution is 0.0042)
sign determines direction: “-“ for CCW, no sign for CW
Examples:
Command
JS1
CJ
CS2.5
CS
CS-5
SJ
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
-
-
CS=2.5
-
-
Notes
Set base jog speed to 1 rev/sec
Commence jogging
Set jog speed to CW at 2.5 rev/sec
Displays current Jog speed
Set jog speed to CCW at 5 rev/sec
Stop jogging
58
Host Command Reference
CT - Continue
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
PS, ST, SK commands
Resume execution of buffered commands after a PS command has been sent. The PS (Pause) command allows
you to pause execution of commands in the command buffer. After sending the PS command, subsequent
commands are buffered in the command buffer until either a CT command is sent, at which time the buffered
commands resume execution in the order they were received, or until the command buffer is full.
Command Details:
Structure
CT
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
PS
FL2000
WT.25
FL-2000
CT
Drive sends
-
-
-
-
-
Notes
Pause command buffer
CW move, 2000 counts
Wait 0.25 seconds
CCW move, 2000 counts
Resume execution of buffered commands
59
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
DA - Define Address
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Drive address for multi-drop communications
Sets individual drive address character for multi-drop RS-485 communications. This command is not required for
single-axis (point-to-point) or RS-232 communications.
Command Details:
Structure
DA{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
RS-485 network address
- units
character
- range
Valid address characters are:
!“#$%&‘()*+,-./0123456789:;<>[email protected]
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
DA1
-
DADA=1
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set drive address to “1”
60
Host Command Reference
DC - Change Distance
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
FC, FY, FO, FM commands.
Sets or requests the change distance. The change distance is used by various move commands to define more
than one distance parameter. All move commands use the DI command at some level, and many require DC as
well. Examples are FC, FM, FO, and FY. The moves executed by these commands change their behavior after
the change distance (DC) has been traveled. For example, FM is similar to FS, but in an FM move the sensor
input is ignored until the motor has moved the number of steps set by DC. This is useful for masking unwanted
switch or sensor triggers. Since DI sets move direction (CW or CCW), the sign of DC is ignored.
Command Details:
Structure
DC{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
“C” (019)
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
distance
- units
encoder counts
- range
0 to 2,147,483,647
(the sign of negative values is ignored)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
DC80000
-
DCDC=80000
Notes
Set change distance to 80000 counts
DI-100000
DC50000
VE5
VC2
FC
Set overall move distance to 100000 counts in CCW direction
Set change distance to 50000 counts
Set base move velocity to 5 rev/sec
Set change velocity to 2 rev/sec
Initiate FC command
-
-
-
-
-
61
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
DE - Deceleration
Compatibility: All drives
Affects: FC, FD, FE, FL, FM, FO, FS, FP, FY, SH commands
See also: AM, DE, DI, DC, VE commands
Sets or requests the deceleration rate used in point-to-point move commands in rev/sec/sec.
Command Details:
Structure
DE{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
“B” (018)
Note: The DE command uses different units than the “B”
register; see Data Registers section for details
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Deceleration rate
- units
rev/sec/sec (rps/s)
- range
0.167 to 5461.167 (resolution is 0.167 rps/s)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
DE125
-
DEDE=125
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set deceleration rate to 125 rev/sec/sec
62
Host Command Reference
DI - Distance/Position
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
All move commands
See also:
AC, DC, DE and VE commands
Sets or requests the move distance in encoder counts (servo) or steps (stepper). The sign of DI indicates move
direction: no sign means CW and “-” means CCW. DI sets both the distance for relative moves, like FL, and the
position for absolute moves, like FP. DI also sets the direction of rotation for jogging (CJ).
Command Details:
Structure
DI{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
“D” (020)
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
distance
- units
encoder counts (servo) or steps (stepper)
- range
-2,147,483,647 to 2,147,483,647
sign determines direction: “-” for CCW, no sign for CW
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
DI20000
-
DIDI=20000
Notes
Set distance to 20000 counts in the CW direction
DI-8000
FL
Set distance to 8000 counts in the CCW direction
Initiate FL move
-
-
63
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
DL - Define Limits
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
All move commands
See also:
AM command
CW and CCW end-of-travel limits are available on all drives and can be used to define the boundaries of
acceptable motion in a motor/drive system. If one of these inputs is activated while defined as an end-of-travel
limit, motor rotation will stop in that direction, and an alarm code will show at the drive’s status LEDs. When
defining these inputs as end-of-travel limits both inputs are defined together as either active low, active high, or not
used. See below for details.
BLu-S/Q, STAC6
Defines usage of inputs X6 and X7 as dedicated end-of-travel limits. X6 is the CCW limit input and X7 is the CW
limit input. If not needed, X6 and X7 can be redefined as general purpose inputs.
STAC5-S, SVAC3-S
Defines usage of inputs X1 and X2 as dedicated end-of-travel limits. X1 is the CW limit input and X2 is the CCW
limit input. If not needed, X1 and X2 can be redefined as general purpose inputs.
STAC5-Q/IP, SVAC3-Q/IP
Defines usage of inputs IN7 and IN8 as dedicated end-of-travel limits. IN7 is the CW limit input and IN8 is the
CCW limit input. If not needed, IN7 and IN8 can be redefined as general purpose inputs.
Blu-Si
Defines usage of top-board inputs IN7 and IN8 as dedicated end-of-travel limits. IN7 is the CW limit input and IN8
is the CCW limit input.
ST-Q/Si, SV
Defines the usage of inputs X7 and X8 as dedicated end-of-travel limits. X7 is the CW limit input and X8 is the
CCW limit input. If not needed, X7 and X8 can be redefined as general purpose inputs.
ST-S, STM-17/23
Defines the STEP and DIR inputs as CW end-of-travel and CCW end-of-travel limit inputs, respectively. The STEP
and DIR inputs can each be assigned to only one function in an application. If you want to use the STEP and DIR
inputs as end-of-travel limit inputs you can define them as such in two ways, with the ST Configurator software,
or with the DL command. DL takes no effect if the drive is set in Command Mode (CM) 7, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16,
17 or 18, because these modes predefine these inputs and take precedence over the DL command. Also, setting
the JE command after setting the DL command reassigns the STEP and DIR inputs as jog inputs and turns off
any limit input usage (DL3). In other words, the DL and JE commands, as well as Command Modes (CM) 7, 11,
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 each assign a usage to the STEP and DIR inputs. Each of these must exclusively
use the STEP and DIR inputs. Command Modes are most dominant and will continually prevent DL and JE from
using the inputs. DL and JE exclude each other by overwriting the usage of the STEP and DIR inputs.
STM24-C
Defines the usage of inputs IN1 and IN2 as dedicated end-of-travel limits. IN1 is the CW limit input and IN2 is the
CCW limit input. If not needed, IN1 and IN2 can be redefined as general purpose inputs.
STM24-SF/QF
Drives with Flex I/O allow a user to configure a drives I/O (I/O1 through I/O4) to be either an input or an output by
using the SD command. For the DL command,
the drive uses inputs I/O3 and I/O4 as dedicated end-of-travel limits. I/O3 is the CW limit input and I/O4 is the
CCW limit input. If not needed, I/O3 and I/O4 can be redefined as general purpose inputs.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
64
Host Command Reference
There are three end-of-travel limit input states that can be defined with the DL command:
DL1: End-of-travel limit occurs when an input is closed (energized). Motion stops automatically at rate
defined by AM command.
DL2: End-of-travel limit occurs when an input is open (de-energized). Motion stops automatically at rated
defined by AM command.
DL3: Inputs are not used as end-of-travel limit inputs and can be used as a general purpose inputs. In the
case of ST-S and STM drives, DL will be automatically set to 3 if CM is set to 7, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16,
17, or 18, or if JE is executed after the DL command is set.
Command Details:
Structure
DL{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Limit input state (see above)
- units
integer number
- range
1, 2 or 3
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
DL1
-
DLDL=1
Notes
Set limit inputs to work with normally open limit switches
DL3
Set limit inputs to act as general purpose inputs
-
NOTE: When working with digital inputs and outputs it is important to remember the designations low and high.
If current is flowing into or out of an input or output, i.e. the circuit is energized, the logic state for that input/
output is defined as low or closed. If no current is flowing, i.e. the circuit is de-energized, or the input/output is
not connected, the logic state is high or open. A low state is represented by the “L” character in parameters of
commands that affect inputs/outputs. For example, WI3L means “wait for input 3 low”, and SO1L means “set
output 1 low”. A high state is represented by the “H” character.
65
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
DR - Data Register for Capture
Compatibility: Q servo drives only (BLu-Q and SV-Q)
Affects:
Quick Tuner Data Capture
Sets or requests the data register used in the register plot data source in Quick Tuner. Any data register can be
selected for viewing when capturing data using Quick Tuner.
Command Details:
Command Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
All data registers
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Data register assignment
- units
character
- range
All data register assignments
Examples:
Command
DRa
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
Notes
Set capture data register to “a” (Analog Command) register
66
Host Command Reference
ED - Encoder Direction
Compatibility: BLu, STAC5, STAC6, SV7, SVAC3
Affects:
Encoder count direction
See also:
EF, EI commands
BLu, STAC5, STAC6, SV7, SVAC3
Sets or requests the encoder count direction.
Command Details:
Structure
ED {Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
none
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Encoder Count Direction
- units
Binary flag (0 or 1)
- range
0 = default behavior
1 = count in reverse
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
ED1
-
EDED=1
Notes
Set encoder to count in reverse
67
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
EF - Encoder Function
Compatibility: Stepper drives with encoder feedback
Affects:
Stall Detection and Stall Prevention
See also:
CC, CI, ER, PF commands
NOTE: The behavior of this function was updated subsequent to firmware rev 1.04L (STM17, 23). Most notably, a
power-cycle was requried to initialize the drive with a new EF setting. Drives with more recent firmware perform a
current probe and encoder alignment immediately following execution of the EF command, and do not require the
drive to be reset. All descriptions shown here assume that the drive is running current firmware.
ST-Q/Si, STM
Sets or requests the decimal equivalent of the encoder function’s 3-bit word. The encoder function can be set
through Configurator or by using the EF command. Only stepper drives with encoder inputs (optional on ST-Q/
Si, STAC5 and STM drives) running a step motor with a shaft-mounted encoder can utilize the Stall Detection and
Stall Prevention functions. Note, this feature is NOT available on the STAC6.
AMP recommends an encoder with differential outputs and a resolution of at least 1000 lines (4000 counts/rev).
EF0: Disable Encoder Functionality
EF1: Turn Stall Detection ON.
EF2: Turn Stall Prevention ON.
EF6: Turn Stall Prevention with time-out ON.
The drive performs a full current probe for encoder alignment during power-up and after each EF command is
sent. It is very important to raise the idle and continuous current settings to the maximum value and then execute
the new EF setting after a 1 second delay. Once the EF command is completed, the current may be reset to its
normal value.
Command Details:
Structure
EF{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Encoder function setting
- units
decimal equivalent of 3-bit binary word
- range
0 = Encoder function off
1 = Stall Detection
2 = Stall Prevention
6 = Stall Prevention with time-out
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
68
Host Command Reference
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
EF1
-
EFEF=1
Notes
Turn ON Stall Detection function
EF6
-
Enable Stall Prevention with time-out
EFEF=6
Example encoder alignment sequence (STM24):
CC6
CI5.4
EF1
CC3
CI2.4
Raise current to 6A
Raise idle current to 5.4A*
Enable Stall Detection feature
Lower current to normal running level (application dependent)
Lower idle current to normal running level (application dependent)
If this is done through a Q program, add a short delay after raising current levels:
CC6
CI5.4
WT1
EF1
CC3
CI2.4
Raise current to 6A
Raise idle current to 5.4A*
Short delay
Enable Stall Detection feature
Lower current to normal running level (application dependent)
Lower idle current to normal running level (application dependent)
* 90% of CC; see CI command for details
69
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
EG - Electronic Gearing
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Command Mode 7, FE and HW commands
See also:
CM, ER, FE and HW commands.
BLu, SV
Sets or requests the pulses per revolution for electronic gearing. For example, with an EG value of 20000 the
servo drive will require 20000 pulses from the master pulse source to move the servo motor 1 revolution.
STAC6, ST-Q/Si, ST-S, STM
Sets or requests the desired step/microstep resolution of the step motor.
Command Details:
Structure
EG{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
“R” (034)
Note: With servo drives the EG command is equal to the
“R” register. With stepper drives the EG command is equal
to twice the “R” register.
Parameter #1
Servo = electronic gearing ratio
Stepper = step resolution
- units
Servo = counts/rev
Stepper = steps/rev
- range
Servo = 200 - 32000
Stepper = 200 - 51200
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
EG20000
-
EGEG=20000
RLR
RLR=20000
Notes
Set electronic gearing resolution in servo drive to 20000 pulses/rev
EG36000
-
EGEG=36000
RLR
RLR=18000
steps/rev
Set microstep resolution to 36000 steps/rev in a stepper drive
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
“R” register matches the EG setting in a servo drive
“R” register contains 1/2 the EG setting in a stepper drive, or 18000
70
Host Command Reference
EI - Input Noise Filter
Compatibility: ST, STM, SV7, SVAC3, STAC5 and STAC6
Affects:
“Input Noise Filter” parameter
See also:
CM, ER, FE and HW commands.
Sets or requests the Input Noise Filter parameter. This parameter acts as a low-pass filter, rejecting noise above
the specified frequency.
NOTE: On STAC5-S and SVAC3-S drives, this parameter setting affects inputs X1 - X4, and is an alternative to
the FI command if input noise filtering is required.
STM17
Given a cutoff frequency, an appropriate EI value may be calculated as follows (where ‘f’ is the target cutoff
frequency):
EI = 9,000,000 / f
ST, STM23 / 24, SV7, SVAC3, STAC5, STAC6
Given a cutoff frequency, an appropriate EI value may be calculated as follows (where ‘f’ is the target cutoff
frequency):
EI = 15,000,000 / f
Command Details:
Structure
EI {Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
none
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Encoder Noise Filter Constant
- units
- range
0 - 255
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
EI128
-
EI128
-
EIEG=128
Notes
(STM17) Set encoder noise filter to 70.3 kHz (9,000,000 / 128)
(STM23) Set encoder noise filter to 117.2 kHz (15,000,000 / 128)
71
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
EP - Encoder Position
Compatibility: Servo drives and stepper drives with encoder feedback
Affects:
Encoder position value
See also:
SP, MT, WM commands.
The EP command allows the host to define the present encoder position. For example, if the encoder is at 4500
counts, and you would like to refer to this position as 0, send EP0. To ensure that the internal position counter
resets properly, use SP immediately following EP. For example, to set the position to zero after a homing routine,
send EP0 then SP0.
Sending EP with no position parameter requests the present encoder position from the drive.
For best results when using stepper systems, AMP recommends setting both CC and CI to the motor’s maximum
ratings before issuing an EP command. This will avoid any position error caused by the motor’s detent torque.
Once EP has been changed, reset CC and CI to their running levels.
WARNING: When in Multi-tasking mode (see MT command), the EP command should not be issued while
the drive is simultaneously executing a move command (CJ, FL, FP, FS, etc.). A drive fault may result.
Command Details:
Structure
EP{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“e” (053) read only
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Encoder position value
- units
Counts
- range
-2,147,483,647 to 2,147,483,647
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
Notes
EP0
SP0
-
-
(Step 1) reset internal position counter
(Step 2) reset internal position counter
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
72
Host Command Reference
ER - Encoder Resolution
Compatibility: Servo drives and stepper drives with encoder feedback
Affects:
Motor Operation
Sets the encoder resolution in quadrature counts. For example, if the motor connected to the drive has an 8000
count (2000 line) per revolution encoder, set the encoder resolution to 8000.
WARNING: Changing this setting will affect motor commutation with servo drives. Use the Quick Tuner
setup utility to change this setting, then run the “Timing Wizard” in Quick Tuner to properly set up the
motor commutation.
Command Details:
Structure
ER{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Encoder resolution
- units
encoder counts/rev
- range
200 - 128000
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
ER8000
-
ERER=8000
Notes
Set encoder resolution to 8000 counts/rev
73
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
FC - Feed to Length with Speed Change
Compatibility: All drives, though Q drives have added functionality (see below)
See also:
VC, VE, DC, DI, SD, WP commands
Executes a feed to length (relative move) with a speed change. Overall move distance and direction come from
the last DI command. Accel and decel are from AC and DE commands, respectively. Initial speed is VE. After the
motor has moved DC counts, the speed changes to VC. If DC is equal to or greater than DI, a speed change will
not occur.
Optionally, a parameter pair may be used with the FC command to designate a switch and polarity to use as a
trigger for the final move segment. If a switch parameter is used, the motor will change speed at the DC distance
and will maintain that speed until the input is triggered. Once this input condition is met, the drive will travel the
full DI distance and decelerate to a stop per the DE ramp. In this scenario, the overall move distance is the sum
of DC, DI and the distance between the DC change point and the point where the input is triggered. The overall
distance then, depends on the location of the trigger input.
Q drives only
With Q drives there may be multiple VCs and DCs per FC command, allowing for more complex, multi-velocity
moves. To make multi-velocity moves with more than one speed change, the WP (Wait Position) command is also
required. A sample sequence is shown in the Examples section below.
(Velocity)
DE
AC
VE
VC
DC
(Distance)
DI
FC used without optional parameter
(Velocity)
SWITCH
EVENT
DE
AC
VE
VC
(Distance)
DC
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
DI
FC used with optional parameter
74
Host Command Reference
Command Details:
Structure
FC{Parameter #1}{Parameter #2}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
DI50000
VE5
DC40000
VC0.5
FC
Drive sends
-
-
-
-
-
Notes
Set distance to 50000 steps
Set velocity to 5 rps
Set change distance to 40000 steps
Set change velocity to 0.5 rps
Initiate move
FC with I/O trigger
DI50000
-
VE5
-
DC40000
-
VC0.5
-
FC1L
-
Set distance to 50000 steps
Set velocity to 5 rps
Set change distance to 40000 steps
Set change velocity to 0.5 rps
Initiate move, specifying that the drive will move 50000 steps beyond the point where input 1 goes LOW.
For Q drives only
MT1
-
DI50000
-
VE5
-
DC10000
-
VC10
-
FC
-
WP
-
DC20000
-
VC1
-
WP
-
DC30000
-
VC0.5
-
Turn multi-tasking ON*
Set overall move distance to 50000 steps
Set initial velocity to 5 rps
Set 1st change distance to 10000 steps
Set 1st change velocity to 10 rps
Initiate move
Wait position
Set 2nd change distance to 20000 steps
Set 2nd change velocity to 1 rps
Wait position
Set 3rd change distance to 30000 steps
Set 3rd change velocity to 0.5 rps
* Because multi-tasking is required for the WP command to be used, only Q models can perform multisegment moves.
75
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
FD - Feed to Double Sensor
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
FM, FS, FY, VC commands; see AT command for using analog input as sensor input
Accelerates the motor at rate AC to speed VE. When the first sensor is reached (first input condition is made), the
motor decelerates at rate DE to speed VC. When the second sensor is reached (second input condition is made),
the motor decelerates over the distance DI to a stop at rate DE. The sign of the DI register is used to determine
both the direction of the move (CW or CCW), and the distance past the second sensor. If DI is long the motor
may not begin decel immediately after the second sensor. If DI is short the motor may decelerate using a faster
decel rate than DE. Both analog and digital inputs can be used as sensor inputs.
BLu, STAC6, STAC5-Q/IP, SVAC3-Q/IP, STM
Both sensor inputs must be from the same physical I/O connector of the drive. This means that both inputs used
in this command must reside on the same I/O connector, either IN/OUT 1 or IN/OUT 2. In the case of BLuDC
drives this means that both inputs must reside on the same connector, either the main driver board I/O connector
(DB-25) or the top board connector (screw terminal).
Command Details:
Structure
FD(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
FDX2F4H
Drive sends
Notes
-
Launch Feed to Double Sensor move: decel from VE to VC when
input 2 changes from high to low (falling), then decel to a stop when
input 4 is high
AC50
DE50
DI-1
VE5
VC1
FD1F2H
-
Set accel rate to 50 rev/sec/sec
-
Set decel rate to 50 rev/sec/sec
-
Set move direction to CCW
-
Set initial velocity to 5 rev/sec
-
Set change velocity to 1 rev/sec
-
Launch Feed to Double Sensor move: decel from VE to VC when
input 1 changes from high to low (falling), then decel to a stop when
input 2 is high
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
76
Host Command Reference
FE - Follow Encoder
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
EG, MT commands
Puts drive in encoder following mode until the given digital or analog input condition is met. The master encoder
channels A and B must be wired to the STEP/X1 and DIR/X2 inputs of the drive. Use the EG command before
the FE command to set the following resolution, or use the “R” register to dynamically adjust the following
resolution while following. (Note that in stepper drives the “R” register is equal to 1/2 the EG command).
When the FE command is initiated, the acceleration rate AC is used to ramp the motor up to the following speed.
(Doing this prevents extreme accelerations when the master encoder signal is already at its target velocity). The
motor continues to follow the master encoder pulses until the input condition is met, at which time the motor
decelerates at rate DE to a stop using the DI command as the overall decel distance. If DI is long the motor may
not begin decel immediately after the input condition is met. If DI is short the motor may have to decelerate at a
rate faster than DE.
Before the input condition is met the motor will follow the master encoder pulses in both CW and CCW directions,
regardless of the sign of the DI command. However, once the input condition is met the motor will only stop
properly if moving in the direction set by the DI command.
When done executing the drive returns to the mode it was in before executing the FE command.
NOTE: You must use the appropriate configuration software - Quick Tuner for servos, Configurator for steppers
- to set up the STEP/X1 and DIR/X2 inputs for encoder following. Do this by choosing A/B Quadrature in the
Position mode settings.
NOTE: Take care when changing the “R” register while following because some move parameters will be scaled
as well and therefore the move may change unexpectedly.
Command Details:
Structure
FE(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
AC500
DI8000
FE4L
Drive sends
-
-
-
Notes
Limit acceleration in encoder following to 500 rps/s
Set the stopping offset distance to 8000 counts
Run in encoder following mode until input 4 is low
77
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
FI - Filter Input
Compatibility:
Affects:
See also:
All drives (except STAC5-S)
All commands using inputs
FX, RC, SD, WI and all feed to sensor commands.
See EI for hardware filter alternative, specifically on STAC5 drives.
Applies a digital filter to the given input. The digital input must be at the same level for the time period specified
by the FI command before the input state is updated. For example, if the time value is set to 100 the input must
remain high for 100 processor cycles before high is updated as the input state. One processor cycle is 125µsec
for a servo drive and the STAC5 stepper drive, and 100µsec for all other drives. A value of “0” disables the filter.
BLu, STAC6
This command can be used to apply filters to low speed inputs X3 through X7 on the main driver board of all
drives, and can also be used on top board inputs IN3 through IN7 of SE, QE, and Si drives. Reassigning the
filters to top board inputs of SE, QE and Si drives is done with the FX command.
SV, ST-Q/Si
This command can be used to apply filters to low speed inputs X3 through X8.
ST-S, STM17, STM23
This command can be used to apply filters to inputs STEP, DIR, and EN
STM24-SF/QF
For drives with Flex I/O, this command can be used to apply filters to any input.
STM24-C
This command can be used to apply filters to inputs IN1, IN2 and IN3.
STAC5-Q/IP, SVAC3-Q/IP
This command can be used to apply filters to inputs IN5 - IN8.
Command Details:
Structure
FI{Parameter#1}{Parameter#2}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES, except BLu servos
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
FI4100
-
FI4FI4=100
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Requires that input X4 (if FX=1) maintain the same state (low or
high) for 100 total processor cycles before the drive registers the change
78
Host Command Reference
Digital Input Filters in Detail
Drives have the capability to apply digital
filters to selected digital inputs. With factory
defaults, digital inputs are not filtered through any
means other than the natural response time of the
optical couplers used in the input circuits. Analog
filtering has purposely not been implemented so
as to not restrict the input circuit. However, digital
filtering is available on select digital inputs to
enhance the usage of those inputs.
On occasion, electrical noise at digital inputs
may create a false trigger or even a double-trigger.
This can often happen when using mechanical
switches that “bounce” when activated or deactivated. For this reason there may be a need
to filter an input to eliminate the effects of these
noise conditions. Digital filtering gives the greatest
flexibility by allowing the user to select the amount
of filtering required to eliminate the effects of noise
or bounce.
The digital filters work by continuously
monitoring the level of the inputs to which filters
have been applied using the FI command.
During each processor cycle (servo and STAC5
= 125 µsec, other steppers = 100 µsec),
internal counters associated with the filters are
incremented or decremented depending on
whether each input is high (open) or low (closed),
respectively. When a command that accesses a digital input is executed, the state of the input requested by that
command will be updated only after the internal counter for that input’s filter reaches a threshold value. This
threshold value is also known as the filter value, and is set by the FI command. The flow chart to the right shows
how a digital filter works.
For example, if we apply a digital filter of 2 milliseconds to input 3 on a STAC6 stepper drive, it means we’d
like the level of input 3 (low or high) to be true for a total of 2 milliseconds before the processor updates the state
of input 3 to the state requested by the command currently being executed. If the command being executed is a
WI3L command, which literally means “wait for input 3 low”, it means the processor will wait until the level of input
3 has been low for a total of 2 milliseconds before updating the state of the input as low and finishing the WI3L
command. If by chance input 3 has already been low for the prerequisite 2 milliseconds when the WI3L command
is initiated, there will be no delay in executing the command. On the other hand, if input 3 is high when the WI3L
command is initiated, there will be an additional minimum delay of 2 milliseconds after the input changes state
from high to low. It is important to understand that any fluctuation of the physical signal, by switch bounce or
electrical noise, will contribute to a lag in the processed signal.
To turn filtering of input 3 on we need to use the FI command. The FI command works in processor cycles
and we’re using a STAC6 stepper drive in this example, so a value of 1 equals 100 microseconds. To filter the
EN input for 2 milliseconds the value of the FI command would then be 2 msec divided by 100 usec, or 20. The
correct syntax for the FI command would then be “FI320”.
As can be seen from the example and flow chart above, the functioning of a digital input filter incorporates
an averaging effect on the level of the input. This means that in the example above, if the level of the input 3 were
fluctuating between low and high over a range of processor cycles (maybe due to electrical noise), the drive would
not update the input state until the internal counter value went to zero (for a low state) or the filter value (for a
high state). Another example of this averaging effect is if the input were connected to a pulse train from a signal
generator with a duty cycle of 51% high and 49% low. The input state would eventually be set to a high state,
depending on the time value used in the pulse train.
79
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Filter values are non-volatile for all but the BLu series of servo drives, if followed by an SA command. With a
BLu servo drive, the filter values are lost at power-down and must be set each time the drive is powered on.
NOTE: A side effect of the digital filter, which is true of any filter, is to cause a lag in the response to an input level.
When an input changes state and is solid (no noise), the lag time will be the same as the filter value. When noise
is present the lag may be longer.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
80
Host Command Reference
FL - Feed to Length
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
AC, DE, DI, VE commands
Executes a relative move command. Move distance and direction come from the last DI command. Speed,
accel and decel are from the VE, AC and DE commands, respectively. Executing the FL command with no
parameter initiates a feed to length move that uses the last DI command for direction and distance. Executing
the FL command with a parameter uses the parameter settings for direction and distance without changing the DI
command.
Command Details:
Structure
FL{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Relative distance
- units
counts or steps
- range
-2,147,483,647 to 2,147,483,647
sign determines direction: “-” for CCW, no sign for CW
Examples:
Command
DI20000
FL
Drive sends
-
-
FL20000
-
FL-400
-
Notes
Set distance to 20000 counts in the CW direction
Launch Feed to Length move
Launch Feed to Length move of 20000 counts in the CW direction
without affecting the DI command
Launch Feed to Length move of 400 counts in the CCW direction
without affecting the DI command
81
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
FM - Feed to Sensor with Mask Distance
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
FS command
Executes a Feed to Sensor command (see FS command) except sensor is ignored for the first DC counts of the
move. In other words the sensor is “masked” for a beginning portion of the move. This command is useful for
ignoring noise from a mechanical switch or for clearing a part before sensing the next one.
Command Details:
Structure
FM(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Example: Parts are feeding on a conveyor which is being driven by the motor. A sensor detects the leading
edge of the part and stops. If the part has a hole in it, which is common, when you attempt to feed the next
part into position you may in fact stop after feeding the previous part only a short distance because the sensor
will register the hole in the part rather than the leading edge of the next part. The solution is to use the FM
command instead of the FS command, and to set the DC command for the size of the part (or greater).
Example continued: The parts on a conveyor are 6 inches long. Your mechanical linkage provides 2000 steps
per inch. You want the leading edge of the part to stop moving 1 inch past the sensor, and therefore 5 inches
of the part will not have gone past the sensor yet. To avoid holes in the part and see the next part properly, we
need to mask 5 inches or more of the move. Here are the commands you could use.
Command
Drive sends
DI2000
-
DC10200
-
FM1F
-
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set distance to stop past sensor at 1 inch (2000 steps)
Set distance over which to ignore (mask) the sensor at 5.1 inches, enough to allow the previous part to completely clear the sensor
Initiate FM move. Sensor is connected to input 1 and will close
when it sees a part
82
Host Command Reference
FO - Feed to Length and Set Output
Compatibility:
See Also:
All drives
DC, DI, AO, BO, MO commands
Same as Feed to Length (FL) but changes the state of an output during the move. Overall move distance is
defined by the DI command. Accel rate, decel rate, and velocity are set by the AC, DE and VE commands,
respectively. Distance within overall move at which output condition should be set is defined by the DC command.
If DC is equal to or greater than DI, the input condition will not be met during the move and the output will not be
set.
NOTE: Dedicated output functions - alarm output, brake output, motion output - must be configured as general
purpose before the FO command can be used with the drive’s output. See AO, BO, and MO commands.
Command Details:
Structured
FO(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Example: You’re feeding parts to be cut to length. For maximum throughput, you want to trigger the cut-off
knife as the part is nearing the final position.
Command
AC100
DE100
VE2.5
DI20000
DC15000
FO1L
Drive sends
-
-
-
-
-
-
Notes
Set accel rate to 100 rev/sec/sec
Set decel rate to 100 rev/sec/sec
Set velocity to 2.5 rev/sec
Overall move distance set to 20000 steps
Set output distance set to 15000 steps
Initiate move and set output low at 15000 steps
83
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
FP - Feed to Position
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
AC, DE, DI, SP, VE commands
Executes an absolute move command. Move position comes from the last DI command. Speed, accel and decel
are from VE, AC and DE commands, respectively. Executing the FP command with no parameter initiates a feed
to position move that uses the last DI command for position. Executing the FP command with a parameter uses
the parameter for position without changing the DI command.
Command Details:
Structure
FP{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Absolute position
- units
counts or steps
- range
-2,147,483,647 to 2,147,483,647
Examples:
Example: After homing the motor you want to zero the home position and move to an absolute position 8000
counts (or steps) from the new home position.
Command
SP0
DI8000
FP
Drive sends
-
-
-
FP8000
-
FP8000
-
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set current motor position as absolute zero
Set move position to 8000 counts/steps
Launch Feed to Position
Launch Feed to Position to 8000 counts/steps without affecting the
“D” register
Motor is already at position 8000, no motion occurs.
84
Host Command Reference
FS - Feed to Sensor
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
FD, FM and FY commands; see AT command for using AIN as sensor input
Executes a Feed to Sensor command. Requires input number and condition. The motor moves until a sensor
triggers the specified input condition, then stops a precise distance beyond the sensor. The stop distance is
defined by the DI command. The direction of rotation is defined by the sign of the DI command (“-” for CCW, no
sign for CW). Speed, accel and decel are from the last VE, AC and DE commands, respectively.
A motor moving at a given speed, with a given decel rate, needs a certain distance to stop. If you specify too
short a distance for DI the drive may overshoot the target. Use the following formula to compute the minimum
decel distance, given a velocity V (in rev/sec) and decel rate D (in rev/sec/sec.). R = steps/rev, which will equal
the encoder resolution for a servo motor and the EG setting for a step motor.
minimum decel distance =
(V)2(R)
2(D)
Note that it is possible to use an analog input (AIN) as a discrete sensor by configuring a threshold point. See the
AT command for details.
Command Details:
Structure
FS(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
FS1L
-
FS3R
-
FSX5L
-
Notes
Launch move and decel to stop when sensor tied to input 1 is low
Launch move and decel to stop when sensor tied to input 3 changes
from low to high (rising edge)
Launch move and decel to stop when sensor tied to input X5 is low
85
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
FX - Filter select inputs
Compatibility: All drives (except STAC5, SVAC3)
Affects:
FI command on SE, QE, and Si drives
See also:
FI command
The FX command allows changing the target inputs of a drive’s digital input filters from the main board X3 through
X7 inputs to the top board IN3 through IN7 inputs. This can only be done on SE, QE, and Si drives with firmware
1.53U or later.
Command Details:
Structure
FX{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Digital inputs selector
- units
integer
- range
0 = top board inputs of SE, QE, and Si drives
1 = main board inputs of all drives
Examples:
Command
FX0
FX
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
Notes
-
Cause digital input filters set by FI command to affect top board
inputs IN3 through IN7 of SE, QE, and Si drives.
FX=1
Digital filters are set to be applied to main driver board inputs
X3 through X7.
86
Host Command Reference
FY - Feed to Sensor with Safety Distance
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
DC, FD, FM and FS commands; see AT command for using AIN as sensor input
Executes a Feed to Sensor move while monitoring a predefined safety distance DC. DI defines the direction of
rotation and the stop distance to move after the sensor triggers the stop input condition. Accel rate, decel rate,
and velocity are set by the AC, DE, and VE commands, respectively. Note that the maximum final motor position
will be the safety distance plus the distance required to decelerate the load, which is dependent on the decel rate
DE.
NOTE: If the safety distance is exceeded, three things will happen. The motor is stopped, the drive sends the
host an exclamation point (“!”) and adds a value of 1 to the Other Flags register (“F” register). This can occur
if the sensor is not encountered before DC is reached, or if the DI value is set high enough that the total move
distance would exceed the maximum of DC plus the deceleration distance determined by DE.
This command is useful for avoiding machine jams or detecting the end of a roll of labels. For example, you are
feeding labels and you want to stop each label 2000 steps after the sensor detects the leading edge. The labels
are 60,000 steps apart. Therefore, if you move the roll more than 60,000 steps without detecting a new label, you
must be at the end of the roll.
NOTE: DI must be assigned a value greater than zero when used with the FY command. If DI is set to zero (DI0),
the motor will not move.
Command Details:
Structure
FY(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“F” (022)
Executing the FY command will put a value of 2 in the “F” register
when the sensor is successfully found, or a value of 1 in the “F”
register if the safety distance is met. If you plan to use the “F”
register for monitoring the success of the FY command you must
zero the register before each FY command by executing RLF0.
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
DI2000
-
DC60000
-
FY2L
-
Notes
Set distance to stop beyond sensor to 2000 counts/steps
Set safety distance to 60000 counts/steps
Launch Feed to Sensor: motor will stop when input 2 is low or when
60000 counts/steps are reached: whichever event comes first
When using the SE, QE, or Si drives and needing to access the main driver board inputs...
FYX2L
-
Launch Feed to Sensor: motor will stop when main driver board input
2 is low or when 60000 counts/steps are reached: whichever event comes first
87
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
GC - Current Command
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Affects:
Commanded motor current
See also:
CM command
Sets or requests the immediate current command for the servo motor and drive when the servo drive is set for
Command Mode 1 (CM1).
NOTE: Setting this value may make the servo motor run to a very high speed, especially if there is no load on the
motor. Take care when using this command.
Command Details:
Structure
GC{Parameter #1}
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
“G” (023)
Command Details:
Parameter #1
RMS Current
- units
0.01 amps rms
- range
-2000 to +2000 (+/- 20 amps rms)
Examples:
Command
CM1
GC100
GC-100
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
-
-
Notes
Set servo drive to Commanded Current Command Mode
Set current to motor at 1 A rms
Set current to motor at -1 A rms (opposite direction)
88
Host Command Reference
HG - 4th Harmonic Filter Gain
Compatibility: Stepper drives only
Affects:
Low-speed performance of step motors
See also:
HP command
Sets or requests the 4th harmonic filter gain setting. This setting works in conjunction with the 4th harmonic filter
phase setting (HP) to reduce low-speed torque ripple in step motors.
NOTE: We strongly suggest you set this value in the ST Configurator software application only.
Command Details:
Structure
HG{Parameter #1}
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES only when set in Configurator software, otherwise NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Filter gain
- units
integer number
- range
0 - 32767
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
HG8000
-
HGHG=8000
Notes
Set filter gain value to 8000
89
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
HP - 4th Harmonic Filter Phase
Compatibility: Stepper drives only
Affects:
Low-speed performance of step motors
See also:
HG command
Sets or requests the 4th harmonic filter phase setting. This setting works in conjunction with the 4th harmonic
filter gain setting (HG) to reduce low-speed torque ripple in step motors.
NOTE: We strongly suggest you set this value in the ST Configurator software application only.
Command Details:
Structure
HP{Parameter #1}
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES only when set in Configurator software, otherwise NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Filter phase
- units
integer number
- range
-125 to +125
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
HG105
-
HGHG=105
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set 4th harmonic filter gain to 105
90
Host Command Reference
HW - Hand Wheel
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
EG, FE, and MT commands; see AT command for using analog input as sensor input
Puts drive in “hand wheel” mode until the given digital or analog input condition is met. Hand wheel mode is a
kind of low speed following mode, where the motor follows master encoder signals as a hand wheel is manually
turned. This command differs from the FE command in that the AC, DE, and DI commands are not used in any
way. In other words, the motor will attempt to follow the master encoder signals without injecting any ramps to
smoothly approach high frequency target speeds or to come to a stop when the stop input condition is met.
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si, STAC5, SVAC3
Inputs X1 and X2 are used for connecting the A and B signals of the encoder-based handwheel. The EG
(Electronic Gearing) command defines the following resolution of the motor.
ST-S, STM17/23
Inputs STEP and DIR are used for connecting the A and B signals of the encoder-based handwheel. The EG
(Electronic Gearing) command defines the following resolution of the step motor.
Command Details:
Structure
HW(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
HWX4L
Drive sends
-
Notes
Run in hand wheel mode until input X4 low
91
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Immediate Status Commands
The following section describes commands that return “Immediate” results when sent. These selected commands
provide useful information for monitoring internal values from the drive.
Data can be sent out in two different formats, Hexadecimal or Decimal. By default the data is returned in
Hexadecimal because of its speed and efficiency. Conversion to ascii in the Decimal format is slower and causes
a slight delay that varies in length. Hexadecimal minimizes the overhead required to convert the internal binary
data to ascii form. This speeds up the process of sending out the requested data thus giving the most recent
value. Typically, applications written on more powerful Host computers can easily convert a hexadecimal value to
an integer value.
The Immediate Format (IF) command sets the format of the returned data to hexadecimal or decimal. For cases
where a slight delay is acceptable the data can be sent out in decimal form. Setting the format affects all of the “I”
commands (except IH and IL). See IF command in the following pages.
All the “I” commands can be used at any time and at the fastest rate possible limited only by the given Baud Rate
(See BR and PB commands). As with any immediate type command it is acted upon as soon as it’s received.
Regardless of format (hex or dec) there will be a slight delay in processing the command. “Real time” usage of
the data must be carefully analyzed.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
92
Host Command Reference
IA - Immediate Analog
Compatibility: All drives
See Also:
AD, AV, AZ and IF commands
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si
Requests present analog input value from the given source. There are three different analog values that can be
accessed. With no parameter the IA command returns the Analog Command value which is derived from the
analog inputs with gain and offset values applied as set in Quick Tuner or Configurator or via the AD, AV and/or
AZ commands. When a parameter is given raw (unscaled) analog input values are returned.
ST-S, STM
Requests present analog input value. There are two different analog values that can be accessed. With no
parameter the IA command returns the Analog Command value which is derived from the analog input with gain
and offset values applied as set in ST Configurator or via the AD, AV and/or AZ commands. When a parameter is
given raw (unscaled) analog input values are returned.
Note: The output of the IA command is formatted by IF. See IF for further details.
Command Details:
Structure
IA{Parameter #1}
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
All drives...
“a” (049) Analog Command
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si...
“j” (058) Analog input 1 (unscaled)
“k” (059) Analog input 2 (unscaled)
ST-S, STM...
“j” (058) AIN (unscaled)
Parameter Details:
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si, STAC5, SVAC3
Parameter #1
Analog input
- units
integer
- range
No parameter or 0 = Analog command
1 = Analog input 1 (unscaled)
2 = Analog input 2 (unscaled)
3 = Expanded analog input (SE, QE, and Si models)
ST-S, STM17-S/Q/C, STM23-Q
Parameter #1
Analog input
- units
integer
- range
No parameter or 0 = Analog command
1 = AIN (unscaled)
93
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
IFD
-
IA
IA=2.5
Notes
Return future Immediate command responses in Decimal format
Analog Command is at mid range when drive is set to 0-5 volt input.
(In Decimal mode neither leading nor trailing zeros are used, so the response length is not strictly defined and may be up to four digits in length.)
IFH
-
IA
IA=1FEE
Return future Immediate command responses in Hexadecimal format. Analog Command represented as hexadecimal value. (Leading zeros are used for small values, so the response will always be four digits in length.)
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
94
Host Command Reference
IC - Immediate Current (Commanded)
Compatibility: All drives
Servo drives
Requests the present RMS current commanded by the servo loop. This may not be the actual current at the motor
windings. Most AC servo motors are commutated using a sinusoidal current waveform that is a “peak” value and
not directly represented by the commanded current. The commanded current is the average RMS current being
asked of the driver. Typically with a well tuned current loop the RMS current in the servo motor is well represented
by this value.
Stepper drives
Requests the present (peak-of-sine) current applied to each motor phase. This value will change depending on
what the motor is doing at the moment the command is processed. If the motor is moving this value will equal the
CA (STM only) or CC value. If the motor is not moving this value will equal the CI value.
Command Details:
Structure
IC
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“c” (051)
Units
0.01 amps
Examples:
Command
IC
IC
Drive sends
IC=015E
IC=FEA2
Notes
3.5 amps
-3.5 amps
If the IF command is set with Parameter #1=D
IFD
-
Set values to be read back in decimal
IC
IC=350
3.5 amps
IC
IC=-350
-3.5 amps
95
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
ID - Immediate Distance
Compatibility: All drives
BLu, STAC6
Requests the total relative distance moved in the last completed move.
SV, ST-Q/Si, ST-S, STM
Requests the immediate relative distance traveled from the beginning of the last move. Once the move is finished
the value will be equal to the relative distance of that last move until another move is initiated, at which time the
value will zero and begin tracking the new relative distance moved.
Command Details:
Structure
ID
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“d” (052)
Units
encoder counts (servo)
steps (stepper)
Examples:
Command
ID
ID
Drive sends
ID=00002710
ID=FFFFD8F0
Notes
10000 (10000 counts into CW move)
-10000 (10000 counts into CCW move)
If the IF command is set with Parameter #1=D
ID
ID=10000
10000 counts into CW move
ID
ID=-10000
10000 counts into CCW move
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
96
Host Command Reference
IE - Immediate Encoder
Compatibility: Servo drives and stepper drives with encoder feedback
Requests present encoder position.
Command Details:
Structure
IE
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“e” (053)
Units
encoder counts
Examples:
Command
IE
IE
Drive sends
IE=00002710
IE=FFFFD8F0
Notes
Encoder position is (+)10000 counts
Encoder position is -10000 counts
If the IF command is set with Parameter #1=D
IE
IE=10000
Encoder position is (+)10000 counts
IE
IE=-10000
Encoder position is -10000 counts
97
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
IF - Immediate Format
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Immediate Commands IA, IC, ID, IE, IP, IT, IU, IV and IX
Sets the data format, hexadecimal or decimal, for data returned using all “I” commands (except IH, IL, IO and IS).
Data can be requested from the drive in two formats: hexadecimal or decimal. By default data is returned in
hexadecimal because of its speed and efficiency. Conversion to ascii in the decimal format is slower and causes
a slight delay that varies in length. Hexadecimal minimizes the overhead required to convert the internal binary
data to ascii form. This speeds up the process of sending out the requested data thus giving the most recent
value. Typically, applications written on more powerful host computers can easily convert a hexadecimal value into
a decimal value.
All “I” commands can be used at any time and at the fastest rate possible limited only by the given baud rate (see
BR and PB commands). Immediate commands are executed as they are received, regardless of what is in the
drive’s command buffer. Regardless of format (hex or dec) there will be a slight delay in processing the response
to an “I” command. “Real time” usage of the data must be carefully analyzed.
Command Details:
Structure
IF{Parameter #1}
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Return format
- units
letter
- range
H (hexadecimal) or D (decimal)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
IFH
-
ID
ID=00002710
IFIF=H
Notes
Sets format to Hexadecimal
Distance is 10000 counts
IFD
-
ID
ID=10000
IFIF=D
Sets format to Decimal
Distance is 10000 counts
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
98
Host Command Reference
IH - Immediate High Output
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
IL, SO commands
Sets an output high (open) immediately. Use SO instead if you don’t want the output to change until a buffered
command (like a move) is complete.
Command Details:
Structure
IH(Parameter #1)
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
IH1
IH2
Drive sends
-
-
Notes
Output 1 goes high immediately
Output 2 goes high immediately
To force Outputs on main driver board when using an SE, QE or Si drive
IHY1
-
Output 1 of main driver board goes high immediately
IHY2
-
Output 2 of main driver board goes high immediately
99
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
IL - Immediate Low Output
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
IH, SO commands.
Sets an output low (closed) immediately. Use SO instead if you don’t want the output to change until a buffered
command (like a move) is complete.
Command Details:
Structure
IL(Parameter #1)
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
IL1
IL2
Drive sends
-
-
Notes
Output 1 goes low immediately
Output 2 goes low immediately
To force Outputs on main driver board when using an SE, QE, or Si drive
ILY1
-
Output 1 of main driver board goes low immediately
ILY2
-
Output 2 of main driver board goes low immediately
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
100
Host Command Reference
IO - Output Status
Compatibility: All drives
With no parameter this command requests the immediate status of the designated outputs. The status is
displayed as an 8-bit binary number with output 1 in the far right position (bit 0). With a parameter this command
sets the outputs high or low using the decimal equivalent of the same binary pattern. Logic zero (“0”) turns an
output on by closing it.
Command Details:
Structure
IO{Parameter #1}
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
BLu and STAC6-S or -Q versions (optional “Y” character is not necessary)
Command
Drive sends
Notes
IO
IO=00000000
All 3 outputs of IN/OUT1 or main board are low (closed)
IO
IO=00000111
All 3 outputs of IN/OUT1 or main board are high (open)
IO0
-
Sets all 3 outputs low (closed)
IO7
-
Sets all 3 outputs high (open)
BLu and STAC6-QE or -Si versions
Command
Drive sends
IO
IO=00000000
IO
IO=00001111
IO0
-
IO15
-
IOY
IO=00000000
IOY
IO=00000111
IOY0
-
IOY7
-
Notes
All 4 outputs of IN/OUT2 or top board are low (closed)
All 4 outputs of IN/OUT2 or top board are high (open)
Sets all 4 outputs of IN/OUT2 or top board low (closed)
Sets all 4 outputs of IN/OUT2 or top board high (open)
All 3 outputs of IN/OUT1 or main board are low (closed)
All 3 outputs of IN/OUT1 or main board are high (open)
Sets all 3 outputs of IN/OUT1 or main board low (closed)
Sets all 3 outputs of IN/OUT1 or main board high (open)
STAC5-S, SVAC3-S
Command Drive sends
IOY
IO=00000000 IOY
IO=00000011 IOY0
IOY3
Notes (DB-15)
Both outputs of IN/OUT1 are low (closed)
Both outputs of IN/OUT1 are high (open)
Sets both outputs of IN/OUT1 low (closed)
Sets both outputs of IN/OUT1 high (open)
STAC5-Q/IP, SVAC3-Q/IP
Command
Drive sends
Notes (DB25)
IO
IO=00000000
All 4 outputs of IN/OUT2 are low (closed)
IO
IO=00001111
All 4 outputs of IN/OUT2 are high (open)
IO0
Sets all 4 outputs of IN/OUT2 low (closed)
IO15
Sets all 4 outputs of IN/OUT2 high (open)
101
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
IO
IOY
IOY
IOY0
IOY7
SV, ST-Q/Si
Command
IO
IO
IO0
IO7
IO=00001111
All 4 outputs of IN/OUT2 high (open)
Notes (DB15)
IO=00000000
Both outputs of IN/OUT1 low (closed)
IO=00000011
Both outputs of IN/OUT1 high (open)
Both outputs of IN/OUT1 low (closed)
Both outputs of IN/OUT1 high (open)
Drive sends
IO=00000000
IO=00001111
-
-
Notes
All 4 outputs are low (closed)
All 4 outputs are high (open)
Sets all 4 outputs low (closed)
Sets all 4 outputs high (open)
ST-S, STM17-S/Q/C, STM23-Q/C, STM24-C
Command
Drive Sends
Notes
IO
IO=00000000
Output is low (closed)
IO
IO=00000001
Output is high (open)
IO0
-
Sets output low (closed)
IO1
-
Sets output high (open)
STM24 – Flex I/O
Command
Drive sends
IO
IO=00000000
IO
IO=00001111
IO0
IO15
IO
IO=00001111
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
All 4 outputs of IN/OUT2 are low (closed)
All 4 outputs of IN/OUT2 are high (open)
Sets all 4 outputs of IN/OUT2 low (closed)
Sets all 4 outputs of IN/OUT2 high (open)
All 4 outputs of IN/OUT2 high (open)
102
Host Command Reference
IP - Immediate Position
Compatibility: All drives
Requests present absolute position. The position data is assigned a 32-bit value. When sent out in Hexadecimal it
will be 8 characters long. When sent out in decimal it will range from 2147483647 to -2147483648.
Command Details:
Structure
IP
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Units
encoder counts (servo)
steps (stepper)
Examples:
Command
IP
IP
Drive sends
IP=00002710
IP=FFFFD8F0
Notes
Absolute position is 10,000 counts (or steps)
Absolute position is -10,000 counts (or steps)
If the IF command is set with Parameter #1=D
IP
IP=10000
Absolute position is 10000 counts (or steps)
IP
IP=-10000
Absolute position is -10000 counts (or steps)
103
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
IQ - Immediate Current (Actual)
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Requests present actual current. This current reading is the actual current measured by the drive. As with the
Commanded Current this is an RMS value that represents the DC current in the motor windings.
Command Details:
Structure
IQ
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Units
0.01 Amps
Examples:
Command
IQ
IQ
Drive sends
IQ=015E
IQ=FEA2
Notes
3.5 Amps
-3.5 Amps
If the IF command is set with Parameter #1=D
IQ
IQ=350
3.5 Amps
IQ
IQ=-350
-3.5 Amps
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
104
Host Command Reference
IS - Input Status
Compatibility: All drives
Requests immediate status of all drive inputs. A closed input is represented by a “0” (zero), and an open input is
represented by a “1” (one). Unused positions in the response are represented by “0” (zero).
BLu, STAC6
On S and Q drives the IS command requests the status of IN/OUT1 or main driver board (DB-25) inputs X1
through X7 plus the encoder index channel (if present). On SE, QE, and Si drives the ISX command (IS
command with parameter character X) is required to request status of IN/OUT1 or main driver board (DB-25)
inputs X1 through X7 plus the encoder index channel (if present), while IS requests IN/OUT2 or top board (screw
terminal) inputs 1 through 8.
SV, ST-Q/Si
The IS command requests the status of inputs X1 through X8 plus the encoder index channel (if present).
ST-S, STM17-S/Q/C, STM23-Q/C, STM24-C
The IS command requests the status of all three digital inputs, STEP, DIR, and EN, plus the encoder index
channel (STM only, if present).
STM17-C, STM24-C
The IS command requests the status of all three digital inputs, IN1, IN2, and IN3, plus the encoder index channel,
if present.
Command Details:
Structure
IS{Parameter #1}
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
BLu, STAC6
Parameter #1
Optional “X” character used to access driver board inputs
with SE, QE, and Si drives.
SV, ST-Q/Si, ST-S, STM17-S/Q/C, STM23-Q/C, STM24-C
Parameter #1
“X” character ignored if used.
SVAC3, STAC5
Parameter #1
Optional “X” character used to access driver board inputs
with Q and IP drives.
105
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Response Details:
BLu, STAC6
S and Q drives
(“X” character is not required to
designate main board inputs)
SE, QE, and Si drives
(“X” character is required to designate
main board inputs)
SV, ST-Q/Si
ST-S, STM17-S/Q/C, STM23-Q/C, STM24-C
STEP (IN1)
DIR
(IN2)
EN
(IN3)
Encoder Index (STM only, if present)
SVAC3, STAC5
ISX =
IS =
X1
X2
X3
X4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
Encoder Index
(if present)
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
106
Host Command Reference
Examples:
BLu and STAC6-S or -Q versions (optional “X” character is not necessary)
Command
Drive sends
Notes
IS
IS=00000000
All 8 inputs are low (closed)
IS
IS=11111111
All 8 inputs are high (open)
IS
IS=11101100
Inputs 1, 2, and 5 are closed
IS
IS=10000101
Inputs 2, 4, 5, 6, and 7 are closed
BLu and STAC6-SE, -QE, or -Si versions (optional “X” character necessary to access IN/OUT1 or main driver
board (DB-25) inputs
Command
Drive sends
Notes
IS
IS=11010011
Inputs 3, 4, and 6 are closed
ISX
IS=10101110
Inputs X1, X5, and X7 are closed
SV, ST-Q/Si
Command
IS
IS
Drive sends
IS=100110110
IS=011111111
Notes
Inputs 1, 4, 7, and 8 are closed
Encoder index channel is closed
ST-S, STM17-S/Q/C, STM23-Q/C, STM24-C
Command
Drive Sends
Notes
IS
IS=10000111
All inputs are open
IS
IS=00000111
Encoder index channel is closed
IS
IS=10000100
Inputs STEP and DIR are closed
SVAC3, STAC5
Command
Drive Sends
IS
IS=10001111
IS
IS=10001111
Notes
(S drive) No inputs are closed.
(Q or IP drive) Inputs IN5 - IN7 are closed.
IS
IS
IS=00000111
IS=00000111
(S drive) Encoder index and input X4 are closed.
(Q or IP drive) Inputs IN4 - IN8 are closed.
IS
IS
IS=10101110
IS=10101110
(S drive) Invalid response.
(Q or IP drive) Inputs IN1, IN5 and IN7 are closed.
ISX
IS=10001010
Inputs X1 and X3 are closed.
NOTE: When working with digital inputs and outputs it is important to remember the designations low and high.
If current is flowing into or out of an input or output, i.e. the circuit is energized, the logic state for that input/
output is defined as low or closed. If no current is flowing, i.e. the circuit is de-energized, or the input/output is
not connected, the logic state is high or open. A low state is represented by the “L” character in parameters of
commands that affect inputs/outputs. For example, WI3L means “wait for input 3 low”, and SO1L means “set
output 1 low”. A high state is represented by the “H” character.
107
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
IT - Immediate Temperature
Compatibility: All drives
Requests drive temperature, as measured by either an on-chip or board-mounted sensor. A parameter of 0 or 1 is
used to specify which temperature reading is desired, depending on drive type (see Parameter Details).
The temperature reads out in decivolts, or units of 0.1 degrees C. The drive will fault when the temperature
reaches a specified maximum value. (See Parameter Details section below for details).
If no parameter is supplied, IT0 is assumed.
Command Details:
Structure
IT {Parameter #1}
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“t” (068)
Range
0-1
Units
0.1 deg C
Parameter Details:
BLu, STAC6, STM17
Parameter #1
Optional. IT or IT0 returns the termperature as measured
by an external, board-mounted sensor.
Overtemp occurs at 85 degrees C.
ST
Parameter #1
Optional. IT or IT0 returns the termperature as measured
by the internal, on-chip sensor.
Overtemp occurs at 85 degrees C.
SV7
Parameter #1
Optional. IT or IT0 returns the termperature as measured
by the internal, on-chip sensor.
Overtemp occurs at 100 degrees C.
STM23, STM24
Parameter #1
0 = Returns the temperature as measured by the internal,
on-chip sensor.
1 = Returns the temperature as measured by an external,
board-mounted sensor.
Overtemp occurs at 85 degrees C.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
108
Host Command Reference
SVAC3, STAC5
Parameter #1
0 = Returns the temperature as measured by an external,
board-mounted sensor. Overtemp occurs at 85 degrees C.
1 = Returns the temperature as measured by the internal,
on-chip sensor. Overtemp occurs at 100 degrees C.
Examples:
Command
IT
IT0
IT1
Drive sends
IT=275
IT=310
IT=412
Notes
Drive temperature is 27.5o C
Drive temperature is 31.0o C
Drive temperature is 41.2o C
109
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
IU - Immediate Voltage
Compatibility: All drives
Requests present value of the DC bus voltage, +/-5%. The voltage reads out in 0.1 volts resolution. The drive
will fault when the DC bus voltage reaches a specified maximum value. An Alarm will be set when the DC Bus
voltage is less then a minimum value. (See hardware manuals for details).
Command Details:
Structure
IU
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“u” (069)
Units
0.1 Volts DC, +/-5%
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
Notes
If the IF command is set with Parameter #1=H
IU
IU=01E2
DC supply voltage is 48.2 Volts
IU
IU=067E
DC bus voltage is 166.2 Volts
If the IF command is set with Parameter #1=D
IU
IU=482
DC supply voltage is 48.2 Volts
IU
IU=1662
DC bus voltage is 166.2 Volts
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
110
Host Command Reference
IV - Immediate Velocity
Compatibility: All drives
Requests present velocity of the motor in rpm. There are two different velocities that can be read back: the
motor’s actual velocity and the motor’s target velocity.
Command Details:
Structure
IV(Parameter #1)
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“v” (070) Actual velocity (servo drives and stepper drives
with encoder)
“w” (071) Target velocity
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Velocity selector
- units
integer
- range
0 = actual velocity request (servo drives and stepper drives
with encoder)
1 = target velocity request
Examples:
Command
IV0
IV1
Drive sends
IV=1000
IV=1000
Notes
Servo motor is running at 1000 rpm
Target motor velocity is 1000 rpm
111
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
IX - Immediate Position Error
Compatibility: Servo drives and stepper drives with encoder feedback
Requests present position error between motor and encoder.
Command Details:
Structure
IX
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“x” (072)
Units
encoder counts
Examples:
Command
IX
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
IX=10
Notes
Position error is 10 counts
112
Host Command Reference
JA - Jog Acceleration
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
CJ, WI (jogging) commands
See also:
CJ, CS, JD, JE, JL, JS, SJ
Sets or requests the accel/decel rate for Jog moves in rev/sec/sec. Sending JA with no parameter causes drive to
respond with present jog accel/decel rate. Setting JA overwrites the both the last JA and JL values. This means
that to have different jog accel and jog decel values, you should first send JA to set the jog accel and then send JL
to set the jog decel. The JA value cannot be changed while jogging.
Command Details:
Structure
JA{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Jog acceleration value
- units
rev/sec/sec (rps/s)
- range
0.167 to 5461.167 (resolution is 0.167 rps/s)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
JA100
-
JAJA=100
Notes
Set jog acceleration to 100 rev/sec/sec
113
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
JC - Velocity (Oscillator) mode second speed
Compatibility: Stepper drives and SV servo drives
Affects:
Analog velocity mode
See also:
AD, AG, CM commands
Sets or requests the second speed used in velocity (oscillator) mode. This only applies to Command Modes (CM)
13, 14, 17, and 18.
SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si
Input X5 is used to select the speed set by the JC command while in Command Mode 13, 14, 17 or 18.
ST-S, STM
The EN input is used to select the speed set by the JC command while in Command Mode 13, 14, 17 or 18.
Command Details:
Structure
JC{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Analog velocity mode second speed
- units
rev/sec
- range
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si, ST-S: 0.0042 - 133.3333
(resolution is 0.0042)
STM: 0.0042 - 80.0000 (resolution is 0.0042)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
JC11
-
JCJC=11
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set second jog speed in analog velocity mode to 11 rps
114
Host Command Reference
JD - Jog Disable
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Jogging during a WI command
See also:
JA, JE, JS, WI commands
Disables jog inputs (which are active during a WI instruction if previously enabled by the JE command). Jog accel/
decel and velocity are set using the JA and JS commands, respectively.
Command Details:
Structure
JD
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
JD
Drive sends
-
Notes
Disable jog inputs while executing the WI command
115
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
JE - Jog Enable
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
WI (jogging) command
See also:
JA, JD, JS, WI commands
Enables jog inputs during a WI instruction. Jog accel, decel and velocity are set using the JA, JD and JS
commands, respectively.
BLu, STAC6-S, SE, Q, QE
Inputs X1 and X2 are the designated jog inputs during a WI instruction.
BLu, STAC6-Si
Inputs 5 and 6 of IN/OUT2 or top board (screw terminal) connector are the designated jog inputs during a WI
instruction.
SV, ST-Q/Si
Inputs X5 and X6 are the designated jog inputs during a WI instruction.
ST-S, STM
The STEP and DIR inputs are the designated jog inputs during a WI instruction. The STEP and DIR inputs can
each be assigned to only one function in an application. If you want to use the STEP and DIR inputs as jog inputs
you can define them as such with the JE command. JE takes no effect if the drive is set in Command Mode (CM)
7, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 or 18, because these modes predefine these inputs and take precedence over the JE
command. Also, setting the DL command (to 1 or 2) after setting the JE command reassigns the STEP and DIR
inputs as end-of-travel limit inputs and turns off jogging functionality. In other words, the JE and DL commands,
as well as Command Modes (CM) 7, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 each assign a usage to the STEP and DIR
inputs. Each of these must exclusively use the STEP and DIR inputs. Command Modes are most dominant and
will continually prevent JE and DL from using the inputs. JE and DL exclude each other by overwriting the usage
of the STEP and DIR inputs. To enable jogging with the STEP and DIR inputs simply execute the JE command
with CM=21 or CM=22.
Command Details:
Structure
JE
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
JE
-
WIX4L
-
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Enable jog inputs while executing the WI command
Wait for input X4 to close. While waiting jog inputs are active, which
means the motor can be jogged in the CW and CCW directions by
closing the jog inputs. After input X4 closes the jog function stops, at
least until the next WI command executes.
116
Host Command Reference
JL - Jog Decel
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Jogging during WI command, velocity (oscillator) modes, and CJ command
See also:
JA command
Sets or requests the decel rate for Jog moves and velocity (oscillator) modes in rev/sec/sec. The JL value cannot
be changed while jogging. To maintain compatibility with legacy products, JA sets both the JA and JL values, so
when a different JL value is required set JA first, then set JL.
Command Details:
Structure
JL{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Jog deceleration rate
- units
rev/sec/sec (rps/s)
- range
0.167 - 5461.167 rps/s (resolution is 0.167 rps/s)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
JL25
-
JLJL=25
Notes
Sets jog deceleration rate to 25 rps/s
117
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
JM - Jog Mode
Compatibility: All drives*, see below
Affects:
CJ command, and jogging during a WI command
See also:
CJ, JE, WI commands
Sets or requests the Jog mode. There are two Jog modes available:
*Stepper drives only utilize Jog Mode 1 (JM1), and therefore will ignore attempts to set JM2.
Jog Mode 1: Servo and stepper drives
For servo drives, Jog Mode 1 uses a “position-type” of servo control that moves the target position which causes
the servo to move at the set velocity. Jog Mode 1 will cause the servo motor to always move the same distance
over time. A drawback is that the servo can fault if the position error during the move exceeds the value set by the
PF (Position Fault) command. For stepper drives, Jog Mode 1 causes the step motor to run at the set velocity
(see JS and CS commands).
Jog Mode 2: Servo drives only
For servo drives only, Jog Mode 2 uses a “velocity-type” of servo control that applies torque to the motor to
maintain velocity. This method functions better with high inertia loads because it ignores the value set by the PF
(Position Fault) command. It also allows the drive to function in a “torque-limited velocity” mode or a “velocitylimited torque” mode. Jog Mode 2 also uses a different set of control parameters, VI and VP, for “tuning” the
velocity mode. See VI & VP commands later in this guide.
Command Details:
Structure
JM{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Jog mode
- units
integer
- range
1 = position-type
2 = velocity-type
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
JM1
-
JM2
-
JMJM=2
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Put drive into position-type servo control when jogging
Put drive into velocity-type servo control when jogging
118
Host Command Reference
JS - Jog Speed
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Jogging during WI command, velocity (oscillator) modes, and CJ command
See also:
CJ, CS, JA commands
Sets or requests the speed for Jog moves in rev/sec. Sending JS with no parameter causes drive to respond with
present jog speed.
Command Details:
Structure
JS{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
“J” (026)
Note: The JS command uses different units than the “J”
register. See Data Registers section for details.
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Move velocity
- units
rev/sec
- range
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si, ST-S: 0.0042 - 133.3333
(resolution is 0.0042)
STM: 0.0042 - 80.0000 (resolution is 0.0042)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
JS10.35
-
JSJS=10.35
Notes
Set jog speed to 10.35 rps
119
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
KC - Overall Servo Filter
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Affects:
Servo tuning and performance
Sets or requests the servo control overall filter frequency. The filter is a simple one-pole, low-pass filter intended
for attenuating high frequency oscillations. The value is a constant that must be calculated from the desired roll off
frequency. See equation below.
NOTE: It is recommended to use the Quick Tuner software for tuning and configuring your servo system.
C = 72090 / (1400/F + 2.2)
where C = Filter Value, F = desired filter Frequency in Hz
Command Details:
Structure
KC{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Filter Value
- units
integer
- range
0 - 32767 (see above for calculations)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
KC7836
-
KCKC=7836
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set servo filter to 200 Hz
120
Host Command Reference
KD - Differential Constant
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Affects:
Servo tuning and performance
Sets or requests the servo control differential gain. Gain value is relative: “0” meaning no gain, “32767” meaning
full gain. KD is part of the Damping servo parameters in Quick Tuner. It works to damp low speed oscillations.
NOTE: It is recommended to use the Quick Tuner software for tuning and configuring your servo system.
Command Details:
Structure
KD{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Differential Gain value
- units
integer
- range
0 - 32767 (0 = 0%, 32767 = 100%)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
KD2000
-
KDKD=2000
Notes
Set differential gain to 2000
121
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
KE - Differential Filter
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Affects:
Servo tuning and performance
Sets or requests the differential control parameter filter frequency. The filter is a simple one-pole, low-pass filter
intended for attenuating high frequency oscillations. The value is a constant that must be calculated from the
desired roll off frequency. See equation below.
C = 72090 / (1400/F + 2.2)
where C = Filter Value, K = desired filter Frequency in Hz
NOTE: It is recommended to use the Quick Tuner software for tuning and configuring your servo system.
Command Details:
Structure
KE{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Filter Value
- units
integer
- range
0 - 32767
Examples:
Command
KE7836
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
Notes
Set differential filter to 200 Hz
122
Host Command Reference
KF - Velocity Feedforward Constant
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Affects:
Servo tuning and performance
Sets or requests the servo control velocity feedforward gain. Gain value is relative: “0” meaning no gain, “32767”
meaning full gain. KF is part of the Damping servo parameters in Quick Tuner. It counters the effects of the KV
parameter which can cause large following error. KF is usually the same value as KV.
NOTE: It is recommended to use the Quick Tuner software for tuning and configuring your servo system.
Command Details:
Structure
KF{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Velocity feedforward gain value
- units
integer
- range
0 - 32767 (0 = 0%, 32767 = 100%)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
KF4000
-
KFKF=4000
Notes
Set velocity feedforward gain to 4000
123
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
KI - Integrator Constant
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Affects:
Servo tuning and performance
Sets or requests the servo control integrator gain term. Gain value is relative: “0” meaning no gain, “32767”
meaning full gain. KI is part of the Stiffness servo parameters in Quick Tuner. It minimizes (or may even
eliminate) position errors especially when holding position.
NOTE: It is recommended to use the Quick Tuner software for tuning and configuring your servo system.
Command Details:
Structure
KI{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Integrator gain value
- units
integer
- range
0 - 32767 (0 = 0%, 32767 = 100%)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
KI5000
-
KIKI=500
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set integrator gain to 500
124
Host Command Reference
KJ - Jerk Filter Frequency
Compatibility: SV7 Servo drives only
Affects:S-Curve
Sets or requests the Jerk Filter frequency, in Hz. The parameter is set within Quick Tuner, and can also be set
with the SCL command KJ. The lower the frequency value the more pronounced the S-curve profile will be.
Setting the value to 0 will disable the filter.
S-curve acceleration/deceleration ramps are beneficial in positioning systems where instantaneous changes
in speed may cause the load to jerk excessively. One example is when the load is connected to the motion
actuator via a long moment arm. If the arm is not sufficiently rigid, changes in speed at the actuator can result in
undesirable oscillations and increased settling time at the load. Smoothed transitions in speed changes, such as
those provided by the jerk filter in Quick Tuner, can alleviate this unwanted motion and reduce settling time.
NOTE: It is recommended to use the Quick Tuner software for tuning and configuring your servo system.
Command Details:
Structure
KJ{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Jerk Filter Frequency (Hz)
- units
integer
- range
0 - 5000 (0 = disabled)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
KJ500
-
KJKJ=500
Notes
Set jerk filter frequency to 500Hz
125
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
KK - Inertia Feedforward Constant
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Affects:
Servo tuning and performance
Sets or requests the servo control inertia feedforward gain. Gain value is relative: “0” meaning no gain, “32767”
meaning full gain. KK is an Inertia servo parameter in Quick Tuner. KK improves acceleration control by
compensating for the load inertia.
NOTE: It is recommended to use the Quick Tuner software for tuning and configuring your servo system.
Command Details:
Structure
KK{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Inertia feedforward gain value
- units
integer
- range
0 - 32767 (0 = 0%, 32767 = 100%)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
KK500
-
KKKK=500
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set inertia feedforward gain to 500
126
Host Command Reference
KP - Proportional Constant
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Affects:
Servo tuning and performance
Sets or requests the servo control proportional gain term. Gain value is relative: “0” meaning no gain, “32767”
meaning full gain. KP is part of the Stiffness servo parameters in Quick Tuner. This parameter is the primary gain
term for minimizing the position error.
NOTE: It is recommended to use the Quick Tuner software for tuning and configuring your servo system.
Command Details:
Structure
KP{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Proportional gain value
- units
integer
- range
0 - 32767 (0 = 0%, 32767 = 100%)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
KP5000
-
KPKP=5000
Notes
Set proportional gain to 5000
127
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
KV - Velocity Feedback Constant
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Affects:
Servo tuning and performance
Sets or requests the servo control velocity feedback gain term. Gain value is relative: “0” meaning no gain,
“32767” meaning full gain. KV is part of the Damping servo parameters in Quick Tuner. It aids the KD command
in damping system oscillation. This term helps to control larger inertial loads.
NOTE: The Velocity Feedback (KV) and Velocity Feedforward (KF) constants are typically set to similar values.
The Feedforward value may at times be set larger depending on the frictional content of the motor load.
NOTE: It is recommended to use the Quick Tuner software for tuning and configuring your servo system.
Command Details:
Structure
KV{Paramter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Velocity feedback gain value
- units
integer
- range
0 - 32767 (0 = 0%, 32767 = 100%)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
KV4000
-
KVKV=4000
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set velocity feedback gain to 4000
128
Host Command Reference
LV - Low Voltage threshold
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Under voltage alarm and fault
Sets or requests the low voltage threshold for under voltage alarm / fault conditions. In AC drives (e.g. BLuAC5
and STAC6) an under voltage condition causes a Drive Fault, which disables the motor outputs of the drive. In DC
drives (SV, ST, and STM) an under voltage condition causes an Alarm. If desired, the user can change the low
voltage threshold of the drive, however in most applications it is neither necessary nor recommended. The factory
default for low voltage threshold is set to both protect the drive from damage and work with the widest range of
supply voltages possible.
Command Details:
Structure
LV{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Low voltage threshold
- units
All drives except BLuAC5: 0.1 volts DC
BLuAC5: 1 volt DC
- range
BLuDC: 18 to 40
BLuAC: 90 to 300
STAC6: 90 to 160
ST5: 12 to 75
ST10: 12 to 75
SV7: 12 to 75
STM: 10 to 75
Examples:
Command
LV
LV200
Drive sends
LV=180
-
Notes
Low voltage threshold of ST5 set at 18 VDC
Set low voltage threshold of ST5 drive to 20 VDC
LV
LV=900
Low voltage threshold of STAC6 set at 90 VDC (bus voltage)
LV
LV=90
Low voltage threshold of BLuAC5 set at 90 VDC (bus voltage)
129
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
MD - Motor Disable
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
BE, BO, ME commands
Disables motor outputs (reduces motor current to zero). Disabling the motor also activates the Brake Output
function (see BO command). Motor current is not reduced to zero until the Brake Engage (BE command) time
has expired.
Command Details:
Structure
MD
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
No
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
MD
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
Notes
Drive turns off current to the motor
130
Host Command Reference
ME - Motor Enable
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
BD, BO, MD commands
Restores drive current to motor. If the drive cannot be enabled due to the Enable Input (SI) state, the drive will
respond with a “&” which indicates that the drive could not be enabled. Enabling the drive also deactivates the
Brake Output function (see BO command). Enabling of the motor is delayed by the BD (Brake Disengage) time
delay.
WARNING: This command restores the previous mode of operation. If for example the drive is operating
in Analog Velocity mode the motor may immediately start moving. External inputs to the drive must be
sequenced properly to avoid unpredictable operation.
Command Details:
Structure
ME
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
ME
ME
Drive sends
-
&
Notes
Drive is enabled
Drive is NOT enabled: check Servo Enable input (SI) for proper state
131
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
MN - Model Number
Compatibility: All drives
Requests the drive’s Model Number. Drive returns a single character that is a code for the model number.
NOTE: Unlike most other commands that request data back from the drive, where the drive will send the original
Command Code followed by an “=” and then a value, when the MN command is sent to a drive the drive only
responds with the single character code. (See below).
Command Details:
Structure
MN
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Units
character code (see below)
Response Details:
Model Number
Character code
BLuDC4-S*O
BLuDC4-SE*o
BLuDC4-Si*P
BLuDC4-Q* W
BLuDC4-QE*w
BLuDC9-S*R
BLuDC9-SE*r
BLuDC9-Si*S
BLuDC9-Q*X
BLuDC9-QE*x
BLuAC5-ST
BLuAC5-SEt
BLuAC5-QU
BLuAC5-QEu
BLuAC5-SiV
STAC6-SY
STAC6-SEy
STAC6-QZ
STAC6-QEz
STAC6-Si[
Model Number
Character Code
STAC6-220-S \
STAC6-220-SE |
STAC6-220-Q ]
STAC6-220-QE}
STAC6-220-Si ^
ST5-S
D
ST10-S
E
ST5-Plus
J
ST10-Plus
K
ST5-Q
F
ST10-Q
H
ST5-Si
G
ST10-Si
I
STM23S-xxx a
STM23Q-xxx b
SV7-S
;
SV7-Q
<
SV7-Si
=
* BLu100 and BLu200 series drives have been replaced by BLuDC4 and BLuDC9 series drives, respectively.
BLu100 and BLu200 drives are still supported, but part numbers have been changed.
Examples:
Command
MN
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
T
Notes
Connected drive is a BLuAC5-S
132
Host Command Reference
MO - Motion Output
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
AO, BO, SD commands
Defines the drive’s Motion Output digital output function. There are three Motion Output states that can be defined
for all drives with the MO command:
MO1: Output is closed (energized) when motor is not moving.
MO2: Output is open (de-energized) when motor is not moving.
MO3: Output is not used as a Motion Output and can be used for another automatic output function or as a
general purpose output.
For all stepper drives there are 5 additional states available:
MO4: Output is used as a Tach Output at 100 pulses/rev with 1.8 degree step motor.
MO5: Output is used as a Tach Output at 200 pulses/rev with 1.8 degree step motor.
MO6: Output is used as a Tach Output at 400 pulses/rev with 1.8 degree step motor.
MO7: Output is used as a Tach Output at 800 pulses/rev with 1.8 degree step motor.
MO8: Output is used as a Tach Output at 1600 pulses/rev with 1.8 degree step motor.
For SV servo drives there are 7 additional states available:
MO4: Output is used as a Tach Output at 64 pulses/rev with 8 pole motor (8 times number of poles)
MO5: Output is used as a Tach Output at 128 pulses/rev with 8 pole motor (16 times number of poles)
MO6: Output is used as a Tach Output at 256 pulses/rev with 8 pole motor (32 times number of poles)
MO7: Output is used as a Tach Output at 512 pulses/rev with 8 pole motor (64 times number of poles)
MO8: Output is used as a Tach Output at 1024 pulses/rev with 8 pole motor (128 times number of poles)
MO9: Output is closed when in position based on encoder error
MO10: Output is open when in position based on encoder error
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si, STAC5-Q/IP, SVAC3-Q/IP
Output Y2 is the designated Motion Output.
ST-S, STM17-S/Q/C, STM23-Q/C, STM24-C
The one output of these drives (OUT) can be assigned to one of the five available functions: alarm output, brake
output, motion output, tach output, or general purpose output. Each of these functions must exclusively use
the output, so only one function is allowed. There are two ways to define the function of this output: via the ST
Configurator software or via the MO command.
STM24-SF/QF
Drives with Flex I/O allow a second parameter which allows the user to specify the I/O point used. Before an I/O
point can be used as a Motion Output it must first be configured as an output with the SD command.
Possible uses for the MO command on the STM24 are as follows (‘n’ denotes the I/O point to be used):
MO1n: Output is closed (active, low) when a Drive Fault is present.
MO2n: Output is open (inactive, high) when a Drive Fault is present.
MO3n: Output is not used as an Alarm Output and can be used for another automatic output function or as a general purpose output.
MO4n: Output is used as a Tach Output at 100 pulses/rev with 1.8 degree step motor.
MO5n: Output is used as a Tach Output at 200 pulses/rev with 1.8 degree step motor.
MO6n: Output is used as a Tach Output at 400 pulses/rev with 1.8 degree step motor.
MO7n: Output is used as a Tach Output at 800 pulses/rev with 1.8 degree step motor.
MO8n: Output is used as a Tach Output at 1600 pulses/rev with 1.8 degree step motor.
133
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
NOTE: Setting the MO command to 1, 2, or 4 - 8 overrides previous assignments of this output’s function.
Similarly, if you use the AO or BO command to set the function of the output after setting the MO command to 1 or
2, usage of the output will be reassigned and AO will be automatically set to 3.
Command Details:
Structure
MO{Parameter #1}{Parameter #2 (Flex I/O only)}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Output Usage (see above)
- units
integer code
- range
1, 2 or 3
Parameter #2 (Flex I/O only)
I/O Point (if applicable, see note below)
- units
integer code
- range
1-4
NOTES:
• The SD command must be executed to set an I/O point as an output before that output can be designated as the
Motion Output.
• Parameter #2 only applies to drives equipped with Flex I/O. This includes the STM24-S and -Q. Parameter #2
is not defined for drives equipped with standard I/O.
Examples:
All drives with standard I/O:
Command
Drive sends
MO1
-
MOMO=1
Notes
Motion Output will close when the motor is not moing
Drives with Flex I/O only:
Command
Drive sends
SD4O
-
MO14
-
MOMO=14
Notes
Configures I/O 4 as output (see SD command for details)
Motion Output is mapped to output #4, and will close when the motor is not moving
STM24-S, -Q only
Command
Drive sends
MO14
-
MOMO=14
Notes
I/O point 4 will be closed when motor is not moving
NOTE: When working with digital inputs and outputs it is important to remember the designations low and high.
If current is flowing into or out of an input or output, i.e. the circuit is energized, the logic state for that input/
output is defined as low or closed. If no current is flowing, i.e. the circuit is de-energized, or the input/output is
not connected, the logic state is high or open. A low state is represented by the “L” character in parameters of
commands that affect inputs/outputs. For example, WI3L means “wait for input 3 low”, and SO1L means “set
output 1 low”. A high state is represented by the “H” character.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
134
Host Command Reference
MR - Microstep Resolution
Compatibility: All Stepper Drives
Affects:
Microstep Resolution
See also:
EG command
The MR command allows the user to set or request the Microstep Resolution of the drive.
NOTE: The MR command has been deprecated, and should no longer be used. It is included here solely for
compatibility with older programs. New applications should make use of the EG command.
Command Details:
Structure
MR{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Microstep Resolution (code)
- units
Integer
- range
0 - 15:
Code, steps/rev
0 = 200
1 = 400
3 = 2000
4 = 5000
5 = 10,000
6 = 12,800
7 = 18,000
8 = 20,000
9 = 21,600
10 = 25,000
11 = 25,400
12 = 25,600
13 = 36,000
14 = 50,000
15 = 50,800
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
MR8
-
MRMR=8
Notes
Set the drive’s microstep resolution to 20,000 steps/rev
135
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
MT - Multi-Tasking
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All move commands
See also:
CJ, OI, QJ, TI, TR, and WM commands
Sets or request the status of the multi-tasking function (on or off). When multi-tasking is enabled (on), commands
such as FL (Feed to Length) or HW (Hand Wheel) do not block execution of subsequent commands in the queue
or program segment. This allows executing other type of operations, such as setting outputs (SO), while a move
is taking place.
Command Details:
Structure
MT{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
No
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Multi-tasking switch
- units
integer
- range
0 = multi-tasking disabled
1 = multi-tasking enabled
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
MT1
-
MTMT=1
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Enables multi-tasking
136
Host Command Reference
MV - Model & Revision
Compatibility: All drives except BLu servo drives
See also:
MN, RV commands
Requests the connected drive’s DSP firmware version, model number code, and sub-model number code (if
applicable). Not all drive series utilize the sub-model number code. The response from the drive is a single string
of characters with no breaks or delimiters. The sequence of characters is firmware revision (3 numbers and 1
letter), model number code (3 numbers), sub-model number code (1 letter). See Response Details below.
Command Details:
Structure
MV
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
No
Register Access
None
Response Details:
Response will be in the format AAAABBBC, where AAAA is the firmware version, BBB is the model number
code, and C is the sub-model number code. Model and sub-model number codes are listed below by drive,
and Examples are given afterward.
Drive
Firmware
Model No. Code
SV7-S *011
SV7-Q *012
SV7-Si *013
STAC6-S* 041
STAC6-Q* 042
STAC6-Si* 043
STAC6-220-S*
044
STAC6-220-Q*
045
STAC6-220-Si*
046
ST5-S *020
ST5-Q *022
ST5-Si *023
ST5-Plus* 026
ST10-S*021
ST10-Q*024
ST10-Si* 025
ST10-Plus* 027
STM23S-2AN*
049
STM23S-2AE*
049
STM23S-2RN*
049
STM23S-2RE*
049
STM23S-3AN*
049
STM23S-3AE*
049
STM23S-3RN*
049
STM23S-3RE*
049
STM23Q-2AN*
050
STM23Q-2AE*
050
STM23Q-2RN*
050
STM23Q-2RE*
050
137
Sub-Model No. Code
A
E
C
G
B
F
D
H
A
E
C
G
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
STM23Q-3AN*
STM23Q-3AE*
STM23Q-3RN*
STM23Q-3RE*
050
050
050
050
B
F
D
H
* See example below for format of firmware version.
- Denotes no sub-model number code is used for this drive.
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
MV
100Q012
Notes
Drive connected has DSP firmware version 1.00Q, and the drive model
number is SV7-Q
MV
103F042
Drive connected has DSP firmware version 1.03F, and the drive model
number is STAC6-Q
MV
102J049A
Drive connected has DSP firmware version 1.03F, and the drive model
number is STM23S-2AN
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
138
Host Command Reference
NO - No Operation
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
Stored program flow
Q programs halt execution at blank lines. If a “no op” line is required in a program, for comments or other
purposes, rather than leave the line blank the NO command is used. Think of the NO command as leaving a
blank line in the middle of a sequence of commands. This is useful if after creating a sequence of commands
you would like to delete a command without the line numbers of the remaining commands changing. Instead
of deleting the line with the unwanted command, replace the unwanted command with a NO command and the
remaining commands in the sequence will maintain their respective line numbers.
NOTE: NO commands are not required after the last command in a segment.
Command Details:
Structure
NO
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
NO
Drive sends
-
Notes
No operation takes place at this program line
139
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
OF - On Fault
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
Stored program flow
See also:
AL, AX, AX, ME, OI commands
When a drive fault occurs, the OF command causes a given program segment to immediately load from nonvolatile memory into the queue. The OF command acts as a kind of software switch in that when this function
is turned on the drive’s response to a drive fault (loading the designated program segment) is automatic. Once
a fault occurs the fault must be cleared (AX) and the motor re-enabled (ME) before continuing normal program
execution.
Please note that while immediately executing AX will clear the alarm code, it does not guarantee that the condition
that caused the alarm has been resolved. Therefore it is recommended to include a short delay or wait for user
input before clearing the alarm and resuming normal operation.
Also, a drive fault will turn the OF function off, so after a fault the OF command must be executed again to reset
the function. For this reason it is common to place the OF command in segment 1 of a Q program, and then load
segment 1 (QX1) from the designated OF segment after the fault has been cleared and the motor re-enabled.
A parameter value of “0” disables the On Fault function. See the AL (Alarm code) command for details of drive
faults.
Command Details:
Structure
OF(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
No
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
program segment #
- units
integer
- range
1 - 12 = segment 1 - 12
0 = disable On Fault function
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
In segment 1 of a Q program...
OF9
-
Notes
When a drive fault occurs load and execute program segment 9
In segment 9 of the same Q program...
WT0.1
-
Short delay to allow the system to settle
AX
-
Alarm reset
ME
-
Motor enable
QX1
-
Load and execute segment 1, which will also reset the OF function.
OF0
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
-
Disable the On Fault function
140
Host Command Reference
OI - On Input
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
Interrupt function and stored program flow
See also:
MT, OF command
When the given input condition is met the OI command causes program segment 10 to immediately load from
non-volatile memory into the queue. The OI command operates as a kind of software switch. Executing the
command turns the interrupt function on. Responding to the interrupt input (by loading segment 10) turns the
interrupt function off. Therefore after an interrupt condition is cleared in the system the OI command must be
executed again to reset the interrupt function. One way to do this is place a copy of the OI command near the end
of segment 10, before loading and executing another segment (QX command). Only one interrupt input can be
defined at a time within a program. Executing the OI command with no parameter disables the interrupt function.
If Multi-Tasking is disabled (MT0, default) when the input condition is met, any move in progress will be aborted
and Segment 10 will be loaded immediately. If Multi-Tasking is enabled (MT1) when the input condition is met, the
program will branch to Segment 10 without interrupting a move in progress. In this scenario a Stop Move (SM)
command may be used to abort the move.
Command Details:
Structure
OI{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
No
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
MT0
-
OIX5F
-
Notes
Turn Multi-Tasking off
Load and execute program segment 10 when input X5 goes from
high to low. If a move is in progress, abort it.
MT1
-
OIX5F
-
Turn Multi-Tasking on
Load and execute program segment 10 when input X5 goes from high to low. Has no effect on a move already in progress.
OI
Disable interrupt function
-
141
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
OP - Option board
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
IF, MV commands
Requests the decimal or hexadecimal equivalent (see IF command) of the option board’s 7-bit binary word. Since
some drives - like the SV, ST-Q/Si, and STM drives - are available with different option boards, it is useful for the
host to be able to request this information from the drive. The 7 bits in the option board’s binary word are shown
below.
Bit
Value (Hex)
SV7
SVAC3
ST
STAC5
0
1
Encoder Board
Encoder Board
Encoder Board
Encoder Board
1
2
RS-485
reserved
RS-485
reserved
2
4
CANOpen
reserved
CANOpen
reserved
3
8
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
4
10
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
5
20
MCF Board *
reserved
MCF Board *
Expanded I/O
6
40
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
0
7
80
reserved
Expanded I/O
reserved
reserved
* This board includes encoder output so drives with this option will also have bit 0 set
Command Details:
Structure
OP
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Examples:
IF command set for decimal (IFD)...
Command
Drive sends
OP
OP3
OP
OP4
OP
OP33
Notes
Drive has both encoder and RS-485 option boards installed
Drive has CANOpen board installed
Drive has MCF board installed (bits 0 and 5 are set)
IF command set for hexadecimal (IFH)...
Command
Drive sends
Notes
OP
OP0003
Drive has both encoder and RS-485 option boards installed
OP
OP0004
Drive has CANOpen board installed
OP
OP0021
Drive has MCF board installed
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
142
Host Command Reference
PA - Power-up Acceleration Current
Compatibility: STM Integrated Step Motors
Affects:
Motor accel/decel current and torque
See also:
PC, CC, CA, SA commands
Sets or requests the power-up accel/decel current setting (“peak of sine”) of the stepper drive, also known as the
peak current. PA is similar to the CA command in that a change to PA affects the current value of the accel/decel
current. However PA differs from CA in that a change to PA is automatically written to non-volatile memory at the
time of the change. For a change in CA to be written to non-volatile memory an SA command must be executed
afterwards. See below for more details. PA will only accept parameter values equal or larger than the current PC
setting.
Relationship of PA, CA, and “M” register:
• A change to PA affects the current accel/decel current value and is automatically stored in non-volatile
memory.
• A change to PA automatically changes CA and the “M” register to the same value.
• A change to CA or the “M” register only affects the current accel/decel current value, but does not
automatically change PA to the same value.
• A change to CA or the “M” register is stored in non-volatile memory only after an SA command is
executed. When this occurs the PA command is also automatically changed to the new value.
NOTE: PA has no effect in Command Mode 7 (CM7 - Step and Direction mode).
Command Details:
Structure
PA{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes (see note below)
Register Access
“M” (029)
Note: The PA and CA commands use different units than the “M” register; see Data Registers section for details
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Power-up accel/decel current
- units
Amps (resolution is 0.01 amps)
- range
STM24: 0-6.0
STM23: 0-5.0
STM17: 0-2.0
Configurator software may also be used to set all current levels.
NOTE: This data is saved to non-volatile memory immediately upon execution. It is not required to execute the
SA command to save to non-volatile memory.
143
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Example:
STM17, STM23, STM24
Command
Drive sends
PA1.2
-
PAPA=1.2
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set power-up accel/decel current to 1.2 amps (peak of sine)
144
Host Command Reference
PB - Power-up Baud Rate
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
BR, PR, TD commands
Sets or requests the power-up baud rate for serial communications. When executed, this command sets the baud
rate and immediately saves it to non-volatile memory. At power-up the drive defaults to 9600 baud. If an Applied
Motion software application is not detected after 1 second and the drive is configured for host operation the drive
will set the baud rate according to the value stored in the Power-up Baud Rate non-volatile parameter. A host
system can change the baud rate at any time.
NOTE: Setting the baud rate takes effect immediately.
Command Details:
Structure
PB{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes (see note below)
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Baud rate code
- units
integer code
- range
1 = 9600
2 = 19200
3 = 38400
4 = 57600
5 = 115200
NOTE: This data is saved to non-volatile memory immediately upon execution. It is not required to execute the
SA command to save to non-volatile memory.
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
Notes
PB2
-
Power-up baud rate is set to 19200 and this value is immediately
saved to non-volatile memory
PBPB=2
145
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
PC - Power-up Current
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Motor current and torque
See also:
CC, PI, PP commands
If using a stepper drive, PC sets or requests the continuous (RMS) current setting of the servo drive. If using
a servo drive, PC sets or requests the current setting (“peak of sine”) of the stepper drive, also known as the
running current.
NOTE: This command is similar to CC. It differs only in that in addition to setting the continuous current of the
drive, PC also immediately saves the setting to NV memory. See CC command for further details.
Command Details:
Structure
PC{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes (see note below)
Register Access
“N” (030)
Note: The PC and CC commands use different units than
the “N” register; see Data Registers section for details
Parameter Details:
BLu, SV, SVAC3
Parameter #1
Power-up continuous current setting
- units
amps rms (resolution is 0.01 amps)
- range
BLuDC4: 0 - 4.5
BLuDC9: 0 - 9.0
BLuAC5: 0 - 5.0
SV: 0 - 7.0
SVAC3 (120V): 0 - 3.5
SVAC3 (220V): 0 - 1.8
STAC6, ST-Q/Si, ST-S, STM, STAC5
Parameter #1
Running current
- units
amps (resolution is 0.01 amps)
- range
STAC6: 0 - 6.0
ST5 : 0 - 5.0
ST10: 0 - 10.0
STM17: 0 - 2.0
STM23: 0 - 5.0
STM24: 0 - 6.0
STAC5 (120V): 0 - 5
STAC5 (220V): 0 - 2.55
NOTE: Applied Motion recommends using Configurator software to select a motor and set the maximum current.
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
PC3.2
-
PCPC=3.2
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set power-up continuous current to 3.2 amps RMS for servo drive or 3.2
amps running current for stepper drive
146
Host Command Reference
PF - Position Fault
Compatibility: Servo drives and stepper drives with encoder feedback
Servo drives
Sets or requests the Position Fault limit in encoder counts. This value defines the limit threshold, in encoder
counts, reached between actual position and commanded position before the system produces a position fault
error.
Stepper drives:
Sets or requests the “percentage of torque” used in the Stall Prevention function for systems with an encoder
installed on the motor. Making this setting with the PF command requires that an SA (Save) command be sent
afterwards, then a power-down/power-up cycle before the change will take effect. It is recommended that the
Configurator software be used to make this setting.
Command Details:
Structure
PF{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Servo: Position fault limit
Stepper: Percentage of torque
- units
Servo: encoder counts
Stepper: percentage of torque
- range
Servo: 1 - 32767
Stepper: 0 - 100 (percent)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
PF2000
-
PFPF=2000
Notes
Set position fault limit to 2000 counts in servo drive
PF50
-
Set percentage of torque to 50% in stepper drive fitted with encoder and
with the Stall Prevention function turned on
PFPF=50
147
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
PI - Power-up Idle Current
Compatibility: Stepper drives only
Affects:
Motor current at standstill, holding torque
See also:
CC, CD, CI commands
Idle current is the level of current supplied to each motor phase when the motor is not moving. Using an idle
current level lower than the running motor current (see CC and PC commands) aids in motor cooling. A common
level used for the idle current setting is 50% of the running current. After a motor move, there is a time delay
after the motor takes its last step before the reduction to the idle current takes place. This delay is set by the CD
command.
This command is similar to the CI command. It differs only in that in addition to setting the idle current of the drive,
PI also immediately saves the setting to NV memory. See CI command page for details.
Command Details:
Structure
PI{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes (see note below)
Register Access
“O” (031)
Note: The CI command uses different units than the “O”
register; see Data Registers section for more details
Parameter Details:
STAC6
Parameter #1
Idle current at power-up
- units
amps
- range
0 - 100% of running current
ST-Q/Si, ST-S, STM, STAC5
Parameter #1
Idle current at power-up
- units
amps
- range
0 - 90% of running current
NOTE: This data is saved to non-volatile memory immediately upon execution. It is not required to execute the
SA command to save to non-volatile memory.
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
PI0.75
-
PIPI=0.75
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set power-up idle current to 0.75 amps
148
Host Command Reference
PL - Position Limit
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Affects:
Motion Output function
See also:
MO command
Sets or requests the count value used by the servo to determine if the motor is in position. This is used by the
servo for determining the state of Motion Output (see MO command). When performing a move the Motion
Output will be set to the designated condition until the servo is in position at the end of a move. The “In Position”
status is set in the same way.
Command Details:
Structure
PL{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Positioning limit
- units
encoder counts
- range
0 - 32767
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
PL20
-
PLPL=20
Notes
Set position limit to 20 counts
149
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
PM - Power-up Mode
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
CM command
Sets or requests the power-up mode of the drive. PM determines how the drive is configured for serial
communications at power-up. For example, for SCL applications set PM=2 or PM=5. The power-up mode is also
set when configuring the drive with Quick Tuner or Configurator. PM2 (Q / SCL) is the same as PM7 (Q Program
Mode), except the program is not automatically executed at power up.
Q drives
When creating Q Programs for your Q drive, checking the “Execute “Q” at Power-up” box on the main screen of
the Q Programmer software will change the power-up mode of the drive to 7 (PM7) with the next download. This
will cause the drive to run its stored Q Program at power-up. You must download the program after checking this
box for the change to take effect.
Si drives
An Si drive is set to PM1 automatically when an Si program is downloaded to the drive. If the drive is currently set
to PM7 for operation in Q mode, simply uploading and executing a stored Si program will not change the powerup mode of the drive to PM1. The program may be uploaded and executed, but the drive will not power up and
execute the Si program until after a download through the Si Programmer software.
NOTE: If the drive is configured for power-up modes 1 or 3, it will not respond to SCL commands issued by a host
device. If SCL communications are required in this scenario, the host device must recognize the drive’s powerup packet and issue the response “00” (double-zero, no carriage return) within two seconds to force the drive into
SCL mode without altering the PM setting. See Appendix B for further information.
Command Details:
Structure
PM {Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes (see note below)
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Power on mode
- units
integer code
- range
1 = Si Program (Si versions only)
2 = Q / SCL (drive enabled)
3 = Quick Tuner (servos) or Configurator (steppers)
4 = SiNet Hub
5 = Q / SCL (drive disabled)
6 = not used
7 = Q Program, Auto-execute (Q drives only)
NOTE: This data is saved to non-volatile memory immediately upon execution. It is not required to execute the
SA command to save to non-volatile memory.
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
PM2
-
PMPM=2
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Drive will power up in Q / SCL mode (drive enabled)
150
Host Command Reference
PP - Power-up Peak current
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Affects:
Motor current, especially during acceleration and deceleration
See also:
CC, CP, PC commands
Sets or requests the power-up peak (RMS) current setting of the servo drive. This command differs from the CP
command in that in addition to setting the peak current of the drive, PP also immediately saves the setting to NV
memory. In other words, PP = CP + SA.
Command Details:
Structure
PP{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Power-up peak current limit
- units
amps RMS (resolution is 0.01 amps)
- range
BLuDC4: 0 - 13.5
BLuDC9: 0 - 18.0
BLuAC5: 0 - 15.0
SV7: 0 - 7.0
SVAC3 (120V): 0 - 7.5
SVAC3 (220V): 0 - 3.75
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
PP6
-
PPPP=6
Notes
Set power-up peak current to 6.0 amps RMS
151
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
PR - Protocol
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
RS-232 & RS-485 Serial Communications
See also:
BR and PB commands
Sets or requests the serial communication protocol settings. Sets or requests the serial communication protocol
settings. There are a number of settings that can be turned on or off in the PR command. Each setting is
assigned a bit in a 6-bit binary word. The parameter of the PR command is the decimal equivalent of this word. If
you send the PR command without a parameter the drive will respond with the decimal equivalent of the word as
well. The different protocol settings and their bit assignments are shown below.
Command Details:
Structure
PR{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Protocol code
- units
decimal (integer) value of binary word
- range
1 - 63 (000001 - 111111)
bit 0 = Default (“Standard SCL”)
bit 1 = Always use Address Character
bit 2 = Ack/Nack
bit 3 = Checksum (RESERVED)
bit 4 = RS-485 Adaptor
bit 5 = 3-digit numeric register addressing
*Bit 0 is only required when all other bits are set to 0. If any other bit in the word is set to 1, Bit 0 is ignored.
For example, PR4 and PR5 provide the same protocol settings.
Examples:
Command
PR1
Drive sends
-
PR4
-
PRPR=4
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set to standard SCL protocol
Turn Ack/Nack on
152
Host Command Reference
PS - Pause
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
BS, CT command
Suspends execution of buffered commands until the next CT (Continue) command is executed. This can be
useful for coordinating motion among axes by first pausing (PS) the drives, then loading the drives’ command
buffers with commands, and then resuming command execution (CT) in all drives at once. PS can also be useful
for holding a sequence of commands in the drive’s command buffer to time with an external event. Use the PS
command to pause the command buffer, then send each (buffered type) command in the desired sequence to
the drive. When the timing with the external event occurs, simply send the CT command which will trigger the
execution of the already buffered sequence of commands.
NOTE: It is possible to overflow the command buffer. Use the BS (Buffer Status) command to view how many
command spaces are vacant in the buffer at any given time.
Command Details:
Structure
PS
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
PS
Drive sends
-
Notes
Pause execution of buffered commands
153
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
PW - Password
Compatibility: Q drives only
Normally the stored program of a Q drive can be uploaded and downloaded at will. This allows basically any user
to access the stored program of a Q drive. To password-protect the stored program of a Q drive the PW command
can be issued with a customized key code.
The factory default key code is “1234”, which allows uploading and downloading programs freely. To passwordprotect a stored program the user should enter the PW command with a new key code. This new key code can
be any 4 character alpha-numeric code (characters A-Z, a-z, and 0-9 are acceptable). After entering the new key
code the user must enter the SA (Save) command for the new key code to be saved in the drive. Then, the next
time the drive is powered up password-protection will take effect, which means the user must first “unlock” the
drive by sending the PW command with the customized key code before being able to upload (QU), save (QS), or
delete (QD) any part of the Q drive’s stored program. (All other immediate commands function even if the drive
is not “unlocked”). Furthermore, every subsequent power-up of the drive will require the same key code to be
entered before uploading. To change the key code, enter the present key code at power up and then use the PW
command to enter a new key code followed by the SA command. To return the drive to the default state of nopassword protection, unlock the drive first by using the present key code, then enter the default key code of “1234”
followed by the SA command.
NOTE: If the key code is forgotten or lost, re-entering the default code of “1234” will unlock the drive and ERASE
THE CONTENTS OF THE DRIVE’S NON-VOLATILE MEMORY AT THE SAME TIME.
Command Details:
Structure
PW(Parameter #1)
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
4-digit alphanumeric key code
- units
upper and lower-case letters and numbers
- range
A-Z, a-z, 0-9
- default
Default key code is “1234”
Examples:
Command
PWak99
SA
Drive sends
-
-
Notes
Password key code set to “ak99”
New key code saved in drive
PWak99
-
Access to stored program unlocked at next power-up of drive
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
154
Host Command Reference
QC - Queue Call
Compatibility: Q drives only
See also:
QX, QE, QL commands
Loads a program segment from non-volatile memory into the queue and begins executing at line #1. Loads the
“calling” segment location and the line where the call occurred into a call “stack”. When a QC command without
a parameter is encountered in the segment a “return” to the calling segment is activated. The “calling” segment is
loaded from non-volatile memory back into the queue and begins executing at the line immediately following the
line number of the original “calling” QC command.
The call stack can go 5 calls deep which means you can nest up to 5 calls. If the number of calls before a “return”
(QC with no parameter) is encountered exceeds 5 the “calling” QC command (with parameter) is ignored. If a
“return” is encountered without a previous call, the return is ignored.
Command Details:
Structure
QC{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Program segment, no parameter means return to calling
segment
- units
integer
- range
1 - 12 = segment 1 - 12
no parameter = return to calling segment
Examples:
Command
QC4
QC
Drive sends
-
-
Notes
Call segment 4
Return to calling segment
155
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
QD - Queue Delete
Compatibility: Q drives only
See also:
QL, QS, PW commands
Deletes the contents of the non-volatile memory location associated with a particular program segment.
Command Details:
Structure
QD(Parameter #1)
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Segment number
- units
integer number
- range
1 - 12
Examples:
Command
QD5
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
Notes
Delete program segment 5 from the drive’s non-volatile memory
156
Host Command Reference
QE - Queue Execute
Compatibility: Q drives only
See also:
QL, QX
Begins executing a program segment previously loaded into the queue. Starts executing at line #1. A segment
must have previously been loaded using the “QL” or “QX” commands.
Command Details:
Structure
QE
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
QE
Drive sends
-
Notes
Begin execution of loaded segment
157
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
QG - Queue Goto
Compatibility: Q drives only
See also:
QJ, QR
Causes program segment execution to jump to the given line number in the queue. Gotos directed to the same
line number as the QG command or past the end of the queue are ignored.
Command Details:
Structure
QG(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Segment line number
- units
integer
- range
1 - 62
Examples:
Command
QG10
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
Notes
Cause a jump to line 10 in the segment
158
Host Command Reference
QJ - Queue Jump
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
Program flow
See also:
QG, TI, TR, CR and all Math commands (“R” commands)
Causes program segment execution to jump to the given line number in the queue based on a “condition code”.
Jumps directed to the same line number as the QJ command or past the end of the queue are ignored. If the
condition code is met the jump occurs, if not the program proceeds to the next line. Condition codes are set by
previous commands such as the TI (Test Input) or TR (Test Register) commands. When using math commands
(“R” commands) the condition code is set based on the result of the math operation.
Command Details:
Structure
QJ(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Condition code
- units
letter
- range
T = True
F = False
P = Positive
G = Greater than
L = Less than
E = Equals
U = Unequal
Z = Zero
Parameter #2
Segment line number
- units
integer
- range
1 - 62
Examples:
Command
TI4L
QJT15
Drive sends
-
-
Notes
Test input 4 to see if it’s low (active)
Jump to line 15 if condition code is “True” (i.e. input 4 is low)
159
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
QK - Queue Kill
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
Queue execution and program flow
See also:
SK
Halts execution of the queue. The queue contents are not affected and can be executed again using the “QE”
command.
Command Details:
Structure
QK
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
QK
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
Notes
Stop execution of the queue/program
160
Host Command Reference
QL - Queue Load
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
Contents of command buffer
See also:
QE, QS, QX commands
Initiates the loading of a command sequence into the queue. Loading can come from the serial port (host
controller) or from non-volatile memory (stored program). When no parameter is sent with the command loading
is done from the serial port. Loading is finished when a QS (Queue Save) or QE (Queue Execute) command is
sent. When a parameter is sent with the command the parameter designates the non-volatile memory location
of the desired program segment to be loaded into the queue. QL will cause an overwrite of any commands in the
queue starting at line #1.
Command Details:
Structure
QL{Parameter #1}
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Program segment number
- units
integer
- range
1 - 12
Examples:
Command
QL
QL3
Drive sends
-
-
Notes
Initiates loading queue from serial port
Loads segment from non-volatile memory into the queue
161
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
QR - Queue Repeat
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
Selected data register
See also:
QJ, QG, RL, RX commands
Causes program segment execution to jump to a previous line number in the queue for a given number of repeat
counts. The repeat count is acquired from a selected Read/Write or User-Defined data register. Jumps past the
end of the queue are ignored. Jumps to subsequent line numbers in the queue will not be repeated. If repeat
count is set to “1” no Jump is performed. The data register selected for the repeat count must be set with the
number of repeat counts prior to using the QR command: use the RX (Register Load - buffered) command to load
the data register with the repeat count. The data register contents are affected by this command and must be reloaded before each usage with the QR command.
NOTE: Although data registers A - Z can be used with the QR command it is not recommended. The QR
command eventually destructs the data in a register by decrementing its value each time a jump is made in the
repeat loop and could therefore lead to unexpected results in other parts of the program that make use of data
registers A - Z.
Command Details:
Structure
QR(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Data register
- units
register character
- range
A - Z and all user-defined registers (listed in the Data
Registers section)
Parameter #2
Segment line number
- units
integer
- range
1 - 62
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
RX120
-
QR15
-
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Load user register #1 with the value 20
Cause a repeated jump to line 5 of the queue using the value (20) in
data register #1 as the repeat count
162
Host Command Reference
QS - Queue Save
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:None
See also:
QE, QL, QX, PW commands
Saves a segment currently in the queue to a non-volatile memory location. Ends a QL (Queue Load) if one is in
progress. See Appendix B for more details on this command, including its limitations.
Command Details:
Structure
QS(Parameter #1)
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Program segment location
- units
integer
- range
1 - 12
Examples:
Command
QS2
Drive sends
-
Notes
Save contents of queue to non-volatile memory location #2
163
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
QU - Queue Upload
Compatibility: Q drives only
See also:
QL, QE, QS, QX, PW commands
Uploads a stored program segment from the drive’s non-volatile memory to the serial port. This command is
used to retrieve stored program segments from the drive. When using this command the drive responds with
either a “positive” or a “negative” response. A “positive” response consists of a normal acknowledge (“ack”)
followed by the contents of the requested program segment with each line number separated by a carriage
return. Program segments 1 to 12 can be uploaded, as well as the contents of the queue. A “negative” response
from the drive consists of a normal acknowledge (“ack”) followed by one of four error codes: 0, -1, -2, or -3. A
negative acknowledge (“nack” / “?”) will be sent from the drive if the command is not understood by the drive. See
Appendix D for more information on acknowledge and negative acknowledge responses.
Positive response format:
“ack” (“%”)
First line = “QU##” where “##” = the number of lines in the segment + 1
Second line = command at line 1 of the segment
Next line = command at line 2 of the segment
...
Last line = command at last line of segment
Negative Responses:
“ack” (“%”)
QU0 = No segment at specified location
QU-1 = Program Running (Cannot upload at this time)
QU-2 = Upload currently in process
QU-3 = Password Protected (Protection must be unlocked using PW command)
Command Details:
Structure
QU(Parameter #1)
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Program segment location
- units
integer
- range
1 - 12, or 0 to upload queue
Examples:
Command
QU0
QU3
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
(queue contents)
(segment #3 contents)
location #3
Notes
Uploads contents of queue to the serial port
Uploads contents of segment from non-volatile memory
164
Host Command Reference
QX - Queue Load & Execute
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
Stored program flow
See also:
QE, QL
Loads a program segment from non-volatile memory into the queue. Begins executing the segment at line
#1. This is the similar to the combination of a QL (Queue Load) and a QE (Queue Execute) command with the
difference being the QX command can be written into a stored program segment. Use this command to “jump”
from segment to segment.
Command Details:
Structure
QX(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Program segment location
- units
integer
- range
1 - 12
Examples:
Command
QX2
Drive sends
-
Notes
Loads segment #2 and begins execution
165
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
RC - Register Counter
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
Data Register “I” (025)
See also:
RL, RX , RI, RD, TS commands
This command enables a function that increments the “I” data register when the given input condition (determined
by the RC command) is met. Typically the “R” or “F” input condition (see Details below) is used to trigger an
increment. If however the “L” or “H” input condition is used the register will be incremented at a rate of 8000
times per second. In other words the “R” and “F” input conditions are used for true input counting while the “L”
and “H” conditions act as input timers. Use the RL (Register Load - immediate) or RX (Register Load - buffered)
commands to preset or set the “I” data register to a predetermined value. Sending the RC command without a
parameter disables the function.
This command is also used in conjunction with the TS (Time Stamp) command. See the TS command for more
details.
Command Details:
Structure
RC{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“I” (025)
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
RC4F
Drive sends
-
low (falling edge)
Notes
Increment data register “I” each time input 4 changes from high to
The sample Q program on the following page illustrates the interaction of the RC and TS commands. After
initialization, the program waits for a falling edge event on input X3, at which point a 5 second timer begins
counting down. During this delay, the user may trigger X3 an arbitrary number of times. After 5 seconds,
the motor will execute a series of 5000-step moves, with the delay between each corresponding to the delay
between switch closures on X3. That is, if the user trips X3 four times waiting 1 second between each event,
the motor will execute four 5000-step moves with a 1 second dwell between each.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
166
Host Command Reference
Sample Q program for illustrating RC and TS interaction
MT 1
Multi-tasking ON
EG 20000
20,000 steps/rev
AC250
DE250
VE5
FI
3
200
Filter input 3 for 200 processor ticks
RX I
0
Zero the “I” register
RC X3F
Setup the “I” register for input X3
WI
X3F
Wait for input X3
WT 5.00
Wait 5 seconds >>> trigger inpuxt X3 a few times
TS
Throw away first time stamp
LABEL2 RD I
Decrement “I” register
FL
5000
Feed 5000 steps
TR I
1
Test “I” against 1
QJ L
#LABEL1 Jump to end if “I” less than 1
TSTime stamp
RM W
1
Move “W” into “1”
WD 1
Delay for “1” milliseconds
QG #LABEL2
Go to Label 2
LABEL1
NOStop program
167
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
RD - Register Decrement
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
RI, RM
Decrements by 1 the value of the designated data register.
Command Details:
Structure
RD(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
All Read/Write and User-Defined data registers
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Data register assignment
- units
character
- range
all Read/Write and User-Defined data registers
Examples:
Command
RDV
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
Notes
Decrements the value of the velocity data register “V”
168
Host Command Reference
RE - Restart or Reset
Compatibility: All drives
Restarts the drive by resetting fault conditions and re-initializing the drive with the startup parameters. Leaves the
drive in a disabled state to prevent any movement after the restart is complete.
Command Details:
Structure
RE
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
RE
Drive sends
-
Notes
Resets drive condition and parameters
169
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
RI - Register Increment
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
RD, RM commands
Increments by 1 the value of the designated data register.
Command Details:
Structure
RI(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
All Read/Write and User-Defined data registers
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Data register assignment
- units
character
- range
all Read/Write and User-Defined data registers
Examples:
Command
RIV
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
Notes
Increments the value of the velocity data register “V”
170
Host Command Reference
RL - Register Load - immediate
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
RX, RI, RD, RM commands
Sets a data register to the given immediate data value. The data value is checked and stored as a Long word.
When setting a Short-word register with the given Long-word data value only the lower word of the Long value is
used.
Command Details:
Structure
RL(Paramter #1){Parameter #2}
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
All data registers
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Data register assignment
- units
character
- range
All Read/Write and User-Defined data registers; ReadOnly data registers can be read back when Parameter #2
is not included
Parameter #2
Data register value
- units
integer
- range
+/- 2147483647 (long data registers)
+/- 32767 (short data registers)
Examples:
Command
RLA100
RLA
Drive sends
-
RLA=100
When PR command Bit 5 is set
RL017100
-
RL017
RLA=100 Notes
Set acceleration register to 1000 rpm/s
Return acceleration register value
Set Acceleration register to 1000 rpm/s
Return acceleration register value
NOTE: When setting a register no pre-processing of the data value is performed. Data is set to the internal raw
value. For example, the internal raw acceleration value is in tens of rpm/s. See the “Data Register” section at
the beginning of this manual for more details on data register assignments and units.
Units Example:
AC10 means 10 rps/s
RLA10 means 10 * 10 rpm/s = 1.667 rps/s
Multiply the desired rps/s value times 6 to convert to the “raw” acceleration value
171
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
RM - Register Move
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
RI, RD, RL, TR, RX commands
Move the contents of a first data register into a second data register.
Command Details:
Structure
RM(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
All Read/Write and User-Defined data registers
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Source data register
- units
character
- range
all data register assignments
Parameter #2
Destination data register
- units
character
- range
all Read/Write and User-Defined data registers
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
RMAB
-
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Move contents of acceleration register “A” into the deceleration
register “B”
172
Host Command Reference
RR - Register Read
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
RI, RD, RL, RM, RW commands
Reads a data value from a non-volatile memory location into a data register. The data value is read as a Long
word. If the value being read is too large for the destination data register, the value is truncated.
Command Details:
Structure
RR(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
All Read/Write and User-Defined data registers
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Data register
- units
character
- range
all Read/Write and User-Defined data registers
Parameter #2
Non-volatile memory location
- units
integer
- range
1 - 100
Examples:
Command
RRV10
Drive sends
-
register “V”
Notes
Read data from non-volatile memory location #10 and place it in data
173
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
RS - Request Status
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
SC command
Asks the drive to respond with what it’s doing. The drive has a number of different states of operation that are
represented by character codes. The drive can send more than one code at a time to define its current status.
Command Details:
Structure
RS
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
RS
RS
RS
Drive sends
RS=PR
RS=AED
RS=JR
Notes
Motor is in position, drive is enabled
Alarm code is present, drive is faulted and disabled
Motor is jogging, drive is enabled
Status character codes:
A = An Alarm code is present (use AL command to see code, AR command to clear code)
D = Disabled (the drive is disabled)
E = Drive Fault (drive must be reset by AR command to clear this fault)
F = Motor moving
H = Homing (SH in progress)
J = Jogging (CJ in progress)
M = Motion in progress (Feed & Jog Commands)
P = In position
R = Ready (Drive is enabled and ready)
S = Stopping a motion (ST or SK command executing)
T = Wait Time (WT command executing)
W = Wait Input (WI command executing)
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
174
Host Command Reference
RU - Register Upload
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
PR, RL, RX commands
Upload the contents of an array of data registers. Up to 16 registers can be read back with one RU command.
Each reading is terminated with a carriage return.
Command Details:
Structure
RU(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
All data registers
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Data register assignment
- units
character
- range
all data registers
Parameter #2
Number of consecutive data registers to upload
- units
integer
- range
1 - 16
Examples:
Command
RUA5
Drive sends
RUA=400
RUB=400
RUC=16000
RUD=8000
RUE=0
When PR command Bit 5 is set
RU0175
RUA=400
RUB=400
RUC=16000
RUD=8000
RUE=0
Notes
“A” The Acceleration value
“B” The Deceleration value
“C” The Distance Change value
“D” The Distance value
“E” The Encoder value
“017” The Acceleration value
“018” The Deceleration value
“019” The Distance Change value
“020” The Distance value
“021” The Encoder value
NOTE: All Data values are “raw” meaning the data is not scaled to the drive user units. For example the velocity
value (“V”) will be returned as 0.25 rpm instead of rps: raw value of 2400 = 10 rps.
175
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
RV - Revision Level
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
MV command
Requests the drive’s firmware version. Data is returned as a three digit value. To see the firmware version’s subletter as well (if applicable) use the MV command.
Command Details:
Structure
RV
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Units
Drive firmware version
Examples:
Command
RV
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
RV=150
Notes
Drive is running firmware version 1.50
176
Host Command Reference
RW - Register Write
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
RI, RD, RL, RM, RW commands
Writes the data value of a given data register into non-volatile memory. The data value is written as a Long word.
See Appendix B for more details on this command, including its limitations.
Command Details:
Structure
RW(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
All Read/Write and User-Defined data registers
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Data register assignment
- units
character
- range
all Read/Write and User-Defined data registers
Parameter #2
Non-volatile memory location
- units
integer
- range
1 - 100
Examples:
Command
RWV10
Drive sends
-
#10
Notes
Write data from data register “V” into non-volatile memory location
177
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
RX - Register Load - buffered
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
RL, RU, RM commands
Sets a data register to the given immediate data value. The data value is checked and stored as a Long word.
When loading a Short-word data register with the given Long-word data value only the lower word of the Long
value is used. This command is the same as the RL command except it is a buffered command and therefore can
be placed in a stored program.
Command Details:
Structure
RX(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
All data registers
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Data register assignment
- units
character
- range
All Read/Write and User-Defined data registers; ReadOnly data registers can be used when Parameter #2 is not
included (i.e. for reading back the contents of a Read-Only
data register)
Parameter #2
Data register value
- units
integer
- range
+/- 2147483647 (long data registers)
+/- 32767 (short data registers)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
RXA100
-
RXARXA=100
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set acceleration register “A” to 1000 rpm/s
178
Host Command Reference
R+ - Register Add
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
R-, R*, R/, R&, RD, RI, QJ commands
Adds the contents of a first data register to a second data register and places the result in the accumulator data
register, User-Defined register “0”. This is a 32-bit operation: adding two Long word values can cause an overflow.
All math operations affect the “condition code” used by the QJ (Queue Jump) command. R+ can set condition
codes T, F, N, P, and Z
Command Details:
Structure
R+(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“0” (000), Accumulator
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
First data register assignment
- units
character
- range
all data registers
Parameter #2
Second data register assignment
- units
character
- range
all data registers
Examples:
Command
R+D1
Drive sends
Notes
-
Add contents of distance register “D” to user-defined register “1” and
place the result in the accumulator register “0”
179
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
R- - Register Subtract
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
R+, R*, R/, R&, RD, RI, QJ commands
Subtracts the contents of the second data register from the first data register and places the result in the
accumulator data register, User-Defined register “0”. This is a 32-bit operation: subtracting two Long word values
can cause an underflow.
All math operations affect the “condition code” used by the QJ (Queue Jump) command. Can set condition codes
T, F, N, P, and Z.
Command Details:
Structure
R-(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“0” (000), Accumulator
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
First data register assignment
- units
character
- range
all data registers
Parameter #2
Second data register assignment
- units
character
- range
all data registers
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
R-D1
-
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Subtract the contents of user-defined register “1” from the distance
register “D” and place the result in the accumulator register “0”
180
Host Command Reference
R* - Register Multiply
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
R+, R-, R/, R&, RD, RI, QJ commands
Multiply the contents of the first data register by the second data register and place the result in the accumulator
data register, User-Defined register “0”. This is a 32-bit operation: multiplying two Long word values can cause an
overflow.
All math operations affect the “condition code” used by the QJ (Queue Jump) command. Can set condition codes
T, F, N, P, and Z.
Command Details:
Structure
R*(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“0” (000), Accumulator
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
First data register assignment
- units
character
- range
all data registers
Parameter #2
Second data register assignment
- units
character
- range
all data registers
Examples:
Command
R*D1
Drive sends
Notes
-
Multiply contents of distance register “D” by contents of user-defined
register “1” and place result in accumulator register “0”
181
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
R/ - Register Divide
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
R+, R-, R*, R&, RD, RI, QJ commands
Divide the contents of the first data register by the second data register and place the result in the accumulator
data register, User-Defined register “0”. This is a 32-bit operation. A value of “zero” in the second data register
will cause an illegal “divide by zero”, in which case the divide operation is ignored.
All math operations affect the “condition code” used by the QJ (Queue Jump) command. Can set condition codes
T, F, N, P, and Z.
Command Details:
Structure
R/(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“0” (000), Accumulator
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
First data register
- units
data register assignment
- range
All data registers
Parameter #2
Second data register
- units
data register assignment
- range
All data registers
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
R/D1
-
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Divide contents of distance register “D” by user-defined register “1”
and place result in accumulator register “0”
182
Host Command Reference
R& - Register AND
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
R+, R-, R*, R/, RD, RI, QJ commands
Do a “bit-wise” AND of the contents of the first data register with the contents of the second data register and
place the result in the accumulator data register, User-Defined register “0”. This is a 32-bit operation. This
operation affects the “condition code” use by the QJ (Queue Jump) command.
All math operations affect the “condition code” used by the QJ (Queue Jump) command. Can set condition codes
T, F, N, P, and Z.
Command Details:
Structure
R&(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“0” (000), Accumulator
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
First data register
- units
data register assignment
- range
All data registers
Parameter #2
Second data register
- units
data register assignment
- range
All data registers
Examples:
Command
R&s1
Drive sends
Notes
-
AND the contents of status register “s” and user-defined register “1”
and place the result in accumulator register “0”
183
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
R| - Register OR
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
R+, R-, R*, R/, R&, RD, RI, QJ commands
Do a “bit-wise” OR of the contents of the first data register with the contents of the second data register and place
the result in the accumulator data register, User-Defined register “0”. This is a 32-bit operation.
All math operations affect the “condition code” used by the QJ (Queue Jump) command. Can set condition codes
T, F, N, P, and Z.
Command Details:
Structure
RI(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“0” (000), Accumulator
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
First data register
- units
data register assignment
- range
All data registers
Parameter #2
Second data register
- units
data register assignment
- range
All data registers
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
R|i1
-
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
OR the contents of inputs register “i” with user-defined register “1”
and place the results in accumulator register “0”
184
Host Command Reference
SA - Save Parameters
Compatibility: All drives
See Also:
RE command
Saves selected command parameters to non-volatile memory. This command is useful for setting up the drive
configuration with the desired defaults at power-up. (See which commands are non-volatile in the Command
Summary section.)
Command Details:
Structure
SA
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
SA
Drive sends
-
Notes
Save all Non-Volatile-designated data registers
185
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
SC - Status Code
Compatibility: All drives
See also:
RS command
Requests the current drive status as the Hexadecimal equivalent of a binary word. Each bit in the binary word
relates to a status condition (see assignments below). The representation of this binary word as a hexadecimal
value is called the Status Code. Drives can have multiple status conditions at one time, and host systems can
typically interpret a Hexadecimal code very quickly. See Appendix E for more details on the Status Code.
Command Details:
Structure
SC
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
READ ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Units
Hexadecimal equivalent of the binary status code word (see bit
assignments below)
Response Details:
Hex Value
Status Code bit definition
0001
Motor Enabled (Motor Disabled if this bit = 0)
0002
Sampling (for Quick Tuner)
0004
Drive Fault (check Alarm Code)
0008
In Position (motor is in position)
0010
Moving (motor is moving)
0020
Jogging (currently in jog mode)
0040
Stopping (in the process of stopping from a stop command)
0080
Waiting (for an input)
0100
Saving (parameter data is being saved)
0200
Alarm present (check Alarm Code)
0400
Homing (executing an SH command)
0800
Wait Time (executing a WT command)
1000
Wizard running (Timing Wizard is running)
2000
Checking encoder (Timing Wizard is running)
4000
Q Program is running
8000
Initializing (happens at power up)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
SC
SC=0009
SC
SC=0004
SC
SC=0209
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Drive is in position and enabled (hex values 0001 and 0008)
Drive is faulted and disabled (hex value 0004)
Drive has an alarm, is in position and enabled (hex values 0001, 0008,
and 0200)
186
Host Command Reference
SD - Set Direction
Compatibility: Integrated Steppers with Flex I/O
Affects:
All input and output commands
See Also:
AI, AO, BO, DL, MO and SI
The Flex I/O feature allows the user to specify the direction of each I/O point. That is, to configure each as either
an input or output. SD may be used as a query if issued without a parameter. The drive will then report the
direction of each I/O point.
WARNING: The SD command allows dynamic changes to I/O behavior of the drive, and may cause
unintended interactions with other machine components if not implemented properly. Extreme caution
should be used. The SD command is documented here only for completeness; Applied Motion Products
strongly recommends that the Configurator software be used to make changes to drive I/O behavior.
Command Details:
Structure
SD{Parameter #1}{Parameter #2}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
I/O point to configure
- units
Integer
- range
1-4
Parameter #2
Direction (input or output)
- units
Single character
- range
‘I’ or ‘O’ (letter ‘O’, not zero)
NOTE: This command requires either the letter ‘I’ (input) or ‘O’ (output) as Parameter #2. The drive’s response
however, is composed of the numbers 1 (one = input) or 0 (zero = output).
Examples:
Command
SD2O
SD4I
SD
Drive sends
Notes
-
Set I/O point 2 as an Output
-
Set I/O point 4 as an Input
SD=00000111
Drive reports that I/O points 1, 2 and 3 are inputs, 4 is an output. (Note: on the STM24, I/O points 5-8 are unused)
187
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
SF - Step Filter Frequency
Compatibility: Stepper drives only
Sets or requests the step filter frequency. The primary use of this filter is to introduce “microstep emulation”
effects, which smooth out low resolution step pulses when the drive’s microstep/gearing resolution (EG command)
is set to a low value. This command is exceptionally useful when using a low-resolution indexer and smooth motor
shaft rotation is required.
Command Details:
Structure
SF{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Step filter frequency
- units
Hz
- range
0 - 2500
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
SF500
-
SFSF=500
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set step filter frequency to 500 Hz
188
Host Command Reference
SH - Seek Home
Compatibility: All drives
See Also:
DL, FD, FS, FY commands
Executes the seek home command. Requires input number and condition for the home sensor. Speed is set
by the last VE command. Accel and decel are set by AC and DE. Direction comes from the sign of the last DI
command (“-” is CCW, no sign is CW).
The SH command performs a number of operations all combined into one command. The basic operation acts
like a combination of the FS (Feed to Sensor) and FP (Feed to Position) commands. First, an FS-like move is
made that runs the motor until the drive “sees” the home sensor. When the drive sees this home sensor it does
two things: it records the absolute position of the home sensor and it immediately starts decelerating the motor
to a stop. After the motor has come to a stop the drive then does an FP-like move to move the motor back to
the absolute position recorded for the home sensor. Another function of the SH command is that if an end-oftravel limit switch is encountered before the home sensor condition is met, the move direction is reversed until the
opposite limit is found. After the opposite limit is found the move then returns to the original direction and again
attempts to find the home sensor. This always ensures that the motor is moving in the desired direction when the
drive sees the home sensor.
NOTE: This command is designed for use with three physical sensors or switches tied to three separate digital
inputs of the drive: a home sensor, a CW end-of travel limit, and a CCW end-of-travel limit.
Command Details:
Structure
SH{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
SH1L
SH3R
SHX5L
Drive sends
-
-
-
Notes
Seek home to input 1 low
Seek home to input 3 rising edge
Seek home to input X5 low (main driver board input)
189
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
SI - Enable Input Usage
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Enable input usage
See also:
AI, CM, SD commands
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si
Sets or requests the usage of the Enable input. Input X3 is the default Enable input on all drives, however IN3 on
SE, QE and Si drives may also be designated as the Enable input (see below). If an external Enable function is
not needed input X3 and/or IN3 can be defined solely as a general purpose input. In this scenario only the ME
and MD commands will enable and disable the drive, respectively. When using the brake output (see BO, BD and
BE commands) the disabling of the drive is delayed by the time value set using the BD command.
There are five possible usage states for the Enable function:
SI1: Drive is enabled when X3 is open (inactive, high).
SI2: Drive is enabled when X3 is closed (active, low).
SI3: Neither X3 nor IN3 is used for enabling/disabling the drive, but as general purpose inputs.
SI4: Drive is enabled when IN3 is open (inactive, high). (SE, QE, and Si drives only).
SI5: Drive is enabled when IN3 is closed (active, low). (SE, QE, and Si drives only).
ST-S, STM17, STM23-Q/C, STM24-C
Defines the EN input as an Enable Input. If you want to use the EN input as an Enable input you can define it as
such in two ways, with the ST Configurator software, or with the SI command. SI takes no effect if the drive is set
in Command Mode (CM) 13, 14, 17 or 18, because these modes use the EN input as a speed change input and
take precedence over the SI command. Also, setting the AI command after setting the SI command reassigns
the EN input to Alarm Reset usage and turns off any drive enable usage (SI3). In other words, the AI and SI
commands, as well as Command Modes (CM) 13, 14, 17 and 18 each assign a usage to the EN input. Each of
these must exclusively use the EN input. Note: The STM24-C drive uses IN3 for the Enable Input.
There are three Enable input states that can be defined with the SI command:
SI1: Drive is enabled when the EN input is open (inactive, high).
SI2: Drive is enabled when the EN input is closed (active, low).
SI3: The EN input is not used for Enable and can be used as a general purpose input. SI will be automatically
set to 3 if CM is set to 13, 14, 17, or 18, or if AI is set to 1 or 2 after the SI command is set.
STM24-SF/QF
Drives with Flex I/O allow a second parameter which allows the user to specify the I/O point used. Before an I/O
point can be used as the Drive Enable input it must first be configured as an input with the SD command. See the
STM24 Hardware Manual for details of which inputs may be used as the Drive Enable input.
Possible uses for the SI command on the STM24 are as follows (‘n’ denotes the I/O point to be used):
SI1n: Drive is enabled when the designated input is open (inactive, high).
SI2n: Drive is enabled when the designated input is closed (active, low).
SI3n: The specified input (‘n’) is not used for Drive Enable and may be used as a general purpose input.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
190
Host Command Reference
STAC5-S, SVAC3-S
Defines the X3 input as an Enable Input. If you want to use the X3 input as an Enable input you can define it as
such in two ways, with the ST Configurator software, or with the SI command. SI takes no effect if the drive is set
in Command Mode (CM) 13, 14, 17 or 18, because these modes use the X3 input as a speed change input and
take precedence over the SI command. Also, setting the AI command after setting the SI command reassigns
the X3 input to Alarm Reset usage and turns off any drive enable usage (SI3). In other words, the AI and SI
com¬mands, as well as Command Modes (CM) 13, 14, 17 and 18 each assign a usage to the X3 input. Each of
these must exclusively use the X3 input.
There are three Enable input states that can be defined with the SI command:
SI1: Drive is enabled when the X3 input is open (inactive, high).
SI2: Drive is enabled when the X3 input is closed (active, low).
SI3: The X3 input is not used for Enable and can be used as a general purpose input. SI will be automatically
set to 3 if CM is set to 13, 14, 17, or 18, or if AI is set to 1 or 2 after the SI command is set.
Command Details:
Structure
SI{Parameter #1} {Parameter #2 (Flex I/O only)}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Input Usage
- units
integer code
- range
1 - 3 or 1 - 5 (see above)
Parameter #2 (Flex I/O only)
I/O Point (if applicable, see note below)
- units
Integer Code
- range
1 or 3 (See STM24 Hardware Manual for details)
NOTES:
• For drives with Flex I/O, the SD command must be executed to set an I/O point as an input or output before it
can have a dedicated function assigned to it.
• Parameter #2 only applies to drives equipped with Flex I/O. This includes the STM24SFand STM24QF.
Parameter #2 is not defined for drives equipped with standard I/O.
Examples:
All drives with standard I/O:
Command
Drive sends
SI1
-
SISI=1
Notes
Cause drive to be enabled when X3 / EN input is open
Drives with Flex I/O:
Command
Drive sends
SD3I
-
SI13
-
SISI=13
Notes
Configures I/O 3 as input (see SD command for details)
Cause drive to be enabled when Input 3 is open
191
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
SJ - Stop Jogging
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
CJ command
See Also:
JA, CJ, ST, SK, SM commands
Stops the motor when jogging (CJ starts jogging). Jog decel rate is defined by the JA command.
Command Details:
Structure
SJ
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
SJ
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
command
Notes
Stops jogging immediately using the deceleration rate set by the JA
192
Host Command Reference
SK - Stop & Kill
Compatibility: All drives
See Also:
AM, DE, JA, ST, SM commands
Halts any buffered command in progress and removes any other buffered commands from the queue. When used
to stop a move deceleration rate is controlled by the AM (Max Acceleration) parameter. If the “D” parameter is
used deceleration rate is controlled by either DE (with “Feed” moves like FL, FP, SH) or JA (when jogging).
Command Details:
Structure
SK{Parameter #1}
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Deceleration rate
- units
letter
- range
D = deceleration rate set by DE or JA command
no parameter = deceleration rate set by AM command
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
SK
-
SKD
-
Notes
Stop motion immediately using the deceleration rate set by the
AM command and erase the contents of the queue
Stop motion immediately using the deceleration rate set by the
DE command (or JA if jogging) and erase the contents of the queue
193
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
SM - Stop Move
Compatibility: Q drives only
See also:
AM, DE, JL, SK, ST, QK commands
Stops any type of move in progress* such as FL or CJ. This command acts like the ST (Stop) command except it
will not stop a wait operation (like WD, WI, WP, or WT) and it can be part of a stored Q program. The contents of
the queue are not affected by the SM command
* = Exception: SH
NOTE: Requires Multi-Tasking to be enabled (MT1). By default Motion-Tasking is disabled, which means the
current move must complete before any subsequent buffered command (such as SM) can execute. With MultiTasking enabled, subsequent commands may be processed while a move is in progress and the SM command
will execute properly.
Command Details:
Structure
SM(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Deceleration rate
- units
letter
- range
D = deceleration rate set by DE command or JL command
(if jogging)
M = deceleration rate set by AM command
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
SMD
-
Notes
Stop motion immediately using the deceleration rate set by the DE
command or the JL command (if jogging)
SMM
-
Stop motion immediately using the deceleration rate set by the AM
command
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
194
Host Command Reference
SO - Set Output
Compatibility: All drives
See Also:
IL, IH, IO commands
Sets an output to the given condition. Care must be taken when using outputs on the main driver board because
those outputs are by default programmed for dedicated purposes (Alarm, Brake, Motion). Use the AO, BO and
MO commands to reconfigure main driver board output usage to general purpose before using the SO command
with those outputs.
Command Details:
Structure
SO(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
SO1L
SO2H
Drive sends
-
-
Notes
Set output 1 low (closed)
Set output 2 high (open)
SOY1L
SOY2H
-
-
Set main driver board output 1 low (closed)
Set main driver board output 2 high (open)
195
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
SP - Set Position
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
FP commands
See Also:
EP, FP commands
Sets or requests the motor’s absolute position. To ensure that the internal position counter resets properly, use
EP immediately prior to sending SP. For example, to set the position to zero after a homing routine, send EP0
immediately followed by SP0.
Command Details:
Structure
SP{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Absolute position
- units
encoder counts
- range
+/- 2,147,483,647
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
SP100
-
SPSP=100
Notes
Set absolute position offset to 100 encoder counts
EP0
SP0
(Step 1) reset internal position counter
(Step 2) reset internal position counter
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
-
-
196
Host Command Reference
SS - Send String
Compatibility: All drives with RS-232 communication
Instructs drive to respond with the desired character string (up to 4 characters). This command is useful for letting
the host system know via the serial port when a sequence of commands has finished executing. Multiple SS
commands can be placed into the queue at any time, though care should be taken when using this command
to avoid serial data collisions. For example, the host system should avoid sending commands to the drive while
expecting a character string (from a previously buffered SS command).
NOTE: Due to the possibility of data collisions related to unscheduled communication from slave devices, this
command is nonfunctional for RS-485 drives.
Command Details:
Structure
SS(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
String of characters
- units
any printable characters
- range
up to 4 characters
Examples:
Command
SSdone
Drive sends
done
Notes
String “done” sent when SS command is executed
197
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
ST - Stop
Compatibility: All drives
See Also:
SK, SM commands
Halts the current buffered command being executed, but does not affect other buffered commands in the
command buffer. When used to stop a move deceleration rate is controlled by the AM (Max Acceleration)
command. If a “D” parameter is used deceleration rate is controlled by either the DE command (with “Feed” moves
like FL, FP, and SH) or the JL* command (when jogging).
*Note that setting the JA command also sets the JL command. If distinct JA and JL values are required always
set JL after setting JA.
Command Details:
Structure
ST{Parameter #1}
Type
IMMEDIATE
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Deceleration rate
- units
letter
- range
D = deceleration rate set by DE or JA command
no parameter = deceleration rate set by AM command
Examples:
Command
ST
STD
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
command
-
JA command
Notes
Stop motion immediately using the deceleration rate set by the AM
Stop motion immediately using the deceleration rate set by the DE or
198
Host Command Reference
TD - Transmit Delay
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
RS-232 & RS-485 Serial Communications
See Also:
BR, PB & PR commands
Sets or requests the time delay used by the drive when responding to a command that requests a response.
Typically this is needed when using the 2-wire RS-485 interface (Half-duplex). Because the same wires are used
for both receive and transmit a time delay is usually needed to allow transition time. The Host device’s RS-485
specification must be understood to determine the time delay needed.
Command Details:
Structure
TD{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Time value
- units
milliseconds
- range
0 - 32767
- default
10
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
TD10
-
TDTD=10
Notes
Set Tx time delay to 10 milliseconds
199
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
TI - Test Input
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
Condition Code
See also:
QJ, TR commands
Tests a digital or analog input against the given input state. If the input is in the state the condition code is set to
“T” (true). If not the condition code is set to “F” (false). The condition code is found in read-only register ‘h’ and is
most commonly used in conditional jump (QJ) commands. The input is tested, and the jump is performed only if
that input is in a specific state.
Command Details:
Structure
TI(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
TI4L
QJT15
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
-
Notes
Test input 4 for a low state
Jump to line 15 if the previously tested input is “True”
200
Host Command Reference
TR - Test Register
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
All data registers
See also:
CR, TI, RI, RD, RM, RL, QJ commands
Tests a data register against a given data value. The result of the test is the setting of the condition code, which
can be used for conditional programming (see QJ command).
All conditions codes can be set by this command. See “QJ” command for more details.
Command Details:
Structure
TR(Parameter #1)(Parameter #2)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
All data registers
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Data register
- units
data register assignment
- range
All data registers
Parameter #2
Test value
- units
integer
- range
+/- 2,147,483,647 (long data registers)
+/- 32,767 (short data registers)
Examples:
Command
TR15
Drive sends
-
Notes
Test user-defined register “1” against the value 5
201
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
TS - Time Stamp
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
Data Register “W”
See also:
RC, WD, All register commands
Transfers the oldest Time Stamp value from the time stamp buffer into the “W” data register. The time stamp value
is a time value in milliseconds, recorded between two input triggers when using the RC command. Each time a
defined input condition is “True” (triggered), the elapsed time from the previous input is stored in the time stamp
buffer. The time stamp buffer is 8 words deep and acts as a FIFO buffer. The “I” data register, used by the RC
command, records when an input trigger has occurred. Sending the RC command clears the time stamp buffer.
Executing the TS command removes the oldest time value from the time stamp buffer and places it in the “W”
Data Register where it can be used. With each execution of the TS command a time value is transferred, until the
end of the time stamp buffer is reached. If a TS is sent with no time values in the time stamp buffer a “0” is placed
in the “W” data register.
Command Details:
Structure
TS
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
“W” (039)
Units
milliseconds
Example:
This sample Q program illustrates the interaction of the RC and TS commands. After initialization, the program
waits for a falling edge event on input X3, at which point a 5 second timer begins counting down. During this
delay, the user may trigger X3 an arbitrary number of times. After 5 seconds, the motor will execute a series
of 5000-step moves, with the delay between each corresponding to the delay between switch closures on X3.
That is, if the user trips X3 four times waiting 1 second between each event, the motor will execute four 5000step moves with a 1 second dwell between each.
LABEL2
LABEL1
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
MT
1
EG
20000
AC
250
DE
250
VE
5
FI
3
200
RX I
0
RC X3F
WI
X3F
WT 5.00
TS
RD I
FL
5000
TR I
1
QJ
L
#LABEL1
TS
RM W
1
WD 1
QG #LABEL2
NO
Multi-tasking ON
20,000 steps/rev
Filter input 3 for 200 processor ticks
Zero the “I” register
Setup the “I” register for input X3
Wait for input X3
Wait 5 seconds >>> trigger inpuxt X3 a few times
Throw away first time stamp
Decrement “I” register
Feed 5000 steps
Test “I” against 1
Jump to end if “I” less than 1
Time stamp
Move “W” into “1”
Delay for “1” milliseconds
Go to Label 2
Stop program
202
Host Command Reference
VC - Velocity Change
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
FC, FD commands
Sets or requests the “change speed” for FC and FD moves..
Command Details:
Structure
VC{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
“U” (037)
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Move velocity
- units
rev/sec
- range
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si, ST-S: 0.0042 - 133.3333
(resolution is 0.0042)
STM: 0.0042 - 80.0000 (resolution is 0.0042)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
VC5
-
VCVC=5
Notes
Set change velocity to 5 rev/sec
203
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
VE - Velocity
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
FC, FD, FE, FL, FM, FS, FP, FY, SH commands
Sets or requests shaft speed for point-to-point move commands like FL, FP, FS, FD, SH, etc.
Command Details:
Structure
VE{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
“V” (038)
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Move velocity
- units
rev/sec
- range
BLu, STAC6, : 0.0042 - 133.3333 (resolution is 0.0042)
SV: 0.0042 - 136 (resolution is 0.0042)
ST-Q/Si, ST-S , STM, STAC5: 0.0042 - 80.0000 (resolution
is 0.0042)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
VE2.525
-
VEVE=2.525
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set move velocity to 2.525 rev/sec
204
Host Command Reference
VI - Velocity Integrator Constant
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Affects:
Jog commands
See also:
VP & JM commands
Sets or requests the velocity-mode (“JM2”) servo control integrator gain term. Gain value is relative: 0 = no gain,
32767 = full gain. VI minimizes steady state velocity errors.
Command Details:
Structure
VI{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Velocity integrator gain value
- units
integer (no specific units)
- range
0 - 32767 (0% - 100%)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
VI5000
-
VIVI=5000
Notes
Set velocity integrator gain to 5000
205
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
VM - Maximum Velocity
Compatibility: Servo drives
Affects:
Analog Velocity mode
See Also:
AM, VC, VE commands
Sets or requests the maximum motor velocity in rev/sec. Used in analog velocity mode to limit the maximum
speed of the drive.
Command Details:
Structure
VM{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
YES
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
BLu, SV
Parameter #1
Move velocity
- units
rev/sec (rps)
- range
0.0042 - 133.3333 (resolution is 0.0042 rev/sec)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
VM50
-
VMVM=50
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Notes
Set maximum move velocity to 50 rev/sec
206
Host Command Reference
VP - Velocity Mode Proportional Constant
Compatibility: Servo drives only
Affects:
Jog commands
See also:
VI & JM commands
Sets or requests the velocity-mode servo control Proportional gain term. Gain value is relative: 0 = no gain, 32767
= full gain. VP minimizes velocity error when in velocity mode 2 (see JM command).
Command Details:
Structure
VP{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Velocity mode proportional gain
- units
integer
- range
0 - 32767 (0% - 100%)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
VP5000
-
VPVP=5000
Notes
Set velocity mode proportional gain to 5000
207
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
WD - Wait Delay
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:None
See also:
WI, RX commands
Causes a time delay to occur using a time value from a given data register. The resolution is in milliseconds. Only
up to 15 bits of the data register are used, giving a maximum wait time of 32 seconds.
Command Details:
Structure
WD(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Data register
- units
data register assignment
- range
All Read/Write and User-Defined data registers
Examples:
Command
WD5
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
Notes
-
Wait the number of milliseconds indicated by the value in userdefined data register “5”
208
Host Command Reference
WI - Wait for Input
Compatibility: All drives
Affects:
Use of “Jog” Inputs
See Also:
FI, JE, JD, WD, WM, TI commands
Waits for an input to reach the given condition. Allows very precise triggering of moves if a WI command is
followed by a move command. When JE (Jog Enable) is active the drive’s “jog” inputs can be used to jog the
motor. JD disables jogging using inputs. (See your drive’s User’s Manual for designation of “jog” inputs).
Command Details:
Structure
WI(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
(See Appendix F: Working With Inputs and Outputs)
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
WI3R
-
Notes
Wait for input 3 to go high (rising edge) before proceeding to the next
command in the queue
209
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
WM - Wait on Move
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
Queue execution
See also:
MT
When in multi-tasking is turned on (see MT command) this command will block execution of subsequent
commands until the previously initiated move is complete. This can be any type of move such as “Feeds”,
“Jogging” or the “Hand Wheel” (encoder following).
Command Details:
Structure
WM
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
WM
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
complete
Notes
Causes queue execution to wait until any move in progress is
210
Host Command Reference
WP - Wait Position
Compatibility: Q drives only
Affects:
Multi-velocity, or complex, move profiles
See Also:
FC, DC, VC, MT commands
When multi-tasking is turned on (“MT1”), this command is used in conjunction with the DC command to block
program execution until a specific position(s) is reached during a move. When the position(s) specified by the DC
command is reached program execution continues.
Common example:
This command is used as a “separator” in changing the motor speed of multi-velocity move profiles created using
the FC command. The normal FC command provides for one speed change using values determined by DC
and VC commands executed prior to the FC command. Additional speed changes can be added after an FC
command is initiated by using the WP command to separate additional DC and VC commands. See the example
below.
NOTE: This command, along with the ability to create multi-velocity move profiles with the FC command, is only
available in BLu servo drive firmware revisions 1.53C or later. This command is available in all firmware revisions
of STAC stepper drives.
Command Details:
Structure
WP
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
No
Register Access
None
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
DI100000
-
VE10
-
DC80000
-
VC15
-
FC
-
WP-
DC60000
-
VC9
-
WPDC40000
-
VC1
-
WP-
DC20000
-
VC19
-
Notes
Overall move distance set to 100,000 counts
Initial move speed set to 10 rps
1st change distance set to 80,000 counts
1st change speed set to 15 rps
Initiate FC command (complex move)
2nd change distance set to 60,000 counts
2nd change speed set to 9 rps
3rd change distance set to 40,000 counts
3rd change speed set to 1 rps
4th change distance set to 20,000 counts
4th change speed set to 19 rps
211
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
WT - Wait Time
Compatibility: All drives
Causes a time delay in seconds. The resolution is 0.01 seconds with the largest value being 320.00 seconds.
Command Details:
Structure
WT(Parameter #1)
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
WRITE ONLY
Non-Volatile
NO
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Time
- units
seconds
- range
0.00 - 320.00 (resolution is 0.01 seconds)
Examples:
Command
WT2.25
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
Notes
Causes time delay of 2.25 seconds
212
Host Command Reference
ZC - Regen Resistor Continuous Wattage
Compatibility: BLuAC5 and STAC6 drives only
Sets or requests the regeneration resistor wattage value. BLuAC and STAC drives dynamically calculate the
continuous wattage induced into an external regeneration resistor and must know the continuous wattage rating of
the regen resistor to do this effectively.
Command Details:
Structure
ZC{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Continuous wattage value of regen resistor
- units
Watts
- range
1 - 1000
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
ZC250
-
Notes
External regen resistor with value of 250 continuous watts is
connected to the drive
213
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
ZR - Regen Resistor Value
Compatibility: BLuAC5 and STAC6 drives only
Sets or requests the regeneration resistor value. BLuAC and STAC drives dynamically calculate the continuous
wattage induced into an external regeneration resistor and must know the value of the regen resistor to do this
effectively.
Command Details:
Structure
ZR{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Value of regen resistor
- units
Ohms
- range
25 - 100
Examples:
Command
ZR50
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive sends
-
Notes
50 ohm external regen resistor connected to drive
214
Host Command Reference
ZT - Regen Resistor Peak Time
Compatibility: BLuAC5 and STAC6 drives only
Sets or requests the regeneration resistor time constant. Decides the peak time that the resistor can tolerate full
regeneration voltage. When regeneration occurs the full regeneration voltage of 400 volts is applied across the
resistor. The peak wattage is typically very high, for example with the built-in 40 ohm resistor the peak wattage is
4000 Watts. Power resistors will tolerate this for only a brief period of time. In the case of the built-in 40 ohm/ 50
Watt regen resistor it is only 0.3125 seconds. The ZT value provides the resistor time constant used to create the
“filter” for calculating average wattage in the regen resistor.
Command Details:
Structure
ZT{Parameter #1}
Type
BUFFERED
Usage
READ/WRITE
Non-Volatile
Yes
Register Access
None
Parameter Details:
Parameter #1
Maximum time for peak regen
- units
0.25 milliseconds
- range
1 - 32000
Examples:
Command
Drive sends
ZT1250
-
ZTZT=1250
Notes
Regen resistor peak time set to 0.3125 seconds
215
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Data Registers
Many of the commands listed in this reference function by transferring data to a drive for later use. These
data values are stored in data registers within the drive and remain there until new commands change the
values or power is removed from the drive. For example, if you send the Velocity command “VE10”, a maximum
move speed of 10 rev/sec is placed in the data register for velocity. You can then execute as many FL (Feed to
Length), FP (Feed to Position) or FS (Feed to Sensor) move commands as you’d like without sending another VE
command: the move speed of 10 rev/sec will remain in the velocity data register until you change it.
In addition to the data register for velocity, there are registers for move acceleration (AC command, “A”
register), deceleration (DE command, “B” register) and move distance (DI command, “D” register). There are also
registers for limit sensors (DL command), motor current (CC command), encoder resolution (ER command), motor
position (SP command) and encoder position (EP command). There are 75 data registers in all. See the following
Data Register Assignments section for a complete listing of data registers available in your drive.
Not all commands function by transferring a data value into a register. Conversely, not all data registers are
associated with a command. To access data registers that are not associated with a command, you can use a
register’s unique character assignment. See the Data Register Assignments on the following pages for a listing of
data registers and their character assignments. When accessing a data register using its character assignment
you use the RL (Register Load Immediate) or RX (Register Load Buffered) commands. These commands allow
you to load data values into a register as well as read back the contents of a data register. For example, we set
the move speed to 10 rev/sec in the first paragraph of this page by using the velocity command “VE10”. You can
accomplish the same thing by using the RL command and the character assignment for the velocity data register,
“V”. By sending “RLV2400” to the drive (see units of “V” register in Data Register Assignments section) you set
the move speed to 10 rev/sec.
There are four categories of data registers available with your drive: Read-Only, Read/Write, User-Defined,
and Storage. The last two categories, User-Defined and Storage, are only for use with Q drives.
Read-Only data registers
Read-Only data registers are predefined registers that contain information about drive parameters,
settings, and states. These include registers for commanded current, encoder position, analog input levels, drive
temperature, internal bus voltage, and more. You cannot transfer data values to a Read-Only data register; you
can only read the contents of them (see RL and RX commands). Read-Only registers are assigned to lower-case
letters.
Read/Write data registers
Read/Write data registers are predefined registers that contain drive and move parameters that can be set
by the user. These parameters include acceleration rate, velocity, move distance, continuous current setting, peak
current setting, and more. Many of the Read/Write registers are associated with a particular command, so you
can read their contents or load data into them with RL, RX, or that parameter’s particular command. Read/Write
registers are assigned to upper-case letters.
User-Defined data registers
User-Defined data registers are read/write registers that are not predefined. These registers are only
used with Q drives. They allow you to create more flexible and powerful Q programs through math functions,
incrementing and decrementing, conditional processing, and more. These registers are assigned to single-digit
numbers and other ASCII characters.
Storage data registers
Each Q drive comes with 100 non-volatile Storage data registers, which can be used to save the contents
of other data registers to non-volatile memory. For example, since none of the User-Defined data registers are
non-volatile, a user may want to save the values of some of these registers to memory. This can be done by
transferring their values to Storage registers (called Writing) before power down of the drive. Then at the next
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
216
Host Command Reference
power up, these values can be loaded back into the User-Defined registers from the Storage registers (called
Reading). Each Storage register can save one data register value, and the Storage registers are numbered 1 to
100. See the RR, RW, and SA commands as well as the Appendix for more information on accessing this section
of memory.
Using Data Registers
The diagram below shows how a drive’s serial port accesses the different volatile (Read-Only, Read/Write,
User-Defined) and non-volatile (Storage) data registers within a drive. The user can Load and Upload data
register values using the RL, RX, and RU commands via the drive’s serial port(s). Read-Only data registers can
be uploaded but not loaded. For Q drives only, non-volatile memory is available for data registers in the form
of Storage registers. Moving the contents of the volatile data registers back and forth between the non-volatile
Storage registers is done with the RW and RR commands. See below for more details.
Loading (RL, RX)
Accessing data registers is done by Loading data into a register, and Uploading data from a register.
Loading a data register can be done from a host command line or from a line in a program. To load a register
from a host command line use the RL (Register Load) command. This command can be executed at any time,
even while a drive is running a program. The RL command is an immediate command. To load a register within a
Q program use the RX command, which is a buffered version of Register Load.
217
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Uploading (RL, RU)
Uploading data registers can only be done from a host command line, not within a program. There are
two commands available for uploading register values. RL is used to upload one register value at a time, while
RU can be used to upload a single register value or an array of register values. Both RL and RU are immediate
commands, and therefore can be executed while a program is running. The RU command can request up to 10
data register values in sequence back from the drive. This is great when an array of information is required at one
time.
Writing Storage registers (RW) (Q drives only)
Writing a data register allows the user to store data register values in non-volatile memory. To write a data
register we use the RW (Register Write) command. There are 100 storage locations for data registers in NV
memory. Note that the user must keep track of where data registers are stored because the NV memory locations
are not associated with any specific data register.
Reading Storage registers (RR) (Q drives only)
Reading a data register allows the user to move data previously saved in NV memory into a data register.
To read a data register we use the RR (Register Read) command. Reading is typically done in the midst of a Q
program.
The following sub-sections describe additional usage of data registers within Q drives only.
Moving data registers (RM) (Q drives only)
Data register values can be moved from one register to another. This is done with the RM (Register Move)
command. When executing an RM command, the contents of the originating data register are retained. Contents
of read-only registers can be moved into read/write registers and user-defined registers. However, as implied by
its label, no register values can be moved into read-only registers. Attempting to do so will have no effect and no
error code is generated.
Incrementing/Decrementing (RI, RD) (Q drives only)
Read/write and user-defined registers can be incremented and decrmented by “1”. Two commands are used
for these functions: the RI (Register Increment) and RD (Register Decrement) command. NOTE: Incrementing
past the range of a data register will cause the value to wrap around.
Counting (RC, “I” register) (Q drives only)
A special data register, the “I” register (Input Counter), is designated for counting input transitions and
input state times of a selected digital input. The “I” register is a read/write register that can be used with all other
register functions including math and conditional testing.
The RC (Register Counter) command is used to assign digital inputs to register counting. There are four
different input states that can be chosen and that have different effects on input counting. When using the “high”
or “low” level states the counter acts as a “timer” with a resolution of 100 microseconds (SV servo drives and all
stepper drives) or 125 microseconds (BLu servo drives). Edge type states like “falling” or ‘”rising” are used for
input counting. (See details of the RC command in the Q Command Reference).
Math & Logic (R+, R-, R*, R/, R&, R|) (Q drives only)
Math and logic functions can be performed on data registers. Math is limited to integer values. Some of the
math functions are also limited to 16-bit values. When doing math only one operation can be done per instruction.
Math and logic results are stored in the Accumulator register, “0”. This register is part of the user-defined register
set. Math functions include Add, Subtract, Multiply and Divide. Logic functions include Logical AND and Logical
OR.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
218
Host Command Reference
Conditional Testing (CR, TR) (Q drives only)
When constructing complex programs it is usually necessary to do some conditional processing to affect
program flow. Two commands are available for evaluating a data register for conditional processing, the TR (Test
Register) and CR (Compare Register) commands. The TR command will compare the “First” value of a given
data register against a “Second” immediate value. The CR command compares the “First” value of a given data
register against the “Second” value of another data register. When using the TR and CR commands an internal
“Condition” register is set with the result. The result can be:
“True”
the “First” value is either positive or negative
“False”
the “First” value is not a value (it’s zero)
“Zero”
the “First” value equals “0”
“Positive”
the “First” value is “positive”
“Negative”
the “First” value is “negative”
“Greater Than”
the “First” value is more positive than the “Second” value
“Less Than”
the “First” value is more negative than the “Second” value
“Equal to”
the “First” and “Second” values are equal
“Unequal to”
the “First” and “Second’ values are not equal
NOTE: The QJ (Queue Jump) command is designed to use the “Condition Codes” above for jumping. The
Condition Code can also be accessed via the “h” register.
Data Register Assignments
What follows is a listing of all the data registers available with Applied Motion drives. In the tables below,
“Ch.” denotes the data register’s character assignment, and “Description” gives the name of the data register. The
column “3-digit” denotes the register’s 3-digit equivalent numerical assignment (see PR command, bit 5); “Data
Type” designates whether the data register is a 16-bit word (Short) or a 32-bit word (Long); “Units” shows how a
data register’s contents are used by the drive; and, “Compatibility” shows which drives can make use of the given
register.
NOTE: When programming a Q drive with the Q Programmer software only the character assignment
of the register can be used. When communicating to a Q drive via one of its serial ports, either the character
assignment or the 3-digit numerical assignment can be used.
Read-Only data registers: a - z
Many of the Read-Only data registers can be read with a specific command. In the tables below, associated
commands are shown in parentheses in the “Description” column.
Ch. Description
a
Analog Command value (IA)
3-digit
049
Data Type
Units
Compatibility
Short
BLu, SV, STAC6, ST-Q/Si:
32760 = +10V; -32760 = -10V
ST-S, STM:
16383 = +5V; 0 = 0V*
All drives
*Note that the “a” register is affected by the AV (Analog Offset) command, so the range may vary beyond 0
to 16383.
b
Queue Line Number
050
Short
Line # 1 - 62
219
Q drives only
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
c
Current Command (IC)
051
Short
Servo: 0.01 amps RMS
Stepper: 0.01 amps, peak-ofsine
All drives
d
Relative Distance (ID)
052
Long
Servo: encoder counts
Stepper: steps
All drives
BLu, STAC6
The “d” register (as well as the ID command) contains the relative move distance used in the last move.
This means that the “d” register is only updated at the end of every relative move.
SV, ST-Q/Si, ST-S, STM
The “d” register (as well as the ID command) contains the immediate relative distance moved since the
start of the last or current relative move. This means the “d” register is updated during relative moves and
can therefore be polled during a move to see where the motor is with respect to the overall relative move
distance.
e
Encoder Position (IE, EP)
053
Long
encoder counts
Servo drives and
stepper drives with
encoders
The “e” register can be zeroed by sending the command EP0.
f
Alarm Code (AL)
054
Long
hexadecimal equivalent of
binary Alarm Code word
(See AL command for details)
All drives
g
Sensor Position
055
Short
Servo: encoder counts
Stepper: steps
All drives
The “g” register contains the absolute position of the point at which the input condition is met during moves
like FS, FE, SH, and other “sensor-type” moves. It is common practice to use the EP and SP commands
to establish known absolute positions within an application or program, which will make the value of the “g”
register most meaningful. Otherwise, the absolute position of the motor is zeroed at every power-up of the
drive.
h
Condition Code
056
Short
decimal equivalent of binary
word (see below)
Q drives only
The response to the “RLh” command will be the decimal equivalent of the condition code’s binary word. Bit
assignments and examples are shown below.
Description
Bit #
TRUE (non-zero)
0
FALSE (zero)
1
POSITIVE2
NEGATIVE3
GREATER THAN
4
LESS THAN
5
EQUAL TO
6
UNEQUAL TO
7
Decimal Value
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Example:
Command
Drive Sends
RLh
RLh=149
Notes
Bits 7 (UNEQUAL TO), 4 (GREATER THAN), 2
(POSITIVE) and 0 (TRUE) are set. Within a Q program
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
220
Host Command Reference
Driver Board Inputs (IS)
057
Short
decimal equivalent of binary
bit pattern (see below)
All drives
Details when executing the “RLi” command:
BLu, STAC6
The bit pattern of the “i” register breaks down as follows: bit 0 is the state of the encoder’s index (Z) channel,
also known as input X0; bits 1 - 7 represent the states of driver board inputs X1 - X7, respectively; bits 8 - 10
represent the states of driver board outputs Y1 - Y3, respectively; and, bits 11 - 15 are not used. For bits
0 - 7 (inputs X0 - X7), a state of “1” means the optically isolated input is open, and a state of “0” means the
input is closed. It is the exact opposite for bits 8 - 10 (outputs Y1 - Y3), for which a state of “1” means the
optically isolated output is closed, and a state of “0” means the output is open.
SV, ST-Q/Si
The bit pattern of the “i” register breaks down as follows: bits 0 - 7 represent inputs X1 - X8, respectively;
bits 8 - 11 represent outputs Y1 - Y4, respectively; and, bit 12 is the encoder index channel (if present). For
bits 0 - 7 and 12 (inputs X1 - X8 and the Index), a state of “1” means the optically isolated input is open, and
a state of “0” means the input is closed. It is the exact opposite for bits 8 - 11 (outputs Y1 - Y4), for which a
state of “1” means the optically isolated output is closed, and a state of “0” means the output is open.
in
p
ut
s
d
se
tu
no
ou
tp
u
ts
d
se
tu
no
tu
s
in ed
de
x
ST-S, STM
The bit pattern of the “i” register breaks down as follows: bit 0 represents the encoder index channel (if
present), bit 1 represents the STEP input, bit 2 the DIR input, and bit 3 the EN input. Bit 8 represents
the drive’s single output, OUT. For bits 0 - 3 (Index, STEP, DIR, and EN inputs), a state of “1” means the
optically isolated input is open, and a state of “0” means the input is closed.
no
i
the programmer will often have more than one condition to
choose from when using the QJ command. The condition
FALSE in Q Programmer is represented by bit 0 = 0
(opposite of TRUE).
X X X X X X Y2 Y1 X X X X X4 X3 X2 X1
0 0 0000 0 0 00 00 0 0 0 0
221
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
SVAC3, STAC5
The bit pattern of the “i” register breaks down as follows: bits 0-3 represent inputs X1-X4, respectively;
bits 8 and 9 represent outputs Y1 and Y2, and bit 14 represents the encoder index channel (if present).
represents the STEP input, bit 2 the DIR input, and bit 3 the EN input. Bit 8 represents the drive’s single
output, OUT. For bits 0-3 and 14 (X1-X4 and the Index), a state of “1” means the optically isolated input is
open, and a state of “0” means the input is closed.
j
Analog Input 1 (IA1)
058
Short
raw ADC counts, 0 - 32760
16383 = 0 volts for BLu, SV,
STAC6, ST-Q/Si drives
All drives
k
Analog Input 2 (IA2)
059
Short
raw ADC counts, 0 - 32760
16383 = 0 volts
BLu, SV, STAC6,
ST-Q/Si only
l
Immediate Absolute Position
060
Long
Encoder counts (servo), or
motor steps (stepper).
All drives
m
Command Mode (CM)
061
Short
Mode #
All drives
n
Velocity Move State
062
Short
State # (see below)
All drives
Response details to the “RLn” command:
Description
Decimal Value
WAITING
0
RUNNING
1
FAST STOPPING
2
STOPPING
3
ENDING
4
o
Point-to-Point Move State
063
Short
Comment
In velocity mode waiting for a command
Doing a velocity move (jogging)
Stopping a velocity move (ST or SK with no parameter)
Stopping a velocity move (SJ, STD, or SKD)
Clean up at end of move (1 PWM cycle, 62 usec)
State # (see below)
All drives
NOTE: The Point-to-Point Move State is only defined during FL, FP, and FS commands.
Details when using “RLo” command:
Description
Decimal Value
WAITING
0
WAITING ON BRAKE
1
CALCULATING
2
ACCELERATION
3
CHANGE VELOCITY
4
AT_VELOCITY
5
DECELERATION
6
FAST DECELERATION
7
POSITIONING
8
Comment
In position mode waiting for command
Waiting for brake to release
Doing the calculations for the move
Accelerating up to speed
Changing the speed (accel or decel)
At the desired speed
Decelerating to a stop
Doing a fast deceleration (ST or SK)
Clean up at end of move (1 PWM cycle, 62 usec)
p
Segment Number
064
Short
Segment # 1 - 12
Q drives only
q
Actual Motor Current (IQ)
065
Short
0.01 Amps
Servo drives only
r
Average Clamp Power
066
Short
Watts
BLuAC5, STAC6
s
Status Code (SC)
067
Short
hexadecimal equivalent of
binary Status Code word
(See SC command for details)
All drives
t
Drive Temperature (IT)
068
Short
0.1 oC
All drives
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
222
Host Command Reference
u
Bus Voltage (IU)
069
Short
0.1 Volts
All drives
v
Actual Velocity (IV0)
070
Short
0.25 rpm
Servo drives and
stepper drives with
encoder
w
Target Velocity (IV1)
071
Short
0.25 rpm
All drives*
*For stepper drives, the “w” register is only updated when Stall Detection or Stall Prevention is turned on.
x
Position Error (IX)
072
Long
encoder counts
Servo drives and
stepper drives with
encoder
y
Expanded Inputs (IS)
073
Short
bit pattern
BLu, STAC6
Details when executing the “RLy” command:
BLu, STAC6, SVAC3 and STAC5 drives
The bit pattern of the “y” register breaks down as follows: bits 0 - 7 represent the states of top board inputs 1
- 8, respectively; bits 8 - 11 represent the states of driver board outputs 1 - 4, respectively; and, bits 12 - 15
are not used. For all I/O bits 0 - 11 (inputs 1 - 8 and outputs 1 - 4), a state of “1” means the optically isolated
input or output is open, and a state of “0” means the input or output is closed. Bit 15 represents the ID bit,
which simply holds a 1 if the IN/OUT2 or screw terminal I/O board is present and a 0 of it’s not. In other
words, for SE, QE and Si drives the ID bit will equal 1. For S and Q drives the ID bit will equal 0.
For example, if top board inputs 3 and 5 and top board outputs 1 and 2 were all closed, the response of the
drive to the command “RLi” would be “RLi=-29461” (1000 1100 1110 1011). For a more efficient use of the
“y” register it is recommended to mask off the ID bit and the other three not used bits. This can be done by
using the R& (Register AND) command with the “y” register and a User Defined register set with the value
4095 (0000 1111 1111 1111 1111). Following a register AND operation (&), this will reject the top 4 bits,
leaving the rest of the data untouched. For example, the command sequence would look like this.
RL14095
R&y1
RL0
z
Phase Error
Load User Defined register “1” with the value 4095
Register AND the “y” and “1” registers
Request the value stored in the Accumulator register “0” to which the
drive’s response would be RL0=3307.
074
Short
encoder counts
Servo drives only
Read/Write data registers: A - Z
Many of the Read/Write data registers are associated with a specific command. In the tables below,
associated commands are shown in parentheses in the “Description” column.
NOTE: When using registers pay attention to units. In the case of some Read/Write registers, the units of
the register when using the RL and RX command are different than when using the same register’s associated
command. For example, the “V” register uses units of 0.25 rpm, but its associated command, VE, uses revs/sec
(rps). The reason for this difference is that all registers operate with integer math. On the other hand, when using
223
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
commands it is often possible to include decimal places which allow for more user-friendly units.
Ch. Description
A
Acceleration (AC)
3-digit
Data Type
Units
Compatibility
017
Short
10 rpm/sec
All drives
The “A” register units are 10 rpm/sec, which means that the value of the “A” register is equal to 6 times the
AC command value. In other words, to achieve an acceleration value of 100 rev/sec/sec send the command
RLA600.
NOTE: Take care to ensure that this register is never set to zero. The drive may become stuck in a command
mode or program loop and/or refuse to move. See the RL, RM, and RX commands.
B
Deceleration (DE)
018
Short
10 rpm/sec
All drives
The “B” register units are 10 rpm/sec, which means that the value of the “B” register is equal to 6 times the
DE command value. In other words, to achieve a deceleration value of 100 rev/sec/sec send the command
RLB600.
NOTE: Take care to ensure that this register is never set to zero. The drive may become stuck in a command
mode or program loop and/or refuse to move. See the RL, RM, and RX commands.
C
Change Distance (DC)
019
Long
counts
All drives
D
Distance (DI)
020
Long
counts
All drives
E
Position Offset
021
Long
counts
Drives with encoder
feedback option
The “E” register contains the difference between the encoder count and the motor position. This value
is most useful with servo drives (Blu / SV) where the resolution of the motor and encoder are the same,
and this offset can be useful when working with absolute positions. The register contains the difference in
counts between the “e” register and the value set by the “SP” command.
F
Other Flags
022
Long
bit pattern (see below)
All drives
BLu
The value of the “F” register is a hexadecimal sum of various drive states, as shown below.
Description
Hex Value
Decimal Value
DISTANCE LIMIT FLAG
0x0001
1
SENSOR FOUND FLAG
0x0002
2
LOWSIDE OVERCURRENT
0x0004
4
HIGHSIDE OVERCURRENT
0x0008
8
Clear flags by sending “RLF0” to the drive.
SV
The value of the “F” register is a hexadecimal sum of various drive states, as shown below.
Description
Hex Value
Decimal Value
DISTANCE LIMIT FLAG
0x0001
1
SENSOR FOUND FLAG
0x0002
2
LOWSIDE OVERCURRENT
0x0004
4
HIGHSIDE OVERCURRENT
0x0008
8
OVER CURRENT READING
0x0010
16
BAD CURRENT OFFSET - Phase A
0x0020
32
BAD CURRENT OFFSET - Phase B
0x0040
64
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
224
Host Command Reference
BAD FLASH ERASE
0x4000
BAD FLASH SAVE
0x8000
Clear flags by sending “RLF0” to the drive.
16384
32768
STAC6
The value of the “F” register is a hexadecimal sum of various drive states, as shown below.
Description
Hex Value
Decimal Value
DISTANCE LIMIT FLAG
0x0001
1
SENSOR FOUND FLAG
0x0002
2
HARDWARE OVERCURRENT
0x0004
4
SOFTWARE OVERCURRENT
0x0008
8
BAD CURRENT OFFSET - Phase A
0x0010
16
BAD CURRENT OFFSET - Phase B
0x0020
32
OPEN WINDING - Phase A
0x0040
64
OPEN WINDING - Phase B
0x0080
128
Clear flags by sending “RLF0” to the drive.
ST-Q/Si, ST-S, STM
The value of the “F” register is a hexadecimal sum of various drive states, as shown below.
Description
Hex Value
Decimal Value
DISTANCE LIMIT FLAG
0x0001
1
SENSOR FOUND FLAG
0x0002
2
LOWSIDE OVERCURRENT
0x0004
4
HIGHSIDE OVERCURRENT
0x0008
8
OVER CURRENT READING
0x0010
16
BAD CURRENT OFFSET - Phase A
0x0020
32
BAD CURRENT OFFSET - Phase B
0x0040
64
OPEN WINDING - Phase A
0x0080
128
OPEN WINDING - Phase B
0x0100
256
LOGIC SUPPLY
0x0200
512
GATE SUPPLY
0x0400
1024
BAD FLASH ERASE
0x4000
16384
BAD FLASH SAVE
0x8000
32768
Clear flags by sending “RLF0” to the drive.
G
Current Command (GC)
023
Short
0.01 Amps
Servo drives only
H
Analog Velocity Gain
024
Short
+/- 32767 ADC counts
BLu servo drives only
The “H” register in BLu servo drives is similar to the AG command in all other drives. The “H” register is
used to set the motor speed at a given DC voltage in analog velocity mode. It is recommended to make
this setting in Quick Tuner, where it is labeled Speed in rev/sec at xx Volts, under the Velocity > Analog
Operating Mode.
I
Input Counter
025
Long
counts per edge
Q drives only
J
Jog Velocity (JS)
026
Short
0.25 rpm
All drives
The “J” register units are 0.25 rpm, which means that the value of the “J” register is equal to 240 times the
JS command value. In other words, to achieve a jog speed value of 7 rev/sec send the command RLJ1680.
K
RESERVED
027
-
-
225
-
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
L
RESERVED
028
-
-
-
M
Max Velocity (VM, servo)
Accel/Decel Current (CA,
STM Integrated Stepper)
029
Short
Servo: 0.01 amps RMS
Stepper: 0.01 amps, peak-ofsine
Servo drives and STM
Integrated Steppers
N
Continuous Current (CC,
servo)
Running Current (CC,
stepper)
030
Short
Servo: 0.01 amps RMS
Stepper: 0.01 amps, peak-ofsine
All drives
O
Peak Current (CP, servo)
Idle Current (CI, stepper)
031
Short
Servo: 0.01 Amps RMS
Stepper: 0.01 amps, peak-ofsine
All drives
P
Absolute Position Command
032
Long
counts
All drives
Q
RESERVED
033
-
-
-
R
Steps per Rev*
034
Short
counts
All drives
* Note: R = EG for servo drives. R = EG/2 for stepper drives.
S
Pulse Counter
035
Long
counts
All drives
The “S” register counts pulses coming into the STEP/X1 and DIR/X2 inputs of the drive. This is particularly
useful when in Command Mode 7 (see CM command) or executing an FE (Follow Encoder) command. To
zero the “S” register send the command RLS0.
T
Total Count
036
Long
(see below)
Q drives only
The “T” register is automatically saved at power down and restored at power up.
U
Change Velocity (VC)
037
Short
0.25 rpm
All drives
The “U” register units are 0.25 rpm, which means that the value of the “U” register is equal to 240 times the
VC command value. In other words, to achieve a change velocity value of 7 rev/sec send the command
RLU1680.
V
Velocity (VE)
038
Short
0.25 rpm
All drives
The “V” register units are 0.25 rpm, which means that the value of the “V” register is equal to 240 times the
VE command value. In other words, to achieve a velocity value of 7 rev/sec send the command RLV1680.
W
Time Stamp
039
Short
0.001 sec
Q drives only
X
Analog Position Gain (AP)
040
Short
Servo: ADC counts/encoder
count
Stepper: ADC counts/step
All drives
Y
Analog Threshold (AT)
041
Short
raw ADC counts
All drives
Z
Analog Offset (AV)
042
Short
raw ADC counts
All drives
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
226
Host Command Reference
User-Defined data registers: 0 - 9, other characters
Ch. Description
0
Accumulator
3-digit
Data Type
Units
Compatibility
000
Long
integer
Q drives only
The Accumulator register “0” is, aside from being a User-defined data register, the register in which the
result of every register math function is placed. For example, if the drive executes the register addition
command “R+D1” the result of this operation (i.e. the sum of the values in data registers “D” and “1”) will be
placed in the Accumulator “0” register.
1
User-defined
001
Long
integer
Q drives only
2
User-defined
002
Long
integer
Q drives only
3
User-defined
003
Long
integer
Q drives only
4
User-defined
004
Long
integer
Q drives only
5
User-defined
005
Long
integer
Q drives only
6
User-defined
006
Long
integer
Q drives only
7
User-defined
007
Long
integer
Q drives only
8
User-defined
008
Long
integer
Q drives only
9
User-defined
009
Long
integer
Q drives only
:
User-defined
010
Long
integer
Q drives only
;
User-defined
011
Long
integer
Q drives only
<
User-defined
012
Long
integer
Q drives only
=
User-defined
013
Long
integer
Q drives only
>
User-defined
014
Long
integer
Q drives only
?
User-defined
015
Long
integer
Q drives only
@
User-defined
016
Long
integer
Q drives only
[
RESERVED
043
-
-
-
\
RESERVED
044
-
-
-
]
RESERVED
045
-
-
-
^
RESERVED
046
-
-
-
_
RESERVED
047
-
-
-
`
RESERVED
048
-
-
-
227
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Appendices
The following appendices detail various special topics in working with Applied Motion motor drives.
Appendix A: Non-Volatile Memory in Q drives
Appendix B: Host Serial Communications
Appendix C: Host Serial Connections
Appendix D: The PR Command
Appendix E: Alarm and Status Codes
Appendix F: Working with Inputs and Outputs
Appendix G: Troubleshooting
Appendix H: EtherNet/IP Communications
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
228
Host Command Reference
Appendix A: Non-Volatile Memory in Q drives
The non-volatile memory in Q drives is partitioned into 16 sections. The partitions are dedicated to various
elements of a Q drive’s data, and are designated as follows:
Partition 1........................... Q Program Segment 1
Partition 2........................... Segment 2
Partition 3........................... Segment 3
Partition 4........................... Segment 4
Partition 5........................... Segment 5
Partition 6........................... Segment 6
Partition 7........................... Segment 7
Partition 8........................... Segment 8
Partition 9........................... Segment 9
Partition 10......................... Segment 10
Partition 11......................... Segment 11
Partition 12......................... Segment 12
Partition 13......................... Drive Parameters
Partition 14......................... Alarm History
Partition 15......................... NV Data Register Storage Locations 1-100
Partition 16......................... RESERVED
The separation of these partitions is important in understanding how the drive writes to non-volatile memory.
For example, each time the SA command is executed by the drive, all of the Drive Parameters are re-written to
non-volatile memory partition 13. Similarly, each time an RW command is executed by the drive, all of the one
hundred NV Data Register Storage Locations are re-written in partition 15, even if only one of the locations is
being updated with a new data register value.
The significance of these operations becomes clear when we consider that the physical non-volatile memory
of the Q drive is limited to approximately 10,000 write cycles. This means that after writing to any one of the 16
partitions 10,000 times, the integrity of the data stored in that memory partition cannot be insured.
For this reason, it is not recommended to use the RW or SA commands in stored Q programs. For example,
it might be tempting for a user to include an RW command or two in a stored program in such a manner that
allows for various data register values to be written to non-volatile memory on a regular basis. The temptation
of this is that there won’t be a need to reload register values manually in the case of a power down/up cycle: the
register values can simply be loaded back into the program (using RR commands) from non-volatile memory. This
is to be avoided, though, because using the RW command (or SA command) in this manner could result in the
early failure of the non-volatile memory of the drive. The intended use of the RW command therefore is to be used
in the early stages of an application, during startup and programming, to set up a series of non-volatile register
locations that can be read into a stored program using the RR command.
The partitions designated for Q Program Segment storage are typically not going to be re-written in a
manner similar to the RW and SA commands, as they are only accessed during program/segment downloads
during startup and programming of an application.
229
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Appendix B: Host Serial Communications
When a drive is operating in “host mode”, it means that a host device sends commands to the drive (or
drives) over a serial connection (or network) and the drive executes the incoming commands. Here are some
examples of typical host devices:
•
A Windows-based PC running Applied Motion software
•
An industrial PC running a custom-built or other proprietary software application
•
A PLC with an ASCII module/serial port for sending text strings
•
An HMI with a serial connection for sending text strings
The aim of this appendix is to describe the following aspects of operating an Applied Motion Products motor
drive in host mode.
•
General structure of host serial communications.
•
Hardware – wiring and connecting a host device to the serial ports of an Applied Motion drive. (Covered
in detail in Appendix C).
•
COM Port Settings – UART settings and Bit Rate (Baud) settings.
•
Communications Protocol
•
Communication Details
•
Communication Errors
General structure of host serial communications
Applied Motion’s host serial communications are based on the common ASCII character set transmitted
using standard UARTs over an RS-232 or RS-485 hardware interface.
The ASCII character set is used because it is common and well-understood, as well as easy to read. UART
(Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) serial transceivers are available on many types of equipment,
including most PCs, and provide a common form of serial communications interface. RS-232 and RS-485
hardware connections are commonly used with UARTs and also provide the easiest and most common form of
connectivity.
Hardware
Details on drive terminals and connectors for wiring each of the available hardware configurations are shown
in Appendix C. Below is an overview of the three available configurations.
RS-232: This is the easiest method for drive serial communications. Using an Applied Motion supplied
adapter/programming cable (one supplied with each Applied Motion drive) a single drive can be connected directly
to any PC with a standard 9-pin RS-232 serial port. Here are some RS-232 highlights:
•
Easiest to use
•
Configuration of choice for using Applied Motion software applications such as Q Programmer, Quick
Tuner and STAC6 Configurator
•
Short Cable Lengths
•
Serial cable provided with each Applied Motion drive
•
Susceptible to EMI
RS-422 (4-wire RS-485): RS-422 was originally designed for high reliability communications in point-to-point
configurations. It usually requires a special adapter to work with a PC but is common on many types of controllers
such as PLCs and HMIs. Our implementation allows for multi-drop communications with a single master (serial
network). Here are some RS-422 highlights:
•
Relatively easy to use
•
NOT supported by Applied Motion software applications such as Quick Tuner or STAC6 Configurator. (Q
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
230
Host Command Reference
Programmer does support RS-422 in a limited fashion).
•
Permits longer cable Lengths
•
May require special adaptor
•
Immune to EMI (when wired properly)
RS-485 (2-wire RS-485): Designed for multi-drop serial networks, provides simple wiring, high reliability, and
long cable lengths. Here are some RS-485 highlights:
•
More difficult to use
•
NOT supported by Applied Motion software applications such as Quick Tuner or Configurator. (Q
Programmer does support RS-485 in a limited fashion).
•
Permits longest cable lengths: up to 1000 feet at low baud rates
•
May require special adaptor
•
Fewest wires, smaller cables
•
Immune to EMI (when wired properly)
COM Port Settings
UART Settings: We operate our UARTs with the following settings: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 0 (no) parity bits,
and 1 stop bit.
Bit rate (baud) Settings: (BR and PB commands): All AMP drives default to 9600 baud from the factory.
In most cases this speed is adequate for setup, configuring, programming, as well as host mode communications.
If higher baud rates are required the drives can be configured to operate with a different rate using the BR (Bit
rate) or PB (Power-up Bit rate) command. In all cases the drive starts up at the factory rate, 9600, and will remain
there if the “power-up packet” is acknowledged by the host (see “Drive Startup” below). When the power-up cycle
is complete and if the drive has not received the power-up packet, the drive will activate the new baud rate.
Selecting a baud rate higher than the default 9600 is dependent on the application. If there is a host
device operating a number of drives on a network, a higher speed may be required in order to process all the
communication needs.
Communications Protocol
In general, the protocol for communications between a host device and a drive is quite simple. The drives
do not initiate communications on their own, so drives are normally in a state to receive packets from the host. A
communications packet, or packet for short, includes all the characters required to complete a command (host
to drive) or response (drive to host) transmission. In other words, a host initiates communication by sending a
command packet, and the drive responds to that command (if necessary) by sending a response packet back to
the host.
Command Transmission (host to drive): The transmission of characters to the drive requires the host to
send all the required characters that form a packet in a limited time frame. At the start of receiving a packet, the
drive begins timing the space between characters. Each time a character is received an internal timer is reset
to 200 milliseconds. If the timer reaches zero before the next character in the packet is received the drive will
terminate its packet parsing (characters will still go into the receive buffer) and may send out an error response
packet depending on the protocol setting. The purpose of the time-out feature is to allow the drive to purge its
buffers automatically when a bad transmission occurs.
NOTE: This time-out feature limits the usage of host devices such as the Windows application
HyperTerminal. We recommend using Applied Motion’s SCL Setup Utility instead. This utility sends out an entire
command packet with the minimum delay between characters, and includes the packet’s terminating character
(carriage return).
Command packets are terminated by a Carriage Return (ASCII 13).
Response Transmission (drive to host): In response to a command packet from the host a drive can send
a response packet. The drive sends out its entire response packet with very limited space between characters.
231
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
At 9600 baud the space between characters is less then 1 bit space (0.0001 seconds). The host system must be
able to handle this speed. The space between characters can vary depending on the settings of the PR command
(see below).
Response packets are terminated by a Carriage Return (ASCII 13).
Protocol Settings (PR Command): The PR (Protocol) command offers users the ability to add various
features to the overall communications protocol, i.e. tailor the structure of command and response packets to best
fit the needs of the application. In general, when a host device sends a command packet to a drive, the drive will
either understand the command or not. If the drive understands the command the drive executes the command.
If the drive doesn’t understand the command it cannot execute the command. In most cases the host device will
want to know whether the drive has understood the command or not, and so the drive can be set to automatically
send an Acknowledge (understood) or Negative Acknowledge (not understand) response packet to the host for
every command packet received.
Along with Acknowledge/Negative Acknowledge (Ack/Nack), the PR command controls a number of other
protocol settings. See Appendix D for details on the PR command. Also, the PR command controls whether or
not the drive will respond with error codes in the response packet when communications errors occur.
Communication Details
Transmit Delay: (TD Command): The TD command allows users to define a dwell time in a drive, which is
used by the drive to delay the start of transmission of a response packet after the end of reception of a command
packet.
When using 2-wire RS-485 networks there are times when a drive’s response packet must be delayed until
the network is ready for the drive to transmit. Why is this necessary? The answer is because RS-485 networks
are by nature “half-duplex”, which means you cannot transmit and receive at the same time. Rather, a host must
first transmit, stop, then wait to receive. This is because the host and drive transmitters share the same pair
of wires. When transmitting, the device that has the transmission rights must assert its transmitter outputs and
therefore take control of the pair. At the same time all other devices on the network must de-assert, or open, their
transmitters so as not to interfere with the device that has the rights. Transmitters in this scenario have tri-state
outputs: the three states are transmit, open, and receive.
Some devices are not as quick in opening their transmitters as others. For this reason it may be necessary
for other, faster devices on the network to dwell some time while the slower devices open their transmitters.
Applied Motion drives de-assert their transmitters very quickly. Typically it is done within 100 microseconds (.0001
second) after the end of a packet transmission. However it is possible that the host device won’t be this fast, and
so the TD command allows users to set the time delay that an Applied Motion drive will delay after receiving a
command packet before sending a response packet.
Communications Packet: A Communications Packet, or packet for short, includes all the characters
required to complete a command or response transmission. This can vary depending on the settings of the PR
command. See Appendix D for more on the PR command. All packets are terminated by a Carriage Return
(ASCII 13).
Drive Startup: At power-up, all Applied Motion drives send out what is called the “power-up packet”. This
packet notifies a host of the drive’s presence. After sending the power-up packet the drive waits for a response
from the host. This is one of the rare instances in which a drive will initiate communications with the host. This
process is necessary for a number of Applied Motion software applications such as Quick Tuner and STAC6
Configurator. The power-up packet is an exception to the ASCII character rule in that all the characters in the
packet are binary value. Even if the character is printable its binary value is what is important. The power-up
packet consists of three binary characters with the first character being a binary 255 (255 is not a printable
ASCII character). This character designates to the software application that the packet is a power-up packet. The
following two characters are the firmware version number and the model number of the drive, respectively.
Power-Up Packet = (255)(F/W Version)(Model No.)
As an example, a BLuAC5-Si with f/w version 1.53 firmware will send out a power-up packet that looks
like this: (255)(53)(38). To an ASCII terminal this packet may look like “ÿ5&”. The (255) is the power-up packet
designator, the (53) actually stands for f/w version 1.53 (the “1” is implied), and the (38) is an internal model
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
232
Host Command Reference
number for the “BLuAC5-Si”
The power-up packet is always sent at 9600 baud, regardless of the bit rate set by the BR or PB command.
If an Applied Motion software application is present it will respond to the power-up packet and communications will
continue at 9600 baud. If an Applied Motion software application is not present, the drive’s request made by the
power-up packet will time-out and the drive will begin communicating at the saved bit rate (BR or PB command),
9600 or otherwise.
Interaction with PM parameter (Power-up Mode): If the drive is currently in power-up modes 1 or 3
(PM1 or PM3), it will be unable to respond to standard SCL commands. In these modes the drive is using a
proprietary communication protocol used by Si Programmer (and its interface to the SiNet Hub units) as well as
the QuickTuner and Configurator software programs. Standard SCL commands will not be recognized or acted
upon by the drive in these modes. If the application requires it, the drive may be temporarily forced into SCL
mode through the use of the “double zero.”
Double Zero: When the drive initializes, it will send the power-up packet as detailed above. Typically
this packet is used only by Applied Motion Products software, but a host device may also use it to force SCL
communication in a drive otherwise not configured to do so.
The host device must recognize the power-up packet and respond with a simple double zero (00). No
carriage return is required. Note that this response must occur within 2 seconds of the power-up packet being
sent, but must delay at least 2 milliseconds (0.002 sec). This will force the drive into standard SCL mode and
enable serial communication without altering the PM setting of the drive.
Communication Errors
During the process of sending communication packets between the host and drive(s), two different types of
communication errors can occur.
Hardware errors: Hardware errors are displayed physically by a drive (via either LEDs or a 7-segment
display on the drive, see Appendix F), but no response packet is automatically generated from the drive to the
host. Therefore it is the responsibility of the host to check for hardware comm errors using the AL, RS, and/or SC
commands. See Appendix F for more details on the AL and SC commands. Once the host has determined the
presence of a hardware comm error, the nature of the error can be retrieved using the CE command.
Parsing errors: Parsing errors happen when a drive receives a command packet but cannot properly
interpret (parse) the command. Parsing errors can automatically generate a response packet from the drive to the
host, depending on the settings of the PR command (see Appendix D, PR command, Bit 2).
233
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Appendix C: Host Serial Connections
Introduction
When communicating to a drive over its serial port you will always be using one of the following serial
connections: RS-232, 2-wire RS-485, or 4-wire RS-485. Out of the box we suggest starting with RS-232 along
with the programming cable and software that was supplied with your Q drive, so that you may be communicating
to and familiarizing yourself with your drive as quickly as possible. All software from Applied Motion communicate
to a drive via the supplied RS-232 programming cable. These software include:
Quick Tuner-------------------------used for tuning and configuring servo drives
Configurator------------------------used for configuring your stepper drives
Q Programmer---------------------create and edit stored Q programs, emulate a host
SCL Setup Utility------------------basic host terminal for host emulation
If your project calls for a Q drive (or drives) running stored programs, you will use the supplied RS-232
programming cable along with Quick Tuner or Configurator and Q Programmer to setup, configure, and program
your drive(s). If your project calls for your drive(s) only running stored programs, you can read up on the RS-232
sub-section in this section and not read any more about the other serial connections. However, if your application
calls for a serial host controller (PC, PLC, HMI, or other serial device that can act as a host) being able to
communicate to the drive(s), you will need to choose one of the three available serial connections.
Available Host Serial Connections: RS-232, 2-wire RS-485, 4-wire RS-485
When choosing the best serial connection for your project, the choice may be made for you based on the
host controller you plan to use. For example, some devices only communicate via 2-wire RS-485. If you are not
restricted by your host controller, here are two guidelines for choosing the best connection.
Single or multi-axis
If your project calls for communicating to only one drive you can consider any of the three options. If your
project calls for communicating to more than one drive you should use 2-wire or 4-wire RS-485.
Long communication cables
In many applications, the limitation of 50 feet on RS-232 will be sufficient. In applications where the distance
between drive and host controller will be more than 50 feet (up to 1000 feet), you will need to choose 2-wire or
4-wire RS-485.
A Quick Summary of 2-wire and 4-wire RS-485 connections
The 2-wire and 4-wire RS-485 protocols that the drives utilize are based on industry standard RS-485 and
RS-422 protocols. Strictly defined, RS-485 is a 2-wire interface that allows multi-node connections limited to halfduplex serial communications. Up to 32 nodes that both transmit and receive can be connected to one network.
On the other hand, RS-422 in the strictest definition is a 4-wire point-to-point connection that allows full-duplex
serial communications when connected to a single node. RS-422 has one node that is the driver or transmitter
and up to 10 nodes that are receivers. RS-422 was not designed for a true multi-node network.
2-wire interfaces require one more significant feature. A network node, master or slave, must be able to tristate its transmitter to allow other nodes to use the network when required. For high speed baud rates this must
be done very quickly to avoid communication collisions.
4-wire interfaces can go beyond simple point-to-point communications and be used in multi-node networks
if the slave nodes are capable of tri-stating their transmitters as required in the 2-wire networks. Some RS-485
devices (like Applied Motion drives) are set up to do this and can be used in a 4-wire, multi-node configuration.
The drives are designed to work in a multi-node environment, and so they use both the standard 2-wire
RS-485 connection, and a modified RS-422 (4-wire) connection that has been termed “4-wire RS-485”. This is
because unlike the standard RS-422, which is designed for single-node connections, the 4-wire RS-485 used by
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
234
Host Command Reference
Applied Motion drives allows multiple nodes.
NOTE: In general we recommend using half-duplex communications with the drives. Even though the
4-wire RS-485 network can support full-duplex, there is now the capability to have multiple nodes and therefore
data collisions might occur. For this reason we recommend limiting communications to half-duplex, even with the
4-wire RS-485 connections.
Connecting to your Q drive’s serial port(s)
Each drive comes with one or two physical connectors for connecting to a PC or other serial host controller
device. One connector is an RJ11 connector (same as a 4-wire phone jack) that is used strictly for RS-232
communications. The second connector is a removable 5-position terminal block for use with 2-wire and 4-wire
RS-485 connections.
COM Port Settings
When using software from Applied Motion Products to communicate to a drive there is no need to worry
about COM port settings because the software will take care of them. In applications where a host serial
controller will be communicating to a drive via one of it’s serial ports, the COM port settings should be set as
follows: 8 data bits, no Parity, 1 stop bit. The default Baud rate is 9600, though this can be changed (see BR and
PB commands).
Connecting to a PC using RS-232
Each drive comes with a programming cable for use with the drive’s RS-232 port. This cable is made up
of two parts, a 7 foot 4-wire cable (looks just like a 7 foot telephone cord), and an RJ11 to 9-pin DSUB adapter.
This adapter allows you to connect to the COM port (serial port) of your PC. Here are the general directions for
connecting your drive to your computer.
•
Locate your computer within 6 feet of the drive.
•
Plug the 9-pin end of the adapter supplied with your drive to the COM1 serial port of your PC. Secure
the adapter with adapter’s two screws. If the COM1 port on your PC is already used by something else,
you may use the COM2 port of your PC. On some PCs, COM2 will have a 25-pin connector rather than
a 9-pin. If this is the case with your PC, and you must use COM2, you will have to purchase a 25 to 9
pin serial adapter at your local computer store.
NOTE: If you are using a laptop computer that does not have any COM ports, you will have to use either
a USB to Serial adapter or a PCMCIA Serial adapter. There are a variety on the market, and some work better
than others. But in general, once you’ve installed one of the adapters your PC will assign the adapter a COM
port number. Remember this number when you go to use your Applied Motion software. Also, if you are having
troubles with your adapter, contact Applied Motion for help with recommended adapters.
•
Now take the 7 foot cable and plug one end into the adapter you just attached to your PCs COM port,
and plug the other end into the RS-232 (RJ11) jack on the drive. If you need to locate your drive farther
from the PC, you can replace the 7 foot cable with any 4-wire telephone cord. Do not exceed 50 feet.
WARNING: Never connect an Applied Motion Products drive to a telephone circuit. It uses the same
connectors and cords as telephones and modems, but the voltages are not compatible.
Connecting to a host using 4-wire RS-485
An Applied Motion drive’s 4-wire RS-485 implementation is a multi-drop network with separate transmit
and receive wires. One pair of wires connects the host’s TX+ and TX- signals to each drive’s RX+ and RXterminals. Another pair connects the RX+ and RX- signals of the host to the TX+ and TX- terminals of each
drive. A common ground terminal is provided on each drive and can be used to keep all drives at the same
ground potential. This terminal connects internally to a drive’s ground connection, so if all the drives on the
4-wire network are powered form the same supply it is not necessary to connect the logic grounds. You should
still connect one drive’s GND terminal to the host’s signal ground. Before wiring the entire system you’ll need to
connect each drive individually to the host so that a unique address can be assigned to each drive. (See following
sub-section “Before you connect the drive to your system”). Proceed as follows, using the figure below.
235
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
1. Connect the drive TX+ to the host RX+.
2. Connect the drive TX- to the host RX-.
3. Connect the drive RX+ to the host TX+.
4. Connect the drive RX- to the host TX-.
5. Connect GND to the host signal ground.
6. We recommend a 120 ohm terminating resistor be connected between the Rx+ and Rx- terminals of
the drive farthest from the host.
NOTE: Proper cable shielding is a must. High voltage, high frequency, high current signals that are present
on the servo motor cables can emit a significant amount of electrical interference. Without proper shielding on the
communications wiring this interference can disrupt even noise-tolerant differential line drivers.
Getting and Connecting an RS-485 4-wire adapter to your PC.
If you are using your computer to communicate to the drive(s) and therefore need an RS-485 adapter, model
117701 from Jameco Electronics (800-831-4242) works well. This adaptor is for a 25-pin serial port. If you are
like most people and have a 9-pin serial port on your PC, you will also need to purchase Jameco cable 31721.
Connect as follows:
Adaptor Terminal
Drive Terminal
1RX+
2RX3TX4TX+
Set the switches on the Jameco adaptor for DCE and TxON, RxON. Don’t forget to plug in the DC power
adapter that comes with the unit.
Connecting to a host using 2-wire RS-485
An Applied Motion drive’s 2-wire RS-485 implementation is a multi-drop network with one pair of wires that is
used for both transmit and receive. To make this type of connection you will first need to jumper the TX+ terminal
of a drive to it’s own RX+ terminal, and then do the same with the TX- and RX- terminals. To then connect a drive
to the host, you will need to connect the TX+/RX+ terminals of the drive to the host’s TX+/RX+ terminal, and then
the TX-/RX- terminals of the drive to the host’s TX-/RX- terminal. We also recommend a 120 terminating resistor
be connected between the Tx+ and Tx- terminals of the drive farthest from the host. Here is a diagram.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
236
Host Command Reference
Getting and Connecting an RS-485 2-wire adapter to your PC.
If you are using your computer to communicate to the drive(s) and therefore need an RS-485 adaptor, model
485-25E from Integrity Instruments (800-450-2001) works well. It comes with everything you need. Connect as
follows:
Adaptor Terminal
Drive Terminals
ATX+/RX+
BTX-/RX-
Before you connect the drive to your system
If you plan to implement a 2-wire or 4-wire RS-485 network of drives, you will first need to address each
drive individually. An easy way to do this is prior to hooking the drives up with one of the RS-485 implementations
shown above, use the RS-232 cable that came with each drive and the SCL Setup Utility. If you’ve already
connected your drive using one of the RS-485 implementations, completing this sub-section will allow you to test
your connections.
First connect your PC and drive. (See preceding sub-sections on connecting to a PC or host for help with
this). Then launch the SCL Setup Utility on your PC. If you don’t have the SCL Setup Utility installed, you can get
it either from the CD-ROM that came with your drive or from Applied Motion’s web site, www.applied-motion.com/
support/software.php.
Once the SCL Setup Utility is launched, select the proper COM port of your PC, and then apply power to
the drive. Press the Caps Lock key on your keyboard (because the drives only accept commands in uppercase).
Type RV then press Enter. If the drive has power and is properly wired, it will respond with “RV=x”, where x is
the firmware version of your drive. This confirms that communication has been established. If you don’t see the
“RV=x” response, check your wiring and follow the above procedures again.
Next, you must choose an address for each drive. Any of the “low ascii” characters (many of which appear
above the number keys on a PC keyboard) are acceptable:
!“#$%&‘()*+,-./0123456789:;<>[email protected]
To find out which address is already in your drive, type DA then press Enter. The drive will respond with
“DA=x”, where x is the address that was last stored. To change the address, type “DAy”, where y is the new
address character, then press Enter.
To test the new address, type “yRV” where y is the address you’ve just assigned to the drive, and then press
Enter. For example, if you set the address to % and want to test the address, type “%RV” then press Enter. The
drive should respond with “%RV=x” where x is the firmware version of the drive.
Once each drive in your network has been given a unique address, you can proceed with wiring the whole
network together.
237
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Appendix D: The PR Command
Because of the intense nature of serial communications required in host mode applications, you are allowed
to adjust a drive’s serial communications protocol to best fit your application. This adjusting of a drive’s serial
communications protocol is done using the PR command.
Typically the PR command is used one time when configuring a drive and saved as part of the startup
parameters (use SA command to save startup parameters). However, it can be changed at any time to
dynamically alter the serial communications.
The PR command works by sending the decimal equivalent of a 6-bit binary “word”. Each bit in the word
represents a different setting of the serial communications protocol. These settings are additive, meaning when
you set a bit to “1”, or turn it on, you are adding the functionality of that setting to the serial protocol. Think of this
6-bit word as a bank of 6 dip switches. You can turn each dip switch on or off, and in doing so add or subtract a
particular setting from the overall protocol.
The PR command in detail
The diagram to the right shows the assignments
of each of the 6 bits in the protocol word. Remember
that when you use the PR command the parameter
that you send along with the command code (PR) is
the decimal equivalent of this binary word. Below are
the details of each of the bits and the settings they
are assigned to.
Bit 0 - Default (“Standard SCL”)
PR cannot be set to 0, so if no other bits in the PR word are set to 1 then at least bit 0 must be set to
1. Setting Bit 0 to 1 when any other bits are also set to 1 has no effect on the communications protocol. For
example, PR4 (bit 2 set to 1) is the same as PR5 (bits 0 and 2 set to one). With only bit 0 set to 1, when
commands that do not request returned data are received by the drive no other response is sent from the drive. In
other words, the drive will only send a response to commands that require a response.
Send data Examples:
Command
DI8000
1DI8000
Drive Sends
-
-
Notes
Global set distance to 8000 counts or steps
Drive with address “1” set distance to 8000 counts or steps
Request data Examples:
Command
DI
1DI
Drive Sends
DI=8000
1DI=8000
Notes
Global distance request
Drive with address “1” responds with distance
Bit 1 - Address Character (always send address character)
With this option set (Bit 1=1) a drive’s address character will always be included in the response packet
along with any requested data.
Send data Examples:
Command
VE50
1VE50
Drive Sends
-
-
Notes
Global set velocity to 50 rps
Drive with address “1” set velocity to 50 rps
Request data Examples:
Command
VE
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive Sends
1VE=50
Notes
Drive responds with address “1” and velocity to global
238
Host Command Reference
1VE
1VE=50
velocity request
Drive responds with address “1” and velocity to specific
velocity request from drive at address “1”
Bit 2 - Ack/Nack (always send acknowledge character)
This option causes the drive to acknowledge every transmission from a host, whether the command is
requesting data or not. If a host requests data (for example a DI command with no parameter), the response is
considered the acknowledgement. However, if the host sends commands that do not request data from the drive,
the drive will still respond with one of the following characters:
“%” - The “percent” character is a Normal Acknowledge (Ack) character that means the drive accepted the
command and executed it.
“*” - The “asterisk” character is an Exception Acknowledge (Ack) character that means the drive accepted
the command and buffered it into the queue. Depending on the status of the queue, execution of the exception
acknowledged command(s) can occur at any time after the acknowledge.
“?” - The “question mark” character is a Negative Acknowledge (Nack) character that means a parsing error
occurred while the drive was receiving the command. A second character may follow the question mark, which
provides an error code describing the type of parsing error. Here is the list of error codes:
Negative Acknowledge Codes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 Command timed out
Parameter is too long
Too few parameters
Too many parameters
Parameter out of range
Command buffer (queue) full
Cannot process command
Program running
Bad password
Comm port error
Bad character
I/O point already used by current Command Mode, and cannot be changed (Flex I/O drives only)
I/O point configured for incorrect use (i.e., input vs. output) (Flex I/O drives only)
I/O point cannot be used for requested function - see HW manual for possible I/O function
assignments. (Flex I/O drives only)
Acknowledge characters are always sent out of the RS-232 port. When operating on a 2-wire or 4-wire RS485 network, the acknowledge characters are sent out under the following conditions:
1. An acknowledge character is sent when the received command has an address character at the
beginning.
2. An acknowledge character is NOT sent when global commands (commands without addresses) that
do not request data from the drive are used.
3. Global commands that request data will cause data to be returned from the drive(s). This can cause
data collisions if there are more than one drive on a network. NOTE: Always use addresses with
commands in multi-drop networks to avoid data collisions.
NOTE: When possible avoid using Acknowledge characters (%, *, ?) as drive addresses in multi-drop
networks to prevent confusion.
Good command Example:
Command
Drive Sends
DI8000
%
Notes
Drive sends normal Ack (over RS-232 port only) in response
to global set distance to 8000
239
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
1DI8000
1%
Drive at address “1” sends normal Ack (over both ports) in
response to address-specific set distance to 8000
Bad command Example:
Command
Drive Sends
VE200
?5
1VE200
1?5
Notes
Drive sends Nack (over RS-232 port only) in
response to global set velocity to 200 rps; error code 5 is
sent because parameter “200” is out of range
Drive at address “1” sends Nack (over both ports) and error
code inresponse to address-specific set velocity to 200 rps
Buffered command Example:
Command
Drive Sends
AC10
*
1AC10
1*
Notes
Drive sends Exception Ack (over RS-232 port only) in response to global set acceleration to 10 rps/s
Drive at address “1” sends Exception Ack and address (over
both ports) in response to address-specific set acceleration
Bit 3 - Checksum (use 8-bit checksum)
Not implemented at this time. Call factory for schedule.
Bit 4 - RS-485 Adapter mode
Allows using a drive as an RS-232 to RS-485 adapter by letting the host communicate on an RS-485
network through the first drive’s RS-232 port. When the host sends commands with a “~” (tilde) at the beginning
of the command to the first drive’s RS-232 port, the command is echoed out of both of that drive’s RS-232 and
RS-485 ports. Drives connected on the RS-485 network will receive the same command with the “~” stripped off.
Without the Bit 4 option (Bit 4=0), a drive will normally echo any addressed command out of the RS-232 port
only, whether the command was received from the drive’s RS-232 or RS-485 port. What the Bit 4 setting does (Bit
4=1), is force the drive to echo commands out the RS-485 port as well, allowing a host that is connected to a drive
through its RS-232 port, to communicate to an RS-485 network of drives.
NOTE: When both Bits 4 and 2 are set (Bit 4=1, Bit 2=1), the host will receive back both the echoed packet
and the acknowledge packet. For example, two drives are connected in an RS-485 network, and they both
have PR command Bits 4 and 2 set. The first drive, which is also connected to the host via its RS-232 port, is
addressed “1”, and the second drive is addressed “2”. Here is what you will see:
Send data Example:
Command
Drive Sends
~2DI8000
2DI8000
2%
Notes
Drive at address “1” echoes original command over both
serial ports
Drive at address “2” responds with ack.
Request data Example:
Command
Drive Sends
~2DI
2DI
2DI8000
Notes
Drive at address “1” echoes original command over both
serial ports
Drive at address “2” responds with distance
Bit 5 - 3-digit numeric register addressing
Each data register in a drive is normally accessed using its single letter, number, or other ascii character.
With Bit 5 set (Bit 5=1), each of the data registers is instead accessed with a 3-digit number: 000 to 074. (See the
Data Registers section for character and 3-digit numerical assignments). The Bit 5 option implements this specific
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
240
Host Command Reference
usage for the RL (Register Load) and RU (Register Upload) commands.
NOTE: When data is returned from a drive (whether Bit 5 is set or not set), the data register is always
represented by its single character designation.
RL Command Example:
Command
RL017100
RL017
Drive Sends
-
RLA=100
Notes
Load register 017 (“A”) with the value 100
Drive sends contents of acceleration register
RU command Example:
Command
Drive Sends
RU0174
RUA=100
RUB=150
RUC=140
RUD=210
Notes
Drive responds to register upload command by sending
contents of 4 sequential data registers, starting with
register 017 (“A”)
PR Command Examples
Now that you know what the bits in the PR command’s 6-bit binary word mean, here are a couple examples
showing how you would set the serial communications protocol of your Q drive.
Example: Turn on Ack/Nack (Bit 2) and 3-digit numeric register addressing function (Bit 5)
The 6-bit word for this combination is - 100100 - and it’s decimal equivalent is 36. Therefore, to set your
drive with this serial protocol, you would send the command “PR36” to your drive.
Example: Turn on RS-485 adaptor function (Bit 4)
The 6-bit word for this combination is - 010000 - and it’s decimal equivalent is 16. Therefore, to set your
drive with this serial protocol, you would send the command “PR16” to your drive.
241
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Appendix E: Alarm and Status Codes
One of a drive’s diagnostic tools is its ability to send alarm and status codes back to a host. The AL (Alarm
code) and SC (Status Code) commands can be used by a host to query a drive at any time. If a drive faults or
sets an alarm, the AL command allows the host to find out what alarm, or alarms, has been set. Similarly, the SC
command allows a host to find out what the status code of a drive is at any time during drive operation. A status
code provides information as to whether the drive is running, in position, disabled, homing, and other conditions.
Both alarm and status codes can be very useful when initially setting up and integrating a servo system into your
machine.
The Alarm and Status codes are hexadecimal equivalents of 16 bit binary “words”. Each bit in each binary
word is assigned a meaning, and therefore a code word can actually show information about more than one alarm
or status condition.
Alarm Code Definitions
AL command
When a host sends the AL command, the response from the drive will be the Hexadecimal equivalent of a
16-bit word. This hexadecimal value is considered the Alarm Code, and the hexadecimal value for each of the bits
in the Alarm Code is given below.
Hex Value
BLu
SV
STAC6
0001
Position Limit
0002
CCW Limit
0004
CW Limit
0008
Over Temp
0010
Excess Regen*
Internal Voltage
Excess Regen
Under Voltage*
Under Voltage
Under Voltage
Internal Voltage
Internal Voltage
Under Voltage
Under Voltage
Over Current
0080
0100
STM
Over Voltage
0020
0040
ST
Bad Hall Sensor
Open Motor Winding
Bad Encoder
0200
0400
Comm Error
0800
Bad Flash
1000
Wizard Failed
2000
Current Foldback
4000
8000
(not used)
No Move
Motor Resistance
Out of Range
(not used)
(not used)
Blank Q Segment
No Move
(not used)
* BLuAC drives only
NOTE: Items in bold italic represent Drive Faults, which automatically disable the motor. Use the OF
command in a Q Program to branch on a Drive Fault.
Example: The drive has hit the CW limit (0004), there is an under voltage condition (0040), and an encoder
wiring connection has been lost resulting in an encoder fault (0200). The resulting Alarm Code is 0244, and when
the host sends the “AL” command the drive will respond with “AL=244”.
“f” data register
Another way to retrieve the Alarm Code is to use the “f” data register. If the host sends the RLf command,
the response from the drive will be the decimal equivalent of the 16-bit Alarm Code word. The diagram below
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
242
Host Command Reference
shows the 16 bit assignments for the Alarm Code (which of course match the hexadecimal values above).
Example: The drive has hit the CW limit (bit 2), there is an under voltage condition (bit 6), and an encoder
wiring connection has been lost resulting in an encoder fault (bit 9). The resulting Alarm Code binary word is 0000
0010 0100 0100. The decimal equivalent of this word is 580, so the response from the drive to the RLf command
will be “RLf=580”.
Status Code Definitions
SC command
When a host sends the SC command, the response from the drive will be the Hexadecimal equivalent of
a 16-bit word. This hexadecimal value is considered the Status Code, and the hexadecimal value for each of
the bits in the Status Code is given below. When a host sends the SC command, the response from the drive
will actually be the Hexadecimal equivalent of this 16-bit word. This hexadecimal value is considered the Status
Code, and the equivalent hexadecimal value for each of the bits is given below.
Hex Value
Status Code bit definition
0001
Motor Enabled (Motor Disabled if this bit = 0)
0002
Sampling (for Quick Tuner)
0004
Drive Fault (check Alarm Code)
0008
In Position (motor is in position)
0010
Moving (motor is moving)
0020
Jogging (currently in jog mode)
0040
Stopping (in the process of stopping from a stop command)
0080
Waiting for an input (executing WI command)
0100
Saving (parameter data is being saved)
0200
Alarm present (check Alarm Code)
0400
Homing (executing an SH command)
0800
Wait Time (executing a WT command)
243
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Hex Value
Status Code bit definition
1000
Wizard running (Timing Wizard is running)
2000
Checking encoder (Timing Wizard is running)
4000
Q Program is running
8000
Initializing (happens at power up)
Example: The drive is running a stored Q program (hex value 4000), it’s in position (hex value 0008), and it’s
waiting for the input specified by the WI command (hex value 0080). The Status Code for this condition is 4088,
and when the host sends the “SC” command the drive will respond with “SC=4088”.
“s” data register
Another way to retrieve the Status Code is to use the “s” data register. If the host sends the RLs command,
the response from the drive will be the decimal equivalent of the 16-bit Status Code word. The diagram below
shows the 16 bit assignments for the Status Code (which of course match the hexadecimal values above).
Example: The drive is running a stored Q program (bit 14), it’s in position (bit 3), and it’s waiting for the
input specified by the WI command (bit 7). The resulting Status Code binary word is 0100 0000 1000 1000. The
decimal equivalent of this word 16,520, so the response from the drive to the RLs command will be “RLs=16520”.
A useful tool for converting between binary, decimal, and hexadecimal.
If you’re using a Windows-based PC as a host with your drive (which you’ll definitely be doing at some
point during the project), you can use the Calculator utility that comes with Windows to convert Alarm and Status
Codes between binary, decimal, and hexadecimal values. This utility is usually found in Start Menu, Programs,
Accessories. Once open, make sure to choose Scientific view from the View menu of Calculator. This view
provides radio buttons for Hex, Dec, and Bin.
To figure out what your Alarm or Status Code is telling you, first select the appropriate radio button (Hex for
the AL or SC commands, Dec for the “f” and “s” registers), then enter the response from the drive. Now you can
toggle between Hex, Dec, and Bin to compare the values to the tables and diagrams above. Note: Calculator
does not show leading zeros in a binary number, so you may see less than 16 bits when you select Bin. That’s
OK, just start counting from the right with Bit 0 and you’ll be able to determine the conditions set in the codes.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
244
Host Command Reference
LED and 7-Segment Display codes
In addition to the Alarm and Status codes, most drive alarms and faults as well as some status codes
are displayed at the front of the drives, via either two-color flashing LED codes or 7-segment LED codes. The
following tables show the various codes available with Applied Motion drives.
BLuDC LED codes
Items in bold italic are Drive Faults.
DESCRIPTION
-
solid
Motor disabled
-
flashing
slowly
Motor enabled
-
flashing
quickly
Q program running (Q drives only)
1
1
position limit
1
2
move attempted while disabled
2
1
CCW limit
2
2
CW limit
3
1
over temperature (> 85 deg C)
3
2
bad flash
4
1
over voltage (> 55 Vdc)
4
2
under voltage (< 18 Vdc)
5
1
over current / short circuit
5
2
current limit
6
1
bad hall
6
2
bad encoder
7
1
serial communication error
BLuAC 7-Segment codes
Items in bold italic are Drive Faults.
Position Mode
Over Temp
Comm Error
Velocity Mode
Over Voltage
Move attempted while
disabled
Torque Mode
Under Voltage
Drive Start-up
Step Mode
Over Current
Bad Flash
Si Mode
Current Limit
Comm Time-out
245
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Drive Disabled
Hall Bad
Stack Overflow
Position Limit
Bad Encoder
Stack Underflow
CCW Limit
Memory Failed
Q Program Running
CW Limit
Excess Regen
Drive enabled when
flashing
SV LED codes
Items in bold italic are Drive Faults.
DESCRIPTION
-
solid
Motor disabled
-
flashing slowly
Motor enabled
-
flashing quickly
Q program running (Q drives only)
1
1
position limit
1
2
move attempted while disabled
2
1
CCW limit
2
2
CW limit
3
1
over temp
3
2
internal voltage out of range
3
3
attempt to load blank Q segment
4
1
over voltage
4
2
under voltage
4
3
Bad Si program instruction
5
1
over current / short circuit
5
2
current limit
6
1
bad hall
6
2
bad encoder
7
1
serial communication error
7
2
bad flash
STAC6 LED codes
Items in bold italic are Drive Faults.
DESCRIPTION
-
solid
Motor disabled
-
flashing slowly
Motor enabled
-
flashing quickly
Q program running (Q drives only)
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
246
Host Command Reference
1
1
motor stall (w/ optional encoder only)
1
2
move attempted while disabled
2
1
CCW limit
2
2
CW limit
3
1
over temp
3
2
excess regen
4
1
over voltage
4
2
under voltage
4
3
Bad Si program instruction
5
1
over current / short circuit
5
2
motor resistance out of range
6
1
open motor winding
6
2
bad encoder signal (w/ optional encoder only)
7
1
serial communication error
ST-Q/Si LED codes
Items in bold italic are Drive Faults.
DESCRIPTION
-
solid
Motor disabled
-
flashing slowly
Motor enabled
-
flashing quickly
Q program running (Q drives only)
1
1
motor stall (w/ optional encoder only)
1
2
move attempted while disabled
2
1
CCW limit
2
2
CW limit
3
1
over temp
3
2
internal voltage out of range
4
1
over voltage
4
2
under voltage
4
3
Bad Si program instruction
5
1
over current / short circuit
6
1
open motor winding
6
2
bad encoder signal (w/ optional encoder only)
7
1
serial communication error
ST-S LED codes
Items in bold italic are Drive Faults.
DESCRIPTION
-
solid
Motor disabled
-
flashing slowly
Motor enabled
247
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
1
2
move attempted while disabled
2
1
CCW limit
2
2
CW limit
3
1
over temp
3
2
internal voltage out of range
4
1
over voltage
4
2
under voltage
5
1
over current / short circuit
6
1
open motor winding
7
1
serial communication error
STM LED codes
Items in bold italic are Drive Faults.
DESCRIPTION
-
solid
Motor disabled
-
flashing slowly
Motor enabled
-
flashing quickly
Q program running (Q drives only)
1
1
motor stall (w/ optional encoder only)
1
2
move attempted while disabled
2
1
CCW limit
2
2
CW limit
3
1
over temp
3
2
internal voltage out of range
4
1
over voltage
4
2
under voltage
5
1
over current / short circuit
6
1
open motor winding
7
1
serial communication error
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
248
Host Command Reference
Appendix F: Working with Inputs and Outputs
This Appendix covers I/O usage on drives from Applied Motion Products.
Low v. High
When working with inputs and outputs it is important to remember the designations low and high. If current
is flowing into or out of an input or output the logic state for that input/output is defined as low or closed. If no
current is flowing, or the input/output is not connected, the logic state is high or open. A low state is represented
by the “L” character in parameters of commands that affect inputs/outputs. For example, WIX4L means “wait for
input X4 low”, and SO1L means “set output 1 low”. A high state is represented by the “H” character.
When working with the analog inputs, “L” designates an analog value lower than the value set by the AT
command. Similarly “H” designates an analog value greater than the value set by the AT command.
“X” Marks The Spot
When using a dual input command, both I/O points used must reside on the same connector. That is, if an
“X” input such as X2 is used for the first input, the second input is assumed to use an “X” as well since it must
reside on the same connector. Since it is not possible to mix I/O from different banks, there is no need for the “X”
character on the second I/O point. See the “Parameter Details” section in the tables below for specific details.
Parameter Details
The following tables show general I/O details for commands as they relate to specific drives. There are
exceptions to these general rules, so be sure to check the command pages for the specific SCL commands
you wish to implement, as well as the list of exceptions at the end of this section. For specific voltage or wiring
questions, consult your drive’s hardware manual.
Input Parameter Details
BLu-S, BLu-Q
STAC6-S, STAC6-Q, STAC6-C
Parameter #1
Optional “X”, input number, input condition
NOTE: Including/omitting the optional “X” has no effect on the execution
of the command.
- units
Optional “X”, integer, letter
- range
- integer: 0 (encoder index, if present), 1 - 7, 8 (Analog Command),
9 (AIN1), : (AIN2)
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
Parameter #2
Input number, input condition
- units
integer, letter
- range
- integer: 0 (encoder index, if present), 1 - 7, 8 (Analog Command),
9 (AIN1), : (AIN2)
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
249
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
BLu-SE, BLu-QE, BLu-Si
STAC6-SE, STAC6-QE, STAC6-Si
Parameter #1
Optional “X”, input number, input condition
NOTE: Including the optional “X” indicates that the input(s) resides on
the IN/OUT1 or main drive board connector. Omitting the “X” indicates
that the input(s) resides on the IN/OUT2 or top board connector.
- units
Optional “X”, integer, letter
- range
- integer for IN/OUT1 or main drive board connector: X0 (encoder
index, if present), X1 - X7, X8 (Analog Command), X9 (AIN1), X: (AIN2)
-integer for IN/OUT2 or top board connector: 1 - 8
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
Parameter #2
Input number, input condition
- units
integer, letter
- range
- integer for IN/OUT1 or main drive board connector: 0 (encoder index,
if present), 1 - 7, 8 (Analog Command), 9 (AIN1), : (AIN2)
-integer for IN/OUT2 or top board connector: 1 - 8
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
STAC5-S, SVAC3-S
Parameter #1
Optional “X”, input number, input condition
NOTE: Including/omitting the optional “X” has no effect on the execution
of the command.
- units
integer, letter
- range
- integer: 0 (encoder index, if present), 1 - 4, 8 (AIN)
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
Parameter #2
input number, input condition
- units
integer, letter
- range
- integer: 0 (encoder index, if present), 1 - 4, 8 (AIN)
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
250
Host Command Reference
STAC5-Q, STAC5-IP
SVAC3-Q, SVAC3-IP
Parameter #1
Optional “X”, input number, input condition
NOTE: Including the optional “X” indicates that the input(s) resides on
the IN/OUT1 connector (DB-15). Omitting the “X” indicates that the
input(s) resides on the OPT2 connector (DB-25).
- units
Optional “X”, integer, letter
- range
- integer for IN/OUT1 connector: X0 (encoder index, if present),
X1 - X4, X8 (AIN)
- integer for OPT2 connector: 1 - 8
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
For those commands with Parameter #2
input number, input condition
- units
integer, letter
- range
- integer for IN/OUT1 connector: 0 (encoder index, if present),
1 - 4, 8 (AIN)
- integer for OPT2 connector: 1 - 8
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
ST-Q, ST-Si, ST-C, ST-IP
SV7-S, SV7-Q, SV7-Si, SV7-C, SV7-IP
Parameter #1
Optional “X”, input number, input condition
NOTE: Including/omitting the optional “X” has no effect on the execution
of the command.
- units
integer, letter
- range
- integer: 0 (encoder index, if present), 1 - 8, 9 (Analog Command),
: (AIN1), ; (AIN2)
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F - Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
Parameter #2
input number, input condition
- units
integer, letter
- range
- integer: 0 (encoder index, if present), 1 - 8, 9 (Analog Command),
: (AIN1), ; (AIN2)
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
251
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
ST-S, ST-Plus
STM17S, STM17Q
STM23S, STM23Q
Parameter #1
Optional “X”, input number, input condition
NOTE: Including/omitting the optional “X” has no effect on the execution
of the command.
- units
optional “X”, integer, letter
- range
- integer: 0 (encoder index, if present), 1 (STEP), 2 (DIR), 3 (EN), 4
(AIN)
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
Parameter #2
input number, input condition
- units
integer, letter
- range
- integer: 0 (encoder index, if present), 1 (STEP), 2 (DIR), 3 (EN), 4
(AIN)
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
STM17C
Parameter #1
Optional “X”, input number, input condition
NOTE: Including/omitting the optional “X” has no effect on the execution
of the command.
- units
Optional “X”, integer, letter
- range
- integer: 0 (encoder index, if present), 1 - 3, 4 (AIN)
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
Parameter #2
input number, input condition
- units
integer, letter
- range
- integer: 0 (encoder index, if present), 1 - 3, 4 (AIN)
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
252
Host Command Reference
STM23C
STM24C
Parameter #1
Optional “X”, input number, input condition
NOTE: Including/omitting the optional “X” has no effect on the execution
of the command.
- units
Optional “X”, integer, letter
- range
- integer: 0 (encoder index, if present), 1 - 3
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F - Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
Parameter #2
input number, input condition
- units
integer, letter
- range
- integer: 0 (encoder index, if present), 1 - 3
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
STM24SF, STM24QF
Drives with Flex I/O allow a user to configure I/O1 through I/O4 as either inputs or outputs by using the Set
Direction (SD) command.
Parameter #1
Optional “X”, input number, input condition
NOTE: Including/omitting the optional “X” has no effect on the execution
of the command.
- units
Optional “X”, integer, letter
- range
- integer: 0 (encoder index, if present), 1 - 4, 5 (AIN)
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F - Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
Parameter #2
input number, input condition
- units
integer, letter
- range
- integer: 0 (encoder index, if present), 1 - 4, 5 (AIN)
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F = Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
253
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Exceptions:
•
When using the Follow Encoder or Hand Wheel commands (FE or HW, respectively), the master encoder
channels A and B must be wired to drive inputs STEP/X1/IN1 and DIR/X2/IN2. In these modes, these
inputs must not be used for sensor inputs.
•
Using the On Input (OI) command with no parameter will disable the interrupt function.
•
The Seek Home (SH) command makes use of the drive’s CW and CCW limit functions. As such, the
home sensor may not be wired to the following inputs:
STAC5-S:
X1, X2
STM17-S/Q:
STEP, DIR
STAC5-Q/IP:
IN7, IN8
STM17-C:
IN1, IN2
SVAC3-S:
X1, X2
STM23-S/Q:
STEP, DIR
SVAC3-Q/IP:
IN7, IN8
STM23-C:
IN1, IN2
BLu:
X6, X7
STM24-SF/QF:
I/O3, I/O4
STAC6:
X6, X7
STM24-C:
IN1, IN2
ST-S/Plus:
STEP, DIR
ST-Q/Si/C/IP:
X7, X8
SV7:
X7, X8
Output Parameter Details
BLu-S, BLu-Q
STAC6-S, STAC6-Q, STAC6-C
Parameter #1
Optional “Y”, output number, output condition
NOTE: Including/omitting the optional “Y” has no effect on the execution
of the command.
- units
Optional “Y”, integer, letter
- range
- integer: 1 - 3
- letter: L = Low, H = High
BLu-SE, BLu-QE, BLu-Si
STAC6-SE, STAC6-QE, STAC6-Si
Parameter #1
Optional “Y”, output number, output condition
NOTE: Including the optional “Y” indicates that the output(s) resides on
the IN/OUT1 or main drive board connector. Omitting the “Y” indicates
that the output(s) resides on the IN/OUT2 or top board connector.
- units
Optional “Y”, integer, letter
- range
- integer for IN/OUT1 or main drive board connector: Y1 - Y3
- integer for IN/OUT2 or top board connector: 1 - 4
- letter: L = Low, H = High
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
254
Host Command Reference
STAC5-S
SVAC3-S
Parameter #1
Optional “Y”, output number, output condition
NOTE: Including/omitting the optional “Y” has no effect on the execution
of the command.
- units
Optional “Y”, integer, letter
- range
- integer: 1 - 2
- letter: L = Low, H = High
STAC5-Q, STAC5-IP
SVAC3-Q, SVAC3-IP
Parameter #1
Optional “Y”, output number, output condition
NOTE: Including the optional “Y” indicates that the output(s) resides
on the IN/OUT1 connector (DB-15). Omitting the “Y” indicates that the
output(s) resides on the OPT2 connector (DB-25).
- units
Optional “Y”, integer, letter
- range
- integer for IN/OUT1 connector: Y1- Y2
- integer for OPT2 connector: 1 - 4
- letter: L = Low, H = High
ST-Q, ST-Si, ST-C, ST-IP
SV7-S-SV7-Q, SV7-Si, SV7-C, SV7-IP
Parameter #1
Optional “Y”, output number, output condition
NOTE: Including/omitting the optional “Y” has no effect on the execution
of the command.
- units
Optional “Y”, integer, letter
- range
- integer: 1 - 4
- letter: L = Low, H = High
255
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
ST-S, ST-Plus
STM17S, STM17Q, STM17C
STM23S, STM23Q, STM23C
STM24C
Parameter #1
Optional “Y”, output number, output condition
NOTE: Including/omitting the optional “Y” has no effect on the execution
of the command.
- units
Optional “Y”, integer, letter
- range
- integer: 1
- letter: L = Low, H = High
STM24SF, STM24QF
Drives with Flex I/O allow a user to configure I/O1 through I/O4 as either inputs or outputs by using the Set
Direction (SD) command.
Parameter #1
Optional “Y”, output number, output condition
NOTE: Including/omitting the optional “Y” has no effect on the execution
of the command.
- units
Optional “Y”, integer, letter
- range
- integer: 1 - 4
- letter: L = Low, H = High, F - Falling Edge, R = Rising Edge
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
256
Host Command Reference
Appendix G: eSCL (SCL over Ethernet) Reference
Introduction
eSCL is Applied Motion Products’ language for commanding and querying motion control products over
Ethernet. It is supported by several motion control devices, including the ST5-Q-E, ST10-Q-E and SV7-Q-E. In
addition to sending commands to a drive from a host in real time, you can also use our Q Programmer software
to embed sequences of commands, called Q Programs, in a drive. These programs can be set to execute
automatically at power up, or can be triggered by commands sent from the host.
This guide is intended to help you connect and configure your drive and to help you start writing your own
eSCL host application.
Getting Started
There are three steps required to create an eSCL application with your new Applied Motion Products motor
driver. Each of these is explained in a separate section of this manual.
•
Connect the drive to your PC. This includes getting the drive physically connected to your network (or
directly to the PC), setting the drive’s IP address, and setting the appropriate networking properties on
your PC.
•
Configure the drive for your motor and application. For step motor drives, you’ll need to use a suitable
version of our Configurator software. For servos, use Quick Tuner.
•
Create your own application. This guide includes code examples in Visual Basic and C# to help you get
started. You can download the example in their entirety, from our website, but we recommend reading the
explanations in the guide first.
Connecting a Drive to Your PC
This process requires three steps
Point of Interest
•
Get the drive physically connected to your network (or directly to the
PC)
•
Set the drive’s IP address
•
Set the appropriate networking properties on your PC.
Addresses, Subnets, and Ports
Every device on an Ethernet network must have a unique IP address.
In order for two devices to communicate with each other, they must both be
connected to the network and they must have IP addresses that are on the
same subnet. A subnet is a logical division of a larger network. Members
of one subnet are generally not able to communicate with the members of
another. Subnets are defined by the choices of IP addresses and subnet
masks.
If you want to know the IP address and subnet mask of your PC, select
Start…All Programs…Accessories…Command Prompt. Then type “ipconfig”
and press Enter. You should see something like this:
257
AMP recommends performing all
Ethernet configuration of the drive
while connected directly to a PC via
a CAT-5 Ethernet cable. This avoids
many potential communication
problems associated with frequent
IP address changes on a larger
network.
Once fully configured, the drive may
be used on a plant network without
issue.
See the section titled “ARP Tables the Ghost in the Machine” below for
further information.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
0 12
345
EF
10.10.10.10
192.168.1.10
192.168.1.20
192.168.1.30
192.168.0.40
192.168.0.50
192.168.0.60
192.168.0.70
192.168.0.80
192.168.0.90
192.168.0.100
192.168.0.110
192.168.0.120
192.168.0.130
192.168.0.140
DHCP
BCD
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
89A
Your drive includes a 16 position rotary switch for
setting its IP address. The factory default address for each
switch setting is shown in the table to the right.
IP Address*
67
If your PC’s subnet mask is set to 255.255.255.0, a
common setting known as a Class C subnet mask, then
your machine can only talk to another network device whose
IP address matches yours in the first three octets. (The
numbers between the dots in an IP address are called
octets.) For example, if your PC is on a Class C subnet and
has an IP address of 192.168.0.20, it can talk to a device at
192.168.0.40, but not one at 192.168.1.40. If you change
your subnet mask to 255.255.0.0 (Class B) you can talk
to any device whose first two octets match yours. Be sure
to ask your system administrator before doing this. You
network may be segmented for a reason.
Settings 1 through E can be changed using the STAC
Configurator software (use Quick Tuner for servo drives).
Setting 0 is always “10.10.10.10”, the universal recovery
address. If someone were to change the other settings and
not write it down or tell anyone (I’m not naming names here,
but you know who I’m talking about) then you will not be
able to communicate with your drive. The only way to “recover” it is to use the universal recovery address.
Setting F is “DHCP”, which commands the drive to get an IP address from a DHCP server on the network.
The IP address automatically assigned by the DHCP server may be “dynamic” or “static” depending on how the
administrator has configured DHCP. The DHCP setting is reserved for advanced users.
Your PC, or any other device that you use to communicate with the drive, will also have a unique address.
On the drive, switch settings 1 through E use the standard class B subnet mask (i.e. “255.255.0.0”). The
mask for the universal recovery address is the standard class A (i.e. “255.0.0.0”).
One of the great features of Ethernet is the ability for many applications to share the network at the same
time. Ports are used to direct traffic to the right application once it gets to the right IP address. The UDP eSCL
port in our drives is 7775. To send and receive commands using TCP, use port number 7776. You’ll need to know
this when you begin to write your own application. You will also need to choose an open (unused) port number
for your application. Our drive doesn’t care what that is; when the first command is sent to the drive, the drive will
make note of the IP address and port number from which it originated and direct any responses there. The drive
will also refuse any traffic from other IP addresses that is headed for the eSCL port. The first application to talk to
a drive “owns” the drive. This lock is only reset when the drive powers down.
If you need help choosing a port number for your application, you can find a list of commonly used port
numbers at http://www.iana.org/assignments/port-numbers.
One final note: Ethernet communication can use one or both of two “transport protocols”: UDP and TCP.
eSCL commands can be sent and received using either protocol. UDP is simpler and more efficient than TCP, but
TCP is more reliable on large or very busy networks where UDP packets might occasionally be dropped.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
258
Host Command Reference
Option 1: Connect a Drive to Your Local Area Network
NIC
LAN
PC
SWITCH
or
ROUTER
DRIVE
If you have a spare port on a switch or router and if you are able to set your drive to an IP address that
is compatible with your network, and not used by anything else, this is a simple way to get connected. This
technique also allows you to connect multiple drives to your PC. If you are on a corporate network, please check
with your system administrator before connecting anything new to the network. He or she should be able assign
you a suitable address and help you get going.
If you are not sure which addresses are already used on your network, you can find out using “Angry IP
scanner”, which can be downloaded free from http://www.angryip.org/w/Download. But be careful: an address
might appear to be unused because a computer or other device is currently turned off. And many networks use
dynamic addressing where a DHCP server assigns addresses “on demand”. The address you choose for your
drive might get assigned to something else by the DHCP server at another time.
Once you’ve chosen an appropriate IP address for your drive, set the rotary switch according the address
table above. If none of the default addresses are acceptable for your network, you can enter a new table of IP
addresses using Configurator. If your network uses addresses starting with 192.168.0, the most common subnet,
you will want to choose an address from switch settings 4 through E. Another common subnet is 192.168.1. If
your network uses addresses in this range, the compatible default selections are 1, 2 and 3.
If your PC address is not in one of the above private subnets, you will have to change your subnet mask to
255.255.0.0 in order to talk to your drive. To change your subnet mask:
1. On Windows XP, right click on “My Network Places” and select properties. On Windows 7, click Computer.
Scroll down the left pane until you see “Network”. Right click and select properties. Select “Change
adapter settings”
2. You should see an icon for your network interface card (NIC). Right click and select properties.
3. Scroll down until you see “Internet Properties (TCP/IP)”. Select this item and click the Properties button.
On Windows 7 and Vista, look for “(TCP/IPv4)”
259
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
4. If the option “Obtain an IP address automatically” is selected, your PC is getting an IP address and a
subnet mask from the DHCP server. Please cancel this dialog and proceed to the next section of this
manual: “Using DHCP”.
5. If the option “Use the following IP address” is selected, life is good. Change the subnet mask to
“255.255.0.0” and click OK.
Using DCHP
If you want to use your drive on a network that where all or most of the devices use dynamic IP addresses
supplied by a DHCP server, set the rotary switch to “F”. When the drive is connected to the network and powered
on, it will obtain an IP address and a subnet mask from the server that is compatible with your PC. The only catch
is that you won’t know what address the server assigns to your drive. Ethernet Configurator can find your drive
using the Drive Discovery feature, as long as your network isn’t too large. With the drive connected to the network
and powered on, select Drive Discovery from the Drive menu.
You will see a dialog such as this:
Normally, Drive Discovery will
only detect one network interface card
(NIC), and will select it automatically. If
you are using a laptop and have both
wireless and wired network connections,
second NIC may appear. Please select
the NIC that you use to connect to the
network to which you’ve connected your
drive. Then click OK. Drive Discovery
will notify you as soon as it has detected
a drive.
a
If you think this is the correct drive, click Yes. If you’re not sure, click Not Sure and Drive Discovery will look
for additional drives on you network. Once you’ve told Drive Discovery which drive is yours, it will automatically
enter that drive’s IP address in the IP address text box so that you are ready to communicate.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
260
Host Command Reference
Option 2: Connect a Drive Directly to Your PC
1.
Connect one end of a CAT5 Ethernet cable into the LAN card (NIC) on your PC and the other into
the drive.
2.
Set the IP address on the drive to “10.10.10.10” by setting the rotary switch at “0”.
3.
To set the IP address of your PC:
a.
On Windows XP, right click on “My Network Places” and select properties.
b.
On Windows 7, click Computer. Scroll down the left pane until you see “Network”. Right
click and select properties. Select “Change adapter settings”
4.
You should see an icon for your network interface card (NIC). Right click and select properties.
a.
Scroll down until you see “Internet Properties (TCP/IP)”. Select this item and click the
Properties button.
b.
On Windows 7 and Vista, look for “(TCP/IPv4)”
5.
Select the option “Use the following IP address”. Then enter the address “10.10.10.11”. This will
give your PC an IP address that is on the same subnet as the drive. Windows will know to direct any
traffic intended for the drive’s IP address to this interface card.
6.
Next, enter the subnet mask as “255.255.255.0”.
7.
Be sure to leave “Default gateway” blank. This will prevent your PC from looking for a router on
this subnet.
8. Because you are connected directly to the drive, anytime the drive is not powered on your PC
may annoy you with a small message bubble in the corner of your screen saying “The network cable is
unplugged.”
261
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Option 3: Use Two Network Interface Cards (NICs)
LAN
NIC1
PC
NIC2
DRIVE
This technique allows you to keep your PC connected to your LAN, but keeps the drive off the LAN,
preventing possible IP conflicts or excessive traffic.
1.
If you use a desktop PC and have a spare card slot, install a second NIC and connect it directly to the drive using a CAT5 cable. You don’t need a special “crossover cable”; the drive will automatically
detect the direct connection and make the necessary physical layer changes.
2.
If you use a laptop and only connect to your LAN using wireless networking, you can use the
built-in RJ45 Ethernet connection as your second NIC.
3.
Set the IP address on the drive to “10.10.10.10” by setting the rotary switch at “0”.
4.
To set the IP address of the second NIC:
a.
On Windows XP, right click on “My Network Places” and select properties.
b.
On Windows 7, click Computer. Scroll down the left pane until you see “Network”. Right
click and select properties. Select “Change adapter settings”
5.
You should see an icon for your newly instated NIC. Right click again and select properties.
a.
Scroll down until you see “Internet Properties (TCP/IP)”. Select this item and click the
Properties button.
b.
On Windows 7 and Vista, look for “(TCP/IPv4)”
6.
Select the option “Use the following IP address”. Then enter the address “10.10.10.11”. This will
give your PC an IP address that is on the same subnet as the drive. Windows will know to direct any
traffic intended for the drive’s IP address to this interface card.
7.
Next, enter the subnet mask as “255.255.255.0”. Be sure to leave “Default gateway” blank. This
will prevent your PC from looking for a router on this subnet.
8.
Because you are connected directly to the drive, anytime the drive is not powered on your PC
will annoy you with a small message bubble in the corner of your screen saying “The network cable is
unplugged.”
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
262
Host Command Reference
ARP Tables - The Ghost in the Machine
ARP, which stands for “Address Resolution Protocol”, is a low-level router function that enables traffic to be
correctly routed on the Ethernet network. It is handled automatically by the router and is normally transparent to
the user.
All network devices need to have two things: a MAC ID and an IP address.
•
•
The MAC ID is a unique identifier that is assigned to the chip on the network interface device. You
can think of it as a network serial number.
The IP address is just that - an address. Like a street address on your house. IP addresses can be
changed - MAC ID’s cannot.
The following diagram shows a basic network. Note that each device has both a MAC ID and IP address.
The router maintains an ARP table, which is really just a list that matches MAC ID’s to IP addresses. An entry is
created for every device on the network.
ARP TABLE
MAC ID: 08:A4:C3:10:0E:00 <-->
MAC ID: A2:FB:3D:21:7A:01 <-->
MAC ID: 03:C8:11:2B:DE:02 <-->
IP: 192.168.1.100
IP: 192.168.1.101
IP: 192.168.1.102
n
ree
EN
=G d
GR RD
GR =ReID GRE
1 RD
RD
SOL GR-+ + 2 2 RDRD
GR- GR
1 GR + + 1 3 RDRD
1 GR
2 GR + + 4 4 RDRD
2 GR
EDD
1 GR + + 5 5 RDRD
1 GR
ABL
ED)
BLE
2 GR + + 6 6 RDRD
DIS
LL
1 GR
ABL
ENA
2 GR + + 7
STAIT
1 GR
TOR
(DIS P
2 GR
MO TOR
VE TEM
1
H
MO TOR LIM ITMO R
T
SE
MO
LIM
NAL
’T OVEE HIG
CCW
LOW
REN S PHA
CW
SIG
CAN VETAG E
DRI
TAG CUROHM
TOR R
VOL
R
MO ODE OR
VOL
OVE TOR
N ENC ERR
MO
M
OPE
BAD
COM
E
L
V+
VA+
A-
B+
B-
MAC ID: A2:FB:3D:21:7A:01
IP: 192.168.1.101
X8
X8 /
CC
X7 / CC
X7 / W WLIM
/ CWCW LIM IT
LIM
LIM IT IT+ 25
IT+ Y4
24
Y +5
Y4
23
CO V GN 22
Y2 Y3 MM OU D +
13
21
Y1 / MO/ FA ON T
12
20
11
19
/ BR TIOUL
10
T
18
GN
AK N
17
9
X1 D
E
16
8
X1 /
15
7
X2 / ST
14
6
X2 / ST EP
5
X / DI EP +
4
X3 CO DI R+ 3
X4 / MM R 2
X5 / EN ON
1
X6 / AL AB
/ CCCW AR LE
AN
JO M
AN AL WJ G RE
AL OG OG SE
T
OG
IN
IN 2
1
D
C
o
d
es
ST
EP
DR M
IV OT
ER OR
Se
ria
l No
S
T
5
-Q
MAC ID: 08:A4:C3:10:0E:00
IP: 192.168.1.100
MAC ID: 03:C8:11:2B:DE:02
IP: 192.168.1.102
It should be noted that computers maintain a local ARP table as well, tracking other devices they’ve
interacted with. This is an important point because the ARP table on a PC will typically refresh more frequently
than those on a network router or switch.
So why do we care? Your application will probably require changing the IP address of a drive. The ARP
table must then be refreshed to show the same MAC ID with a different IP address. This is usually not an issue if
the drive is directly connected to the PC used to configure it, because the local ARP table will likely refresh quickly
enough to catch the new IP address and re-establish a connection.
The problem comes when the drive is connected through a router during configuration. In this scenario it is
entirely possible for IP address changes to happen more frequently than the ARP table can refresh itself. Most
routers do not allow users to refresh the ARP table directly, as this poses a significant network security risk. The
router must actually be rebooted to force a reset of the ARP table and allow a connection with the new IP address.
Obviously this is not an ideal solution.
For this reason we recommend that all configuration be performed while directly connected to a PC. Do not
use a router for drive configuration. Once an IP address is assigned the drive may be placed on the plant network
without worry.
NOTE: If you find that you are changing IP addresses often and the connection becomes unreliable, it may
be necessary to force a refresh of your PC’s local ARP table. This can be accomplished by opening a command
window and using the command arp -d. You must have administrator privileges on your PC to do this.
263
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Configuring Your Drive
Three Windows programs are available from Applied Motion Products for use with our Ethernet drives.
These programs are included on the CD that accompanies each drive and the most recent version is always
available at www.applied-motion.com.
ST Configurator is used to configure your stepper drive and motor. It can also be used to change the
selection of drive IP addresses. ST Configurator includes extensive built-in help screens and manuals.
Quick Tuner is used to configure and tune servo drives. The Quick Tuner Manual is automatically installed in
the Applied Motion Products program menu when you install Quick Tuner.
Q Programmer will be needed if you want to embed programs in the non-volatile memory of your drive,
either to run automatically at power up or to be triggered by commands sent from a host.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
264
Host Command Reference
Creating Your Own Application
To create your own application, you will need to choose a programming language, learn how SCL commands
and responses are encapsulated in UDP packets, and learn to use your programming language’s interface to the
network.
UDP Packet Format
eSCL is based on Applied Motion’s Serial Command Language (SCL), an ASCII-based language with roots in RS232 and RS-485 communication. eSCL drives support the full SCL and Q command sets, and utilize the speed
and reliability of Ethernet. Commands and responses are encapsulated in the payload of User Datagram Protocol
(UDP) packets, and are transmitted using standard Ethernet hardware and standard TCL/IP stacks.
For details on the features and capabilities of SCL and Q, please refer to the Host Command Reference Manual.
Sending Commands to a Drive
An eSCL UDP packet consists of three parts, the header (binary 07), the SCL string (a sequence of ASCII encoded characters) and the SCL terminator (ASCII carriage return, 13)
header
SCL string
<cr>
Example: Sending “RV”
•
•
•
•
SCL Header = 07 (two bytes)
R = ASCII 82
V = ASCII 86
<cr> (ASCII carriage return) = 13
header
0
“RV”
7
<cr>
82
86
13
Receiving Responses from a Drive
A typical response to “RV” would be “RV=103<cr>” which would be formatted as
header
0
“RV=103”
7
82
86
<cr>
61
49
48
51
265
13
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Example Programs
Both example programs are available for download at www.applied-motion.com/example_code. You should
still read this section so that you understand the key elements of the code and what tradeoffs you may encounter.
Visual Basic 6
Even though VB6 is an older language, its refreshing simplicity makes it a compelling choice for quickly
developing an Ethernet application.
To communicate over Ethernet from VB6, you’ll need the Winsock control (MSWINSCK.OCX), which is
included in the Professional and Enterprise editions of the language. To configure an instance of Winsock, you
must specify the protocol as UDP, choose a local port number, and set the remote IP address and port number to
match the drive. In the code example below, 7775 is the port of the drive. driveIPaddress is the IP address of the
drive (“10.10.10.10” or “192.168.0.130” for example). 7777 is the port of the PC.
Winsock1.RemotePort = 7775
Winsock1.RemoteHost = driveIPaddress
Winsock1.Protocol = sckUDPProtocol
Winsock1.Bind 7777
// if port 7777 is in use by another application, you will get an error.
// that error should be trapped using the On Error statement
// and an alternate port should be chosen.
Sending “RV” command:
Dim myPacket(0 to 4) as Byte ‘ declare a byte array just large enough
myPacket(0) = 0 myPacket(1) = 7
myPacket(2) = “R”
myPacket(3) = “V”
myPacket(4) = vbCR
Winsock1.SendData myPacket
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
‘
‘
‘
‘
‘
first byte of SCL opcode
second byte of SCL opcode
R
V
carriage return
266
Host Command Reference
To receive a response, you will need to place some code in the Winsock_DataArrival event. This
event is automatically declared as soon as you add a Winsock control to your form. The DataArrival event will
automatically trigger each time a packet is received. The code below extracts the SCL response from the UDP
payload and displays it in a message box.
Private Sub Winsock1_DataArrival(ByVal bytesTotal As Long)
Dim udpData() As Byte, n As Integer
Dim hexbyte As String, packetID As Long, SCLrx As String
Winsock1.GetData udpData
‘ remotehost gets clobbered when packet rec’d,
‘ next line fixes it
Winsock1.RemoteHost = Winsock1.RemoteHostIP
‘ first 16 bits of packet are the ID (opcode)
If UBound(udpData) >= 1 Then
packetID = 256 * udpData(0) + udpData(1)
If packetID = 7 then ‘ SCL response
SCLrx = “”
For n = 2 To UBound(udpData)
SCLrx = SCLrx & Chr(udpData(n))
Next n
MsgBox SCLrx
End If
End If
End Sub
C#.NET
The .NET languages are Microsoft’s modern, object oriented Windows application building tools and include
robust Ethernet support. We present this example in C#.
Make sure your project includes this line, providing access to an Ethernet socket:
using System.Net.Sockets;
In your form header you must declare a UdpClient object and create an instance, which can be done in
the same line. The local port number is included in the “new UdpClient” call. This is the port number that will be
reserved on the PC for your application.
static UdpClient udpClient = new UdpClient(7777);
To open the connection, invoke the Connect method, specifying the drive’s IP address and port number:
udpClient.Connect(“192.168.0.130”, 7775);
To send “RV” to the drive:
//create a string loaded with the SCL command
Byte[] SCLstring = Encoding.ASCII.GetBytes(“RV”);
// create a byte array that will be used for the actual
// transmission
Byte[] sendBytes = new Byte[SCLstring.Length + 3];
// insert opcode (07 is used for all SCL commands)
sendBytes[0] = 0;
sendBytes[1] = 7;
// copy string to the byte array
System.Array.Copy(SCLstring, 0, sendBytes, 2, SCLstring.Length);
// insert terminator
sendBytes[sendBytes.Length - 1] = 13; // CR
267
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
// send it to the drive
udpClient.Send(sendBytes, sendBytes.Length);
Getting responses back from the drive in C# is a more complicated than VB6. You have two choices: poll for
a response or create a callback function that will provide a true receive event.
Polling is easier to code but less efficient because you must either sit in a loop waiting for an expected
response or run a timer to periodically check for data coming in. Since the choice depends on your programming
style and the requirements of your application, we preset both techniques.
Polling for an incoming packet
The same UdpClient object that you use to send packets can be used to retrieve incoming responses from
the drive. The Available property will be greater than zero if a packet has been received. To retrieve a packet,
assign the Receive property to a Byte array. You must create an IPEndPoint object in order to use the Receive
property.
private void UDPpoll()
{
}
// you can call this from a timer event or a loop
if (udpClient.Available > 0) // is there a packet ready?
{
IPEndPoint RemoteIpEndPoint = new IPEndPoint(IPAddress.Any, 0);
try
{
// Get the received packet. Receive method blocks
// until a message returns on this socket from a remote host,
// so always check .Available to see if a packet is ready.
Byte[] receiveBytes = udpClient.Receive(ref RemoteIpEndPoint);
// strip opcode
Byte[] SCLstring = new byte[receiveBytes.Length - 2];
for (int i = 0; i < SCLstring.Length; i++)
SCLstring[i] = receiveBytes[i + 2];
string returnData = Encoding.ASCII.GetString(SCLstring);
AddToHistory(returnData);
}
catch (Exception ex)
{
// put your error handler here
Console.WriteLine(ex.ToString());
}
}
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
268
Host Command Reference
Creating a receive event using a call back function
First, create a function to handle incoming packets. This function must contain two local objects: a
UdpClient and an IPEndPoint. The call back function will be passed an IAsyncResult object that contains a
reference to the UDP connection. The local IPEndPoint object is passed to the UDPClient’s EndReceive property
to retrieve the packet.
public void ReceiveCallback(IAsyncResult ar)
{
int opcode;
UdpClient u = (UdpClient)((UdpState)(ar.AsyncState)).u;
IPEndPoint e = (IPEndPoint)((UdpState)(ar.AsyncState)).e;
Byte[] receiveBytes = u.EndReceive(ar, ref e);
// get opcode
opcode = 256 * receiveBytes[0] + receiveBytes[1];
if (opcode == 7) // SCL response
{
string receiveString = Encoding.ASCII.GetString(receiveBytes);
Byte[] SCLstring = new Byte[receiveBytes.Length - 2];
// remove opcode
System.Array.Copy(receiveBytes, 2, SCLstring, 0, SCLstring.
Length);
receiveString = Encoding.ASCII.GetString(SCLstring);
AddToHistory(receiveString);
}
else if (opcode == 99) // ping response
{
MessageBox.Show(“Ping!”, “eSCL Utility”, MessageBoxButtons.OK,
MessageBoxIcon.Information);
}
}
The call back function will not be called unless it is “registered” with the UdpClient object using the
BeginReceive method, as shown below. StartRecvCallback can be called from the Form Load event. It must also
be re-registered each time it is called (this is to prevent recursion), which is most easily accomplished by making a
call to StartRecvCallback each time you send a packet.
private void StartRecvCallback()
{
UdpState s = new UdpState();
s.e = new IPEndPoint(IPAddress.Any, 0);
s.u = udpClient;
udpClient.BeginReceive(new AsyncCallback(ReceiveCallback), s);
}
This example requires that you declare a class called UdpState as described below.
class UdpState
{
public UdpClient u;
public IPEndPoint e;
}
As if this event driven technique wasn’t quirky enough, it also creates a threading error unless the following
statement in included in the form load event
// this must be so for callbacks which operate in a different thread
CheckForIllegalCrossThreadCalls = false;
269
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Further Reading
The following materials can be downloaded from www. Applied-motion.com.
•
The eSCL Utility will help you get familiar with the SCL language.
•
ST Configuration Ethernet is needed to configure the ST5-QE and ST10-QE step motor drives. This
application also includes extensive help screens.
•
QuickTuner is used to configure and tune SV7 servo drives. . Quick Tuner also includes extensive help
screens.
•
Visual Basic and C# example projects can be downloaded from the software page.
To learn more about networking using Ethernet, we recommend reading Sams Teach Yourself TCP/IP in 24
Hours, available from amazon.com and other fine booksellers.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
270
Host Command Reference
Appendix H: EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP products, designated by the letters “IP” in the model number, provide access to Q and SCL
functionality over EtherNet/IP networks. This appendix details which commands are available and how to
encapsulate them into EtherNet/IP and CIP packets. It is assumed that the user has a working knowledge
of EtherNet/IP as it relates to the controller being used, as this chapter will not explain general EtherNet/IP
implementation details.
AMP offers both Class 1 and Class 3 type connections, each of which are useful for specific tasks. Class 1
connections are useful for high bandwidth tasks such as monitoring specific functions of the drive, while Class 3
connections are used for sending targeted messages to directly control the drive. The latter is used to implement
Explicit Messaging.
Note that with EtherNet/IP, all data direction notation assumes the point of view of the network. In this way,
data sent by the drive to the controller is referred to as an Input, while data sent by the controller down to the drive
is referred to as an Output.
The Class 1 Connection
Class 1 connections use Connection Points, which can be thought of as addresses with predefined
functions. To communicate with an Applied Motion drive using a Class 1 connection, the following connection
points are available.
Object ID
Function
Notes
Hex
Decimal
0x64
100
Input Assembly
0x66
102
Configuration Assembly
0x67
103
Heartbeat Input Only Assembly
Zero-length message that tells the controller the
drive is still active.
0x68
104
Heartbeat Listen Only Assembly
Zero-length message that tells the drive the
controller is still active.
Static Assembly Object for monitoring drive status &
behavior (see below for details)
Specifies parameters such as packet interval, data
length.
271
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Input Assembly (0x64)
This connection point is used to monitor the drive’s behavior. The 32 bytes of data sent by the drive are as
follows:
Field Descriptor
Length
(bytes)
Sequence #
2
IP Address (Encoded in Internet Format)
4
Status Word
2
Alarm Word
2
Supply Voltage
2
Actual Current
2
Drive Temperature
2
Encoder Position (32-bit signed)
4
Absolute Position (32-bit signed)
4
Actual Velocity
2
Input Status (extended)
2
Input Status (main board)
2
Output Status
2
The data transmitted by the drive is sent in Little Endian format, so it will likely require rearranging before
use.
IP addresses said to be stored in “Internet Format” are simply encoded into hexadecimal notation and
rearranged into Little Endian format. Each octet has a value from 0-255, and can be represented by a single byte.
Standard IP address:
192.168.0.40
Convert to Hexadecimal:
192 = 0xC0
168 = 0xA8
0 = 0x00
40 = 0x28
Rearrange into Little Endian Format:
C0 A8 00 28 -> 28 00 A8 C0
Converted IP address:
192.168.0.40 -> 0x2800A8C0
Note that all numbers are sent in Little Endian format, so the process for converting is the same for each
piece of data.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
272
Host Command Reference
Thus, an example message might be organized as follows:
Raw:E0032800A8C019000000E90100003802BAFCFFFFC72A0600C3FFFF40000F0F00
Grouped:[E003] [2800A8C0] [1900] [0000] [E901] [0000] [3802] [BAFCFFFF] [C72A0600] [C3FF] [FF40] [000F] [0F00]
The data should be decoded as follows. Where possible, the values have been converted to humanreadable units. Please refer to the appropriate command page for further information. Note that Encoder Position,
Absolute Position and Velocity are signed integers, and negative values will be represented in 2’s complement
form.
Sequence Number:0xE003
IP Address:
0x2800A8C0 = 0xC0A80028
= 192.168.0.40
Status (see SC command):
0x1900
= 0x0019
= 0000 0000 0001 1001
Alarm (see AL command):
0x0000
Voltage:0xE901= 0x01E9= 489 (48.9 V)
Current (see IC command):
0x0000
Temp (see IT0 command):
0x3802
= 0x238
= 568 (56.8 degrees C)
Encoder Position (see EP command):
0xBAFCFFFF
= 0xFFFFFCBA
= -838
Absolute Position (see SP command):
0xC72A0600
= 0x00062AC7
= 404167
Velocity (see IV command):
0XC3FF
= 0xFFC3
= -61
Extended Inputs (see IS command):
0xFF40
= 0x40FF
Main Board Inputs: (see ISX command):
0x000F
= 0x0F00
Outputs (see IO command):
0x0F00
= 0x000F
Configuration Assembly (0x66)
This connection point is used by the EtherNet/IP protocol to configure various parameters including the
Receive Packet Interval (RPI), data size, etc. It must be specified by the user.
Heartbeat Input Only Assembly (0x67)
This connection point represents a zero-length assembly object whose purpose is not to send data, but
rather to simply inform the controller that the drive is still active and producing data.
Heartbeat Listen Only Assembly (0x68)
This connection point represents a zero-length assembly object whose purpose is not to send data, but
rather to simply inform the drive that the controller is still active and receiving data.
273
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
The Class 3 connection
The Class 3 connection allows for Explicit Messaging. The
service code of this custom profile is 0x3C and the class code is
0x64.
In addition to the custom profile, the following standard objects
and services are implemented:
• Message Router Object (Volume 1, Section 5-3)
• Connection Manager (Volume 1, Section 5-7)
• Connection Configuration (Volume 1, Section 5-50)
• Port (Volume 1, Section 3-7)
• Ethernet Link Object (Volume 2, Chapter 5)
• TCP/IP Object (Volume 2, Chapter 5)
• Assembly (Volume 1, Section 5-37)
• CIP Sync Object (Volume 1, Section 5-47.7)
Documentation can be found in the following ODVA
specifications (specific sections are noted above next to each object
name):
Point of Interest
To check the drive’s profile code and ARM
firmware version, use the standard “Get Attribute
Single” service with the following parameters:
Service
0x0E
Class
0x64
Instance
0x00
Attribute
0x01
To communicate with the drive via Explicit
Messages, use the Vendor-Specific profile service
with the following parameters:
Message Type
CIP Generic
Service Type
Custom
Service
0x3C
Volume One: Common Industrial Protocol (CIP™), edition 3.8
Class
0x64
Volume Two: EtherNet/IP™ Adaptation of CIP, edition 1.9
Instance
0x01
Attribute
0x01
Services
Name
Profile Code & ARM Firmware Version
Example response message: 00.75.00.07.41.5F.00.01.03.4A
0x00 = ARM (Ethernet board) firmware major revision, most significant byte
0x75 = ARM (Ethernet board) firmware major revision, least significant byte
0x00 = ARM (Ethernet board) firmware minor revision, most significant byte
0x07 = ARM (Ethernet board) firmware minor revision, least significant byte
0x41 = ASCII ‘A’, the profile code
0x5F = 95, Model Number (see table below)
0x00 = Sub-model Number (see table below)
0x01 = 1, Drive firmware major revision number (1.xx)
0x03 = 3, Drive firmware minor revision number (x.03)
0x4A = ASCII ‘J’, Drive firmware revision letter (x.xxJ)
Service
Class
Instance
Attribute
0x0E
0x64
0x00
0x01
0x64
0x01
0x01
(“Get Attribute
Single”)
ARM firmware : [major rev] . [minor rev] = [0x0075] . [0x0007] = 117.07
Vendor-Specific Device Profile A
0x3C
Drive Model Number Identification Table
Model ID
Sub-Model ID
Hex [Dec]
Hex [Dec]
0x0F [15]
--
0x11 [17]
0x13 [19]
0X32 [50]
Model ID
Sub-Model ID
Hex [Dec]
Hex [Dec]
SV7-IP
0X32 [50]
0x0C [12]
--
ST5-IP
0x53 [83]
--
STAC5-IP
--
ST10-IP
0x59 [89]
--
STAC5-IP-220
0x09 [9]
STM23Q-2EN (future)
0x5F [95]
--
SVAC3-IP
0X32 [50]
0x0A [10]
STM23Q-2EE (future)
0x65 [101]
--
SVAC3-IP-220
0X32 [50]
0x0B [11]
STM23Q-3EN (future)
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Drive Model Number
274
Drive Model Number
STM23Q-3EE (future)
Host Command Reference
Explicit Message Types
Two types of explicit messages can be sent to Applied Motion EtherNet/IP drives. Type 1 messages include
most of the buffered SCL and Q commands. However, unlike SCL and Q commands that are sent over RS-232,
RS-485 and standard Ethernet, Type 1 messages do not support queries. “Immediate” SCL commands cannot be
encapsuated in Type 1 messages.
Type 2 messages provide additional functionality not available with Type 1 messages, including the ability
to read back settings and registers. Both types can be sent over a Class 3 connection, or they can be sent to the
Unconnected Message Manager (UCMM).
Both command message types result in a response message even when no data is requested.
All numerical values are in two’s complement. Integers are sent big endian (most significant byte first).
For detailed SCL and Q command descriptions, please see the main section of this manual. When reading
the command descriptions in the main part of this manual, please be advised that the EtherNet/IP encapsulation
often requires that different units, and a different range of acceptable values, be used.
Type 1 Message Format
See Table 1 for the complete list of commands. The response message will always echo back the opcode
and register code (if present). Also contained in the response message is the drive’s status code, a bit pattern
that indicates useful information such as whether there is a fault or if the motor is in motion. For more information,
please see the section on the SC command earlier in this manual.
Note: All numerical values are in two’s complement. Integers are sent big endian (most significant byte first).
Command Message Format:
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
B0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
B1
Command Axis Number = 0x0
B2
Register, I/O or other code here for some commands (see Table 1, page 275). 0 for all others.
B3
Opcode
B4
Parameter1
B5
Parameter2
B6
Parameter3
B7
Parameter4
Command Message Type = 0x1
Response Message Format:
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
B0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
B1
Response Axis Number = 0x0
B2
Register code for commands QR, RR, RW and RX, 0 for all others
B3
Opcode
B4
Status Code MSB
B5
Status Code LSB
B6
Unused = 0
B7
Unused = 0
Response Message Type = 0x1
275
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Type 1 Message Examples
Example 1: SCL commands required for Point to Point move
AC100
set acceleration rate to 100 rev/sec/sec (6000 rpm/sec)
opcode
0x001E
from Table 1
operand 0x258 units are 10 rpm/sec, so 6000 rpm/sec is represented by 600 decimal = 258 hex
Type 1 Command Message Payload
Type 1 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
1
message type
byte 1
1
message type
byte 2
0
unused
byte 2
0
unused
byte 3
1E
opcode
byte 3
1E
opcode
byte 4
0
unused
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
0
unused
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
2
operand MSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
58
operand LSB
byte 7
0
not used
DE100
set deceleration rate to 100 rev/sec/sec (6000 rpm/sec)
opcode
0x001Ffrom Table 1
operand 0x258 units are 10 rpm/sec, so 6000/sec is represented by 600 decimal = 258 hex
Type 1 Command Message Payload
Type 1 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
1
message type
byte 1
1
message type
byte 2
0
unused
byte 2
0
unused
byte 3
1F
opcode
byte 3
1F
opcode
byte 4
0
unused
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
0
unused
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
2
operand MSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
58
operand LSB
byte 7
0
not used
VE5
set velocity to 5 rev/sec (300 rpm)
opcode
0x001Dfrom Table 1
operand 0x4B0 units are 0.25 rpm, so 300 rpm is represented by 1200 decimal = 4B0 hex
Type 1 Command Message Payload
Type 1 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
1
message type
byte 1
1
message type
byte 2
0
unused
byte 2
0
unused
byte 3
1D
opcode
byte 3
1D
opcode
byte 4
0
unused
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
0
unused
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
4
operand MSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
B0
operand LSB
byte 7
0
not used
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
276
Host Command Reference
DI100000 set move distance to 100,000 steps
opcode
0x00B6from Table 1
operand 0x186A0
units are steps, so 100000 is represented by 186A0 hex
Type 1 Command Message Payload
Type 1 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
1
message type
byte 1
1
message type
byte 2
0
not used
byte 2
0
not used
byte 3
B6
opcode
byte 3
B6
opcode
byte 4
0
not used
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
1
operand MSB
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
86
operand 2nd LSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
A0
operand LSB
byte 7
0
not used
FL
start the “feed to length” move
opcode
0x0066from Table 1
operand 0
no operand
Type 1 Command Message Payload
Type 1 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
1
message type
byte 1
1
message type
byte 2
0
unused
byte 2
0
unused
byte 3
66
opcode
byte 3
66
opcode
byte 4
0
not used
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
0
not used
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
0
not used
byte 7
0
not used
Example 2: setting an output
SO2L
set output 2 low (closed)
opcode
0x008B
from Table 1
operand 0x4CB2
LSB is “2” = 0xB2. MSB is “L” = 0x4C (see IO Encoding Table)
Type 1 Command Message Payload
Type 1 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
1
message type
byte 1
1
message type
byte 2
0
not used
byte 2
0
not used
byte 3
8B
opcode
byte 3
8B
opcode
byte 4
0
not used
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
0
not used
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
4C
operand MSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
B2
operand LSB
byte 7
0
not used
277
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Example 3: enabling the motor
MEmotor enable
opcode
0x009F
from Table 1
operand 0
no operand
Type 1 Command Message Payload
Type 1 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
1
message type
byte 1
1
message type
byte 2
0
unused
byte 2
0
unused
byte 3
9F
opcode
byte 3
9F
opcode
byte 4
0
not used
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
0
not used
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
0
not used
byte 7
0
not used
Example 4: SCL commands required for Feed to Sensor move
AC200
set acceleration rate to 200 rev/sec/sec (12000 rpm/sec)
opcode
0x001E
from Table 1
operand 0x4B0 units are 10 rpm/sec, so 12000 rpm/sec is represented by 1200 decimal = 4B0 hex
Type 1 Command Message Payload
Type 1 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
1
message type
byte 1
1
message type
byte 2
0
unused
byte 2
0
unused
byte 3
1E
opcode
byte 3
1E
opcode
byte 4
0
unused
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
0
unused
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
4
operand MSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
B0
operand LSB
byte 7
0
not used
DE150
set deceleration rate to 150 rev/sec/sec (9000 rpm/sec)
opcode
0x001Ffrom Table 1
operand 0x384 units are 10 rpm/sec, so 9000/sec is represented by 900 decimal = 384 hex
Type 1 Command Message Payload
Type 1 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
1
message type
byte 1
1
message type
byte 2
0
unused
byte 2
0
unused
byte 3
1F
opcode
byte 3
1F
opcode
byte 4
0
unused
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
0
unused
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
3
operand MSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
84
operand LSB
byte 7
0
not used
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
278
Host Command Reference
VE3
set velocity to 3 rev/sec (180 rpm)
opcode
0x001Dfrom Table 1
operand 0x2D0 units are 0.25 rpm, so 180 rpm is represented by 720 decimal = 2D0 hex
Type 1 Command Message Payload
Type 1 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
1
message type
byte 1
1
message type
byte 2
0
unused
byte 2
0
unused
byte 3
1D
opcode
byte 3
1D
opcode
byte 4
0
unused
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
0
unused
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
2
operand MSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
D0
operand LSB
byte 7
0
not used
DI5000
set move distance to 5,000 steps (this is the distance beyond the sensor where motor will stop)
opcode
0x00B6from Table 1
operand 0x1388units are steps, so 5000 is represented by 1388 hex
Type 1 Command Message Payload
Type 1 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
1
message type
byte 1
1
message type
byte 2
0
unused
byte 2
0
unused
byte 3
B6
opcode
byte 3
B6
opcode
byte 4
0
operand MSB
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
0
operand 2nd MSB
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
13
operand 2nd LSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
88
operand LSB
byte 7
0
not used
FS2R
start the “feed to sensor” move, stop 5000 steps after input 2 rising edge
opcode
0x006Bfrom Table 1
operand 0x52B2LSB is “2” = 0xB2. MSB is “R” = 0x52 (see IO Encoding Table)
Type 1 Command Message Payload
Type 1 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
1
message type
byte 1
1
message type
byte 2
0
unused
byte 2
0
unused
byte 3
6B
opcode
byte 3
6B
opcode
byte 4
0
not used
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
0
not used
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
52
condition (R)
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
B2
ionum (2)
byte 7
0
not used
279
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Type 2 Message Format
Message Type 2 commands provide functionality that is not available with Type 1 commands. This is the only
way to read back information from the drive. All Type 2 commands require and 8 bit opcode and an 8 bit operand.
Return values include a 16 or 32 bit response, as appropriate. The response message will always echo back the opcode and operand from the command message.
Also contained in the response message is the drive’s status code, unless other information is requested (e.g.
parameter read command). The status code is a bit pattern that indicates useful information such as whether
there is a fault or if the motor is in motion. For more information, please see the section on the SC command
earlier in this manual. Command Message Format:
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
B0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
B1
Command Axis Number = 0x0
B2
Opcode (see Table 2)
B3
Operand (see Table 2)
B4
Data MSB
B5
Data LSB [Data 2nd MSB for opcode 0x9E]
B6
Unused = 0 [Data 2nd LSB for opcode 0x9E]
B7
Unused = 0 [Data LSB for opcode 0x9E]
Command Message Type = 0x2
Response Message Format:
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
B0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
Reserved
=0
B1
Response Axis Number = 0x0
B2
Opcode (see Table 2)
B3
Operand (see Table 2)
B4
Status MSB [Data MSB for opcodes 0x84, 0x88, 0x89, 0x9F]
B5
Status LSB [Data LSB for opcodes 0x84, 0x88, 0x89] [Data 2nd MSB for opcode 0x9F]
B6
Unused = 0 [Data 2nd LSB for opcode 0x9F]
B7
Unused = 0 [Data LSB for opcode 0x9F]
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Response Message Type = 0x2
280
Host Command Reference
Type 2 Message Examples
Example 1: parameter write
AC100
set acceleration rate to 100 rev/sec/sec (6000 rpm/sec)
opcode
0x83
parameter write, from Table 2
operand
0x1E
from Table 3
data
0x258 units are 10 rpm/sec, so 6000/sec is represented by 600 decimal = 258 hex
Type 2 Command Message Payload
Type 2 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
2
message type
byte 1
2
message type
byte 2
83
opcode
byte 2
83
opcode
byte 3
1E
operand
byte 3
1E
operand
byte 4
2
data MSB
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
58
data LSB
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
0
not used
byte 7
0
not used
Example 2: parameter read
AC
read back the acceleration rate
opcode
0x84
parameter read, from Table 2
operand
0x1E
from Table 3
return value
0x258 units are 10 rpm/sec, so 6000/sec is represented by 600 decimal = 258 hex
Type 2 Command Message Payload
Type 2 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
2
message type
byte 1
2
message type
byte 2
84
opcode
byte 2
84
opcode
byte 3
1E
operand
byte 3
1E
operand
byte 4
0
not used
byte 4
2
read data MSB
byte 5
0
not used
byte 5
58
read data LSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
0
not used
byte 7
0
not used
281
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Example 3: read absolute position
opcode
0x88
read 32 bit abs posn/enc posn, from Table 2
operand 1
from Table 2, indicates abs posn
return value
0x87654321
Type 2 Command Message Payload
Type 2 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
2
message type
byte 1
2
message type
byte 2
88
opcode
byte 2
88
opcode
byte 3
1
operand
byte 3
1
operand
byte 4
0
not used
byte 4
87
read data MSB
byte 5
0
not used
byte 5
65
read data 2nd MSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 6
43
read data 2nd LSB
byte 7
0
not used
byte 7
21
read data LSB
Example 4: read encoder position
opcode
0x88
read 32 bit abs posn/enc posn, from Table 2
operand 0
from Table 2, indicates enc posn
return value
0x12345678
Type 2 Command Message Payload
Type 2 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
2
message type
byte 1
2
message type
byte 2
88
opcode
byte 2
88
opcode
byte 3
0
operand
byte 3
0
operand
byte 4
0
not used
byte 4
12
read data MSB
byte 5
0
not used
byte 5
34
read data 2nd MSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 6
56
read data 2nd LSB
byte 7
0
not used
byte 7
78
read data LSB
Example 5: read Q user register 3
opcode
0x9F
read 32 bit Q register, from Table 2
operand 0x33
from Reg Code Table, indicates register ‘3’
return value
0x12345678
Type 2 Command Message Payload
Type 2 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
2
message type
byte 1
2
message type
byte 2
9F
opcode
byte 2
9F
opcode
byte 3
33
operand
byte 3
33
operand
byte 4
0
not used
byte 4
12
read data MSB
byte 5
0
not used
byte 5
34
read data 2nd MSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 6
56
read data 2nd LSB
byte 7
0
not used
byte 7
78
read data LSB
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
282
Host Command Reference
Example 6: read Q register D
opcode
0x9F
read 32 bit Q register, from Table 2
operand 0x44
from Reg Code Table, indicates register ‘D’
return value
0x12345678
Type 2 Command Message Payload
Type 2 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
2
message type
byte 1
2
message type
byte 2
9F
opcode
byte 2
9F
opcode
byte 3
44
operand
byte 3
44
operand
byte 4
0
not used
byte 4
12
read data MSB
byte 5
0
not used
byte 5
34
read data 2nd MSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 6
56
read data 2nd LSB
byte 7
0
not used
byte 7
78
read data LSB
Example 7: write Q register D
opcode
0x9E
operand 0x44
read 32 bit Q register, from Table 2
from Reg Code Table, indicates register ‘D’
data0x12345678
Type 2 Command Message Payload
Type 2 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
2
message type
byte 1
2
message type
byte 2
9E
opcode
byte 2
9E
opcode
byte 3
44
operand
byte 3
44
operand
byte 4
12
data MSB
byte 4
?
status code MSB
byte 5
34
data 2nd MSB
byte 5
?
status code LSB
byte 6
56
data 2nd LSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
78
data LSB
byte 7
0
not used
Example 8: Disable IEEE-1588 protocol (for Class 1 connections)
opcode
0xFE IEEE-1588 control, from Table 2
operand 0x1
Disable IEEE-1588 protocol. (0x0 will enable IEEE-1588)
data0x0
Type 2 Command Message Payload
Type 2 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
2
message type
byte 1
2
message type
byte 2
FE
opcode
byte 2
FE
opcode
byte 3
1
operand
byte 3
0
operand
byte 4
0
not used
byte 4
?
status code MSB
byte 5
0
not used
byte 5
?
status code LSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
0
not used
byte 7
0
not used
283
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Table 1: Message Type 1 Command List
Range ST5 /
ST10 / STAC5
Units
1..32000
10 rpm/sec
AM
MAX_ACCEL,
16
0
accel rate
1..32000
10 rpm/sec
AX
ALARM_RESET
BA
0
CJ
START_JOGGING
96
0
DC
SET_CHNG_DISTANCE
B7
0
32 bit distance or position
+/-2,147,483,647
steps
DE
P_TO_P_DECEL,
1F
0
decel rate
1..32000
10 rpm/sec
DI
SET_REL_DISTANCE
B6
0
32 bit distance or position
+/-2,147,483,647
steps
EF
ENCODER_FUNCTION
D6
0
function
0,1,2 or 4
0 = Encoder function off
1 = Stall Detection
2 = Stall Prevention
4 = Stall prevention w/ time-out
EG
Steps/rev / 2
26
0
steps/rev
100..25600
steps/rev divided by 2
EP
ENCODER_POSITION
98
0
+/-2,147,483,647
counts
FC
P_TO_P_CHANGE
6D
0
FD
feed to double sensor
69
0
FE
FOLLOW ENCODER
CC 0
FL
feed to length (relative move) 66
0
FM
Feed to Sensor with mask
distance
6A
FO
feed and set output
FP
Parameter 4
accel rate
Parameter 3
0
Parameter 2
1E
Parameter 1
Reg code
P_TO_P_ACCEL,
Description
AC
Command
opcode (hex)
For detailed SCL and Q command descriptions, please see the main section of this manual. When reading
the command descriptions in the main part of this manual, please be advised that the EtherNet/IP encapsulation
often requires that different units, and a different range of acceptable values, be used.
Motion Commands
32 bit encoder position
cond
1
io1
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
see IO Encoding Table
cond
io
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
see IO Encoding Table
0
cond
io
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
see IO Encoding Table
68
0
cond
io
ST: Y1..Y4, L or H
STAC5: 1..4, Y1,Y2. L
or H
see IO Encoding Table
feed to position (absolute
move)
67
0
FS
Feed to Sensor
6B
0
cond
io
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
see IO Encoding Table
FY
Feed to Sensor with safety
distance
6C
0
cond
io
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
see IO Encoding Table
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
cond
2
io2
284
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
0
cond
io
JA
VM_ACCEL,
1B
0
JD
JOG_DISABLE
A3
0
JE
JOG_ENABLE
A2
JL
VM_DECEL,
JS
VM_VELOCITY,
MD
Units
Reg code
AB
Range ST5 /
ST10 / STAC5
opcode (hex)
Hand wheel
Parameter 2
Description
HW
Parameter 1
Command
Host Command Reference
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
see IO Encoding Table
jog accel rate
1..32000
10 rpm/sec
0
direction
1=cw enable, 2=ccw
enable, 3=both
1C
0
jog decel rate
1..32000
10 rpm/sec
1A
0
jog speed
0..32000
.25 rpm
MOTOR_DISABLE
9E
0
ME
MOTOR_ENABLE
9F
0
MT
Multi Tasking
A9
0
0
0 or 1 0 or 1
1=on, 0=off
SH
SEEK_HOME, ionum+cond
6E
0
cond
io
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
see IO Encoding Table
SM
STOP_MOVING
B5
0
decel code
D (DE rate) or M (AM
rate)
‘D’ or ‘M’
SP
SET_ABS_POSITION
A5
0
+/-2,147,483,647
steps
VC
CHANGE_VELOCITY,
4A
0
speed
1..32000
.25 rpm
VE
P_TO_P_VELOCITY,
1D
0
speed
1..32000
.25 rpm
WI
Wait for Input
70
0
cond
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
see IO Encoding Table
WM
WAIT_ON_MOVE
BC
0
WP WAIT_ON_POSITION
Configuration Commands
D0
0
--
RESTORE_DEFAULTS
A6
AD
Analog Deadband
D2
0
dead band
0..255
millivolts
AS
Analog Scaling
D1
0
scale code
0..7
0 = single-ended +/- 10 volts
1 = single-ended 0 - 10 volts
2 = single-ended +/- 5 volts
3 = single-ended 0 - 5 volts
4 = differential +/- 10 volts
5 = differential 0 - 10 volts
6 = differential +/- 5 volts
7 = differential 0 - 5 volts
BD
BRAKE RELEASE DELAY
40
0
brake release
delay
1..32000
msec
BE
BRAKE ENGAGE DELAY
41
0
brake engage
delay
1..32000
msec
CA
ACCEL_CURRENT,
61
0
accel current
not supported
10 rpm/sec
32 bit abs position
285
io
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
motor current 500 / 1000 / 500
when running
.01 amps
CD
IDLE_CURRENT_DELAY,
4F
0
delay time
1..32000
msec
CI
IDLE CURRENT
19
0
motor current
when idle
500 / 1000 / 500
.01 amps
CM
CONTROL_MODE,
10
0
mode code
7, 10..18, 21, 22
EF
Encoder Function
D6
0
function code
0,1,2 or 4
0 = Encoder function off
1 = Stall detection
2 = Stall prevention
4 = Stall prevention w/ time-out
ER
ENCODER_RESOLUTION,
20
0
encoder line
count
50..32000
lines/rev (counts/rev/4)
FI
Filter Input
C0
io
filter value
0..32767
CPU cycles
FX
Filter Select Inputs
D3
0
input bank
0 or 1
1=IN/OUT1, 0=IN/OUT2
HG
harmonic smoothing gain
4
0
gain
0..32000
HP
harmonic smoothing phase
5
0
phase
+/-255
PA
PU_ACCEL_CURRENT
D7
0
current
STM only
.01 amps
PF
POSITION_FAULT,
21
0
posn fault
limit
1..32000
encoder counts
PM
OPERATION_MODE,
44
0
mode code
2 or 7
SF
STEP_FILTER_FREQUENCY, 6
I/O Commands
0
freq
100..25000
0.1 Hz
AD
ANALOG_DEADBAND
D2
0
deadband
0..255
mV
AF
ANALOG_FILTER_GAIN,
4C
0
freq
0..32000
Filter value = 72090 / [ (1400 /
Hz ) + 2.2 ]. O=no filter
AG
ANALOG_VELOCITY_GAIN,
3B
0
speed at full
scale
+/-32000
.25 rpm
AI
ALARM_RESET INPUT
46
0
state
1..3
AO
FAULT OUTPUT
47
0
state
1..3
AP
ANALOG_POSITION_GAIN,
4B
0
posn at full
scale
1..32000
steps
AS
ANALOG_SCALING
D1
0
input range
0..7
0 = single-ended +/- 10 volts
1 = single-ended 0 - 10 volts
2 = single-ended +/- 5 volts
3 = single-ended 0 - 5 volts
4 = differential +/- 10 volts
5 = differential 0 - 10 volts
6 = differential +/- 5 volts
7 = differential 0 - 5 volts
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
286
Units
0
Parameter 4
Reg code
18
Parameter 3
opcode (hex)
Running CURRENT
Parameter 2
Description
CC
Parameter 1
Command
Range ST5 /
ST10 / STAC5
Host Command Reference
threshold
voltage
+/-32767
ADC Counts
32767 = +10 volts
-32767 = -10 volts
AV
ANALOG_OFFSET,
3C
0
offset
+/-32000
ADC counts
AZ
AUTO_OFFSET
A1
0
BD
BRAKE RELEASE DELAY
40
0
brake release
delay
1..32000
msec
BE
BRAKE ENGAGE DELAY
41
0
brake engage
delay
1..32000
msec
BO
BRAKE_OUTPUT,
48
0
state
1..3
DL
DEFINE_LIMITS,
42
0
state
1..3
FI
FILTER_INPUT
C0
io
filter value
0..32767
FX
FILTER_SELECT_INPUTS
D3
0
input bank
0=extended, 1 = main
board
JD
JOG_DISABLE
A3
0
JE
JOG_ENABLE
A2
0
direction
1=cw enable, 2=ccw
enable, 3=both
MO
MOVE_OUTPUT,
49
0
state
1..3
OI
ON_INPUT
B9
0
cond
SI
ENABLE INPUT
45
0
state
SO
Set Output
8B
0
cond
io
ST: Y1..Y4, L or H
STAC5: 1..4, Y1,Y2. L
or H
see IO Encoding Table
TI
Test Input
A8
0
cond
io
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
see IO Encoding Table
WI
Wait for Input
70
0
cond
io
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
see IO Encoding Table
io
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
Units
0
Parameter 4
Reg code
4D
Parameter 3
opcode (hex)
ANALOG_THRESHOLD,
Parameter 2
Description
AT
Parameter 1
Command
Range ST5 /
ST10 / STAC5
Host Command Reference
CPU cycles
see IO encoding table
1..3
Register Commands
CR
Compare Registers
BE
0
reg 1
reg 2
a..z or A..Z or 0..9
see register code table
R+
Register add
B2
2B
reg 1
reg 2
a..z or A..Z or 0..9
see register code table
R-
Register subtract
B2
2D
reg 1
reg 2
a..z or A..Z or 0..9
see register code table
R*
Register multiply
B2
2A
reg 1
reg 2
a..z or A..Z or 0..9
see register code table
R/
Register divide
B2
2F
reg 1
reg 2
a..z or A..Z or 0..9
see register code table
R&
Register and
B2
26
reg 1
reg 2
a..z or A..Z or 0..9
see register code table
R|
Register or
B2
7C
reg 1
reg 2
a..z or A..Z or 0..9
see register code table
287
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
0
cond
io
RD
Register Decrement
AF
0
RI
Register Increment
B0
RM
REGISTER MOVE
B1
RR
Units
Reg code
BB
Range ST5 /
ST10 / STAC5
opcode (hex)
Register Counter
Parameter 2
Description
RC
Parameter 1
Command
Host Command Reference
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
see IO Encoding Table
reg code
A..Z or 0..9
see register code table
0
reg code
A..Z or 0..9
see register code table
0
dest
reg
source: a..z or A..Z or
0..9. dest: A..Z or 0..9
see register code table
REGISTER_READ from mem B3
reg
NV mem
location
reg: A..Z or 0..9.
see register code table
memory location: 1..100
RW
REGISTER_WRITE to mem
B4
reg
NV mem
location
reg: a..z or A..Z or 0..9. see register code table
memory location: 1..100
RX
REGISTER_LOAD
AE
reg value (16 or 32 bits,
depending on register type)
reg: A..Z or 0..9
value: +/- 2147483647
(long data registers)
+/- 32767 (short data
registers)
see register code table
TR
Test Register Immediate
AC
reg value (16 or 32 bits,
depending on register type)
reg: a..z or A..Z or 0..9
value: +/- 2147483647
(long data registers)
+/- 32767 (short data
registers)
see register code table
TS
TIME_STAMP
Q Program Commands
C3
0
AX
ALARM_RESET
BA
0
MT
Multi Tasking
A9
0
0
OF
ON_FAULT
B8
0
segment
OI
ON_INPUT
B9
0
cond
QC
Queue Call
74
0
segment
1..12
QG
Queue Goto
7E
0
line
1..62
QJ
Queue Jump
7F
cc
line
line: 1..62
cc (condition code): ASCII
T = True
F = False
P = Positive
G = Greater than
L = Less than
E = Equals
U = Unequal
Z = Zero
QR
Queue Repeat
79
reg
segment
reg code: 0..9 or A..Z.
Segment: 1..12
see register code table
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
src
reg
0 or 1 0 or 1
288
1=on, 0=off
0..12
io
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
see IO encoding table
TI
TEST_INPUT
A8
0
WD
WAIT_DELAY_REGISTER
BF
reg
WI
WAIT_ON_INPUT,
ionum+cond
70
0
WM
WAIT_ON_MOVE
BC
0
WP
WAIT_ON_POSITION
D0
0
WT
Wait Time
6F
0
Units
0
Range ST5 /
ST10 / STAC5
0
CE
Parameter 4
Reg code
78
NO_OP
Parameter 3
opcode (hex)
Queue Load Execute
NO
Parameter 2
Description
QX
Parameter 1
Command
Host Command Reference
segment
1..12
cond
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
see IO Encoding Table
a..z or A..Z or 0..9
see register code table
ST: X0..X8, L/H/F/R
STAC5: X0..X4, 1..8.
L/H/F/R
see IO Encoding Table
1..32000
.01 seconds
cond
io
io
delay time
Table 2: Message Type 2 Commands
Opcode
Definition
Operand
Action
83
Parameter Write
see Table 3
write a 16 bit parameter to a register. Add 128 (0x80) to operand for
non-volatile (flash) write
84
Parameter read
see Table 3
Returns the 16 bit parameter indicated by operand
87
Read alarm code
0
Returns alarm history value indicated by operand
88
Read Encoder/Abs Posn
0
Returns the 32 bit encoder position
1
Returns the 32 bit absolute position
8B*
Set Output (immediate)
bit 7 state, bits 0-6 output
Set the given output to given state.
8E
Clear Fault (AR)
0
Clear the drive fault. A motor enable must be sent to re-enable the
motor
98
Stop Motion, Kill Buffer
(SK)
decel rate
stops a move, purge all commands from buffer. 0=use quick decel
(AM), 1=use normal decel (DE or JL)
9E**
Write Q Register (RL)
see Reg Encoding table
write a 16 or 32 bit parameter to a Q register (A..Z or 0..9, etc)
9F
Read Q Register (RL)
see Reg Encoding table
read a 16 or 32 bit Q register (a..z, A..Z or 0..9, etc)
A1
Queue Load (QL)
0
load incoming Type 1 commands into Q buffer
A2
Queue Save (QS)
segment number 1..12
saves Q buffer as a Q segment
A3
Stop Motion (ST)
decel rate
stops a move. 0=use quick decel (AM), 1=use normal decel (DE or
JL)
FE
IEEE-1588 Control
0
Enables IEEE-1588 protocol, preventing Class 1 connection
1
Disable IEEE-1588 protocol, allowing Class 1 connection
0
Opens UDP port 7775 and listens for a new connection
1
Closes and resets UDP port 7775
FF
UDP port reset
289
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
*Type 2 Set Output Immediate (opcode 8B) operand table
Operand 00
01
02
03
ST
OUT1
high
OUT2
high
OUT3
high
OUT4
high
STAC5
Y1
high
Y2
high
OUT1
high
OUT2
high
04
OUT3
high
05
OUT4
high
80
81
82
83
OUT1
low
OUT2
low
OUT3
low
OUT4
low
Y1 low
Y2 low
OUT1
low
OUT2
low
**Q register writes are not range checked, so be careful before you write.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
290
84
85
OUT3
low
OUT4
low
Host Command Reference
Table 3: Parameter read/write operands
All values are HEX
Command
Description
Index Q Register Char
--
MISC_FLAGS
5B
--
ENCODER_ATTEMPTS,
62
AC
P_TO_P_ACCEL,
1E
AF
ANALOG_FILTER_GAIN,
4C
AG
ANALOG_VELOCITY_GAIN,
3B
AI
ALARM_RESET,
46
AM
MAX_ACCEL,
16
AO
ALARM_OUTPUT,
47
AP
ANALOG_POSITION_GAIN,
4B
X
AT
ANALOG_THRESHOLD,
4D
Y
AV
ANALOG_OFFSET,
3C
Z
BD
BRAKE_DELAY,
40
BE
BRAKE_DELAY_2,
41
BO
BRAKE_OUTPUT,
48
CA
ACCEL_CURRENT [STM only]
61
CC
MAX_CURRENT
18
CD
IDLE CURRENT DELAY
4F
CF
Anti-resonance Frequency
50
CG
Anti-resonance Gain
51
CI
IDLE CURRENT
19
CM
CONTROL_MODE,
10
DE
P_TO_P_DECEL,
1F
DL
DEFINE_LIMITS,
42
ED
ENC_DIRECTION,
5F
EG
Steps/rev divided by 2
26
ER
ENCODER_RESOLUTION,
20
HG
HYPERBOLIC_GAIN,
4
HP
HYPERBOLIC_PHASE,
5
JA
VM_ACCEL,
1B
K
JL
VM_DECEL,
1C
L
JS
VM_VELOCITY,
1A
M
MO
MOVE_OUTPUT,
49
MV
ModelNum:F/W version
1
PF
POSITION_FAULT,
21
PM
OPERATION_MODE,
44
PR
PROTOCOL,
59
SF
STEP_FILTER_FREQUENCY,
6
Read/write
291
F
A
H
N
O
B
R
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Command
Description
Index Q Register Char
SI
SERVO_ENABLE,
45
TD
ACK_DELAY,
5A
VC
CHANGE_VELOCITY,
4A
U
VE
P_TO_P_VELOCITY,
1D
V
--
DSP firmware letter
8E
--
Hall Pattern (SV7 only)
8F
--
Sub Model (STM only)
90
--
IsServo (ST/SV only: 1=servo, 0=stepper). Can be used to tell if
drive is servo or stepper
91
AL
alarm code
81
BS
Buffer Status
94
EP
encoder count upper
84
EP
encoder count lower
85
IA
command voltage (Ain)
83
a
IC
command current
88
c
IO
Output Status (reads back outputs)
95
IQ
actual current
89
q
IS
IN/OUT 2 input status [STAC5 only, read as “F” on ST]
8D
y
ISX
IN/OUT 1 input status
82
i
IT
drive temp
87
t
IU
supply voltage
86
u
IV
actual speed
8B
v
IV1
target speed
8C
w
IX
position error
8A
x
OP
DriveOptions – bit pattern indicating presence of option boards.
Bit 0 = Encoder
Bit 1 = RS-485
Bit 2 = CANopen
Bit 3 = reserved
Bit 4 = Resolver
Bit 5 = MCF (encoder in and out – SV7 only)
Bit 6 = Ethernet
92
SC
status word
80
Read Only
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
292
f
s
Host Command Reference
IO Encoding Table
Useful ASCII values for IO commands
On STAC5, inputs X1-X4 and outputs Y1 & Y2 are on the DB15 (IN/OUT 1) connector. Input X0 is the
encoder index signal. Inputs 1-8 and outputs 1-4 are on the DB25 (IN/OUT 2) connector.
Character
hex code
Signifies
ST5 & ST10
STAC5
X0
0xB0
encoder index signal
encoder index signal
X1 or Y1
0xB1
input X1 or output Y1
input X1 or output Y1
X2 or Y2
0xB2
input X2 or output Y2
input X2 or output Y2
X3 or Y3
0xB3
input X3 or output Y3
input X3
X4 or Y4
0xB4
input X4 or output Y4
input X4
X5
0xB5
input X5
n/a
X6
0xB6
input X6
n/a
X7
0xB7
input X7
n/a
X8
0xB8
input X8
n/a
1
0x31
n/a
input 1 or output 1
2
0x32
n/a
input 2 or output 2
3
0x33
n/a
input 3 or output 3
4
0x34
n/a
input 4 or output 4
5
0x35
n/a
input 5
6
0x36
n/a
input 6
7
0x37
n/a
input 7
8
0x38
n/a
input 8
L
0x4C
low state (closed)
low state (closed)
H
0x48
high state (open)
high state (open)
R
0x52
rising edge
rising edge
F
0x46
falling edge
falling edge
293
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Register Encoding Table
Register
Name
Use
0
Code
Size
Accumulator
0x30
long
1
user defined
0x31
long
2
user defined
0x32
long
3
user defined
0x33
long
4
user defined
0x34
long
5
user defined
0x35
long
6
user defined
0x36
long
7
user defined
0x37
long
8
user defined
0x38
long
9
user defined
0x39
long
:
user defined
0x3A
long
;
user defined
0x3B
long
<
user defined
0x3C
long
=
user defined
0x3D
long
>
user defined
0x3E
long
?
user defined
0x3F
long
@
user defined
0x40
long
[
user defined
0x5B
long
\
user defined
0x5C
long
]
user defined
0x5D
long
^
user defined
0x5E
long
_
user defined
0x5F
long
`
user defined
0x60
long
a
analog command
0x61
short
yes
b
Q line number
0x62
short
yes
c
current command
IC
0x63
short
yes
d
relative distance
ID
0x64
long
yes
e
encoder position
IE, EP
0x65
long
yes
f
alarm code
AL
0x66
long
yes
g
sensor position
0x67
short
yes
h
condition code
0x68
short
yes
i
X inputs (IN/OUT 1)
ISX
0x69
short
yes
j
analog IN1
IA1
0x6A
short
yes
k
analog IN2
IA2
0x6B
short
yes
l
absolute position
0x6C
long
yes
m
control mode
0x6D
short
yes
n
velocity mode state
0x6E
short
yes
o
point to point state
0x6F
short
yes
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
equivalent SCL command
IA
CM
294
Read Only
Host Command Reference
Register
Name
Use
p
Q segment
q
actual current
r
average regen power
s
status code
t
equivalent SCL command
Code
Size
Read Only
0x70
short
yes
0x71
short
yes
0x72
short
yes
SC
0x73
short
yes
drive temperature
IT
0x74
short
yes
u
bus voltage
IU
0x75
short
yes
v
actual velocity
IV0
0x76
short
yes
w
target velocity
IV1
0x77
short
yes
x
position error
IX
0x78
long
yes
y
IN/OUT 2 inputs
IS
0x79
short
yes
z
phase error
0x7A
short
yes
A
accel rate
AC
0x41
short
B
decel rate
DE
0x42
short
C
change distance
DC
0x43
long
D
distance
DI
0x44
long
E
position offset
0x45
long
F
other (misc) flags
0x46
long
G
current command
0x47
short
H
analog velocity gain
0x48
short
I
input counter
0x49
long
J
jog speed
0x4A
short
K
jog accel rate
0x4B
short
L
jog decel rate
0x4C
short
M
max velocity
JS
0x4D
short
N
continuous current
CC
0x4E
short
O
idle current
CI
0x4F
short
P
absolute position command
0x50
long
Q
reserved
0x51
R
steps/rev
S
IQ
GC
EG
0x52
short
pulse count
0x53
long
T
total count
0x54
long
U
change speed
VC
0x55
short
V
velocity
VE
0x56
short
W
time stamp
0x57
short
X
analog position gain
AP
0x58
short
Y
analog threshold
AT
0x59
short
Z
analog offset
AV
0x5A
short
295
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
EtherNet/IP And Q Programs
To provide additional functionality and autonomy, Q programs can be stored in EtherNet/IP drives. These
programs can be started and stopped “on demand” using explicit messaging. The Q Programmer application is
used to compose, download and test Q programs. Please avoid sending EtherNet/IP messages to the drive while
the Q Programmer software is running.
To start a Q program from an EtherNet/IP message, you must send a Type 1 message with opcode 0x78
(the QX command). You’ll need to specifiy the Q segment number, as shown in the example. This allows you to
store up to 12 Q segments, or subprograms, and operate them independently. Q segments can also call each
other once one has been started.
Example: Starting Q Segment 1
QX1
start Q segment 1
opcode
0x0078
from Table 1
operand 0x1
segment 1 (up to 12 segments are allowed in a Q program)
Type 2 Command Message Payload
Type 2 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
2
message type
byte 1
2
message type
byte 2
78
opcode
byte 2
78
opcode
byte 3
1
operand
byte 3
1
operand
byte 4
0
unused
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
0
unused
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
0
unused
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
1
segment number
byte 7
0
not used
Once a Q segment has begun, Type 1 messages are no longer permitted, because the CPU is busy
executing the commands in the Q segment. To stop a Q program, you must use a Type 2 “SK” message (opcode
98, as shown in the next example). Q programs also stop running if they encounter a blank line in the segment.
This makes it possible to launch a segment, have it complete a task, and stop by itself.
Example: Stopping a Q Program
SK
stop the Q program
opcode
0x98
from Table 2
operand decel rate (0 = use quick decel rate from AM, 1 = use normal decel rate from DE or JL)
Type 2 Command Message Payload
Type 2 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
2
message type
byte 1
2
message type
byte 2
98
opcode
byte 2
98
opcode
byte 3
0
operand
byte 3
0
operand
byte 4
0
not used
byte 4
?
status code MSB
byte 5
0
not used
byte 5
?
status code LSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
0
not used
byte 7
0
not used
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
296
Host Command Reference
Communicating with a Q Program While It’s Running
You can use Type 2 commands to read and write registers while a Q program is running. The Q program
can send information to the host by changing a register that the host is polling. Registers 0 - 9 can be polled
using the Type 2 User Register Read command (opcode 9A).
The host can make changes to the Q program operation by writing to parameters that the program uses. For
example, you could change the motor speed sending a parameter write message that alters VE (Type 2 message,
opcode 83, operand 1D). The speed change will take effect on the next move.
Changes that affect a Q program immediately can be made using the Write Q Register command (message
type 2, opcode 9E). For example, if the motor is jogging after having been sent a CJ command, writing to register
J will result in an immediate speed change. Please note that Q register writes are not range checked, so be
careful before you write.
How to Know if a Q Program Has Stopped
Since a Q program can be launched and allowed to stop itself when it encounters a blank line, you may want
to know when it stops. You can do this by polling for the status word and observing bit 14. This bit is a one if the
program is executing. To fetch the status word, use the Type 2 Parameter Read command with operand 0x80 as
shown below.
Example: Checking Status While a Q Program is Running
opcode
0x84
operand 0x80
parameter read, from Table 2
status code, from Table 3
Type 2 Command Message Payload
Type 2 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
2
message type
byte 1
2
message type
byte 2
84
opcode
byte 2
84
opcode
byte 3
80
operand
byte 3
80
operand
byte 4
0
not used
byte 4
?
status code MSB
byte 5
0
not used
byte 5
?
status code LSB
byte 6
0
not used
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
0
not used
byte 7
0
not used
Typical return values:
0001
Motor enabled, Q program not running
4001
Motor enabled, Q program running
4801
Motor enabled, Q running, Wait Time command executing
4019
Motor enabled, motor moving, Q running
For more information about the status code, please read about the SC command in the main part of this
manual.
297
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Can You Download a Q Program over EtherNet/IP?
The preferred method for creating, downloading and testing Q programs is to use the Q Programmer
software. If you are absolutely convinced that you want to encode and download one or more Q segments over
EtherNet/IP, it can be done.
1. Develop and test your program using Q Programmer so that you know the final contents of the Q
segments(s) you’ll need. Any Type 1 command can be used in a Q program.
2. Encode each command into a Type 1 message, according to Table 1.
3. Issue the QL (Queue Load) Type 2 command (see Table 2).
4. Begin sending the encoded Q commands that you want in this segment. They will be placed into the Q
buffer.
5. After sending the entire contents of a segment, issue the Type 2 “QS” command, which instructs the
drive to save the Q buffer as a Q segment.
6. Repeat steps 2 - 5 if you have additional Q segments.
7. When you have completed the download process for all segments (steps 1 - 6), upload your program
using Q Programmer to make sure that there were no mistakes.
EtherNet/IP on large networks
Once a computer connects to an Applied Motion EtherNet/IP drive with Applied Motion software such as ST
Configurator, STAC Configurator or Q Programmer, that connection is maintained until power is cycled. In most
cases this will be acceptable because only one computer will ever need to connect to the drive for monitoring or
Q program download. In large complex installations however, it may simply not be feasible to cycle power to the
machine every time a new technician connects to the drive.
To address this, we have implemented opcode 0xFF. Using an operand of 1 will allow the user to forcibly
reset the maintenance port (UDP port 7775), effectively yielding control of the drive. Once reset, the port must
be reinitialized, which requires opcode 0xFF to be sent again, this time with an operand of 0. This will instruct the
drive to accept a new connection from the next computer that tries to connect using Applied Motion software.
It is important to understand that only one host computer may be connected to the drive at any given time.
To change hosts again, simply repeat the sequence.
Example: Close and reset UDP port for access by another host
opcode
0xFF
from Table 2
operand 0x1
Close and reset UDP port 7775.
Type 2 Command Message Payload
Type 2 Response Message Payload
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 0
0
reserved
byte 1
2
message type
byte 1
2
message type
byte 2
FF
opcode
byte 2
FF
opcode
byte 3
1
operand
byte 3
1
operand
byte 4
0
unused
byte 4
?
Status Code MSB
byte 5
0
unused
byte 5
?
Status Code LSB
byte 6
0
unused
byte 6
0
not used
byte 7
0
unused
byte 7
0
not used
Remember, this is a two step process. First the port must be closed and reset, as shown above. Once
reset, the port must be opened for new connections, which may be accomplished by sending opcode FF again,
but this time with an operand of 0.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
298
Host Command Reference
CIP General Status Codes
The following table lists the Status Codes that may be present in the General Status Code field of an Error
Response message. Note that the Extended Code Field is available for use in further describing any General
Status Code. Extended Status Codes are unique to each General Status Code within each object. Each object
shall manage the extended status values and value ranges (including vendor specific). All extended status values
are reserved unless otherwise indicated within the object definition.
General Status
Code
Status Name
Description of Status
(in hex)
00
Success
Service was successfully performed by the object specified.
01
Connection failure
A connection related service failed along the connection path.
02
Resource unavailable
Resources needed for the object to perform the requested service were unavailable.
03
Invalid parameter value
See Status Code 0x20, which is the preferred value to use for this condition.
04
Path segment error
The path segment identifier or the segment syntax was not understood by the
processing node. Path processing shall stop when a path segment error is encountered.
05
Path destination unknown
The path is referencing an object class, instance or structure element that is not known
or is not contained in the processing node. Path processing shall stop when a path
destination unknown error is encountered.
06
Partial transfer
Only part of the expected data was transferred.
07
Connection lost
The messaging connection was lost.
08
Service not supported
The requested service was not implemented or was not defined for this Object Class/
Instance.
09
Invalid attribute value
Invalid attribute data detected
0A
Attribute list error
An attribute in the Get_Attribute_List or Set_Attribute_List response has a non-zero
status.
0B
Already in requested mode/
state
The object is already in the mode/state being requested by the service.
0C
Object state conflict
The object cannot perform the requested service in its current mode/state.
0D
Object already existst
The requested instance of object to be created already exists.
0E
Attribute not settable
A request to modify a non-modifiable attribute was received.
0F
Privilege violation
A permission/privilege check failed.
10
Device state conflict
The device’s current mode/state prohibits the execution of the requested service.
11
Reply data too large
The data to be transmitted in the response buffer is larger than the allocated response
buffer.
12
Fragmentation of a primitive
value
The service specified an operation that is going to fragment a primitive data value, i.e.
half a REAL data type.
13
Not enough data
The service did not supply enough data to perform the specified operation.
14
Attribute not supported
The attribute specified in the request is not supported.
15
Too much data
The service supplied more data than was expected.
16
Object does not exist
The object specified does not exist in the device.
17
Service fragmentation
sequence not in progress
The fragmentation sequence for this service is not currently active for this data.
18
No stored attribute data
The attribute data of this object was not saved prior to the requested service.
19
Store operation failure
The attribute data of this object was not saved due to a failure during the attempt.
299
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
General Status
Code
Status Name
Description of Status
(in hex)
1A
Routing failure, request
packet too large
The service request packet was too large for transmission on a network in the path to the
destination. The routing device was forced to abort the service.
1B
Routing failure, response
packet too large
The service response packet was too large for transmission on a network in the path
from the destination. The routing device was forced to abort the service.
1C
Missing attribute list entry
data
The service did not supply an attribute in a list of attributes that was needed by the
service to perform the requested behavior.
1D
Invalid attribute value list
The service is returning the list of attributes supplied with status information for those
attributes that were invalid.
1E
Embedded service error
An embedded service resulted in an error
1F
Vendor specific error
A vendor specific error has been encountered. The Additional Code Field of the Error
Response defines the particular error encountered. Use of this General Error Code
should only be performed when none of the Error Codes presented in this table or within
an Object Class definition accurately reflect the error.
20
Invalid Parameter
A parameter associated with the request was invalid. This code is used when a
parameter does not meet the requirements of this specification and/or the requirements
defined in an Application Object Specification.
21
Write-once value or medium An attempt was made to write to a write-once medium (e.g. WORM drive, PROM) that
already written
has already been written, or to modify a value that cannot be changed once established.
22
Invalid Reply Received
An invalid reply is received (e.g.reply service code does not match the request service
code, or reply message is shorter than the minimum expected reply size). This status
code can serve for other causes of invalid replies.
23
Buffer Overflow
The message received is larger than the receiving buffer can handle. The entire
message was discarded.
24
Message Format Error
The format of the received message is not supported by the server.
25
Key Failure in path
The Key Segment that was included as the first segment in the path does not match the
destination module. The object specific status shall indicate which part of the key check
failed.
26
Path Size Invalid
The size of the path which was sent with the Service Request is either not large enough
to allow the Request to be routed to an object or too much routing data was included.
27
Unexpected attribute in list
An attempt was made to set an attribute that is not able to be set at this time.
28
Invalide Member ID
The Member ID specified in the request does not exist in the specified Class/Instance/
Attribute.
29
Member not settable
A request to modify a non-modifiable member was received.
2A
Group 2 only server general
failure
This error code may only be reported by DeviceNet Group 2 Only servers with 4K or
less code space and only in place of Service not supported, Attribute not supported and
Attribute not settable.
2B
Unknown Modbus Error
A CIP to Modbus translator received an unknown Modbus Exception Code.
2C
Attribute not gettable
A request to read a non-readable attribute was received.
2D-CF
D0-FF
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Reserved by CIP for future extensions
Reserved for Object Class
and Service errors
This range of error codes is to be used to indicate Object Class specific errors. Use of
tihs range should only be performed when none of the Error Codes presented in this
table accurately reflect the error that was encountered.
300
Host Command Reference
Appendix I: Troubleshooting
This Appendix addresses potential issues that may occur while using AMP equipment.
NOTE: Every drive must be configured with AMP software prior to operation. For stepper systems, use the
appropriate Configurator utility, while QuickTuner should be used for servos. It is never safe to assume that the
configuration state of the drive is known when it is received. This step should not be considered optional.
Error Message / Indication
While streaming commands
to the drive, it behaves
erratically or does not
send legible ACK / NACK
responses.
Explanation
Solution
It is recommended that the user receive and
process the drive’s ACK / NACK character
before sending the next command. This will
ensure that the drive’s command buffer never
overflows and the drive behaves normally.
The drive’s command buffer may be full,
which may cause unpredictable behavior.
If this is not possible, a delay should
be introduced between commands that
are streamed to the drive. A delay of
approximately 10ms should be sufficient for
all commands that do not cause motion.
The software is unable to communicate to
the drive. There are four common causes for
this error:
1 - The drive is not powered.
2 - The software is using the wrong COM
port.
3 - The drive was already running before the
software was launched. (wrong power-up
sequence)
“The drive is not responding.
Is it connected to the right
port and turned on?”
4 - The USB/Serial converter is faulty or
not supported by AMP. If an onboard 9-pin
COM port is not available, use a USB/Serial
converter based on the FTDI chipset. The
chipset used will be shown on the converter’s
documentation. Contact AMP for specific
device recommendations.
1 - Apply power to the drive.
2 - Physical 9-pin COM ports are typically
assigned COM1 or COM2. USB Adaptors
are often assigned arbitrary COM port
identifiers. Check your computer’s hardware
settings in the Control Panel to verify which
COM port your device is using.
3 - Ensure that the software is running
and using the correct COM port. Then,
cycle power on the drive. This will allow
the software to intercept the drive’s powerup packet (as detailed in Appendix B) and
initiate communications.
Hint: If communications have been
established, AMP software will display the
drive’s firmware revision along with the model
number. If this box is empty, communications
have not been established.
301
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Error Message / Indication
Explanation
Solution
“You have not set the load
inertia in the Motor Settings.
The electronic damping
and anti-resonance will
work better if you set the
load inertia accurately. Do
you want to download your
settings anyway?”
The drive is missing important information
used to properly configure the anti-resonance
features. The motor will run without this
information, but it may not be as smooth
as it otherwise could be. This is generally
acceptable only for initial testing, and should
be addressed before normal operation.
Set the load inertia. Depending on the
configuration software used, it is either
possible to enter the actual calculated load
inertia or a best-guess estimate of the inertia
ratio (load : motor). For example, if the load
inertia is five times that of the motor’s rotor,
the ratio would be entered as 5 : 1.
Drive’s LED blinks red and
green
An alarm or fault condition exists. The
Fault codes are drive-dependent. Consult
display consists of a specific number of red
Appendix E and your drive’s hardware
and green blinks, and will repeat continuously
manual for specific information.
until resolved.
Drive’s LED shows solid red
A firmware download was interrupted, and
the drive is unable to boot properly.
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
302
Cycle power on the drive and repeat the
firmware download process.
Host Command Reference
Appendix J: List of Supported Drives
Drive
Description
Integrated Steppers
STM17S-3AN
NEMA 17 Integrated Stepper, RS-232
STM17S-3AE
NEMA 17 Integrated Stepper, RS-232, Encoder
STM17S-3RN
NEMA 17 Integrated Stepper, RS-485
STM17S-3RE
NEMA 17 Integrated Stepper, RS-485, Encoder
STM17Q-3AN
NEMA 17 Integrated Stepper, Q Programming, RS-232
STM17Q-3AE
NEMA 17 Integrated Stepper, Q Programming, RS-232, Encoder
STM17Q-3RN
NEMA 17 Integrated Stepper, Q Programming, RS-485
STM17Q-3RE
NEMA 17 Integrated Stepper, Q Programming, RS-485, Encoder
STM17C-3CN
NEMA 17 Integrated Stepper, CANOpen
STM17C-3CE
NEMA 17 Integrated Stepper, CANOpen, Encoder
STM23S-2AN
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 2-stack motor, RS-232
STM23S-2AE
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 2-stack motor, RS-232, Encoder
STM23S-2RN
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 2-stack motor, RS-485
STM23S-2RE
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 2-stack motor, RS-485, Encoder
STM23Q-2AN
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 2-stack motor, Q Programming, RS-232
STM23Q-2AE
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 2-stack motor, Q Programming, RS-232, Encoder
STM23Q-2RN
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 2-stack motor, Q Programming, RS-485
STM23Q-2RE
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 2-stack motor, Q Programming, RS-485, Encoder
STM23S-3AN
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 3-stack motor, RS-232
STM23S-3AE
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 3-stack motor, RS-232, Encoder
STM23S-3RN
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 3-stack motor, RS-485
STM23S-3RE
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 3-stack motor, RS-485, Encoder
STM23Q-3AN
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 3-stack motor, Q Programming, RS-232
STM23Q-3AE
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 3-stack motor, Q Programming, RS-232, Encoder
STM23Q-3RN
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 3-stack motor, Q Programming, RS-485
STM23Q-3RE
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 3-stack motor, Q Programming, RS-485, Encoder
STM23C-3CN
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 3-stack motor, Q Programming, CANOpen
STM23C-3CE
NEMA 23 Integrated Stepper, 3-stack motor, Q Programming, CANOpen, Encoder
STM24SF-3AN
NEMA 24 Integrated Stepper, RS-232
STM24SF-3AE
NEMA 24 Integrated Stepper, RS-232, Encoder
STM24SF-3RN
NEMA 24 Integrated Stepper, RS-485
STM24SF-3RE
NEMA 24 Integrated Stepper, RS-485, Encoder
STM24QF-3AN
NEMA 24 Integrated Stepper, Q Programming, RS-232
STM24QF-3AE
NEMA 24 Integrated Stepper, Q Programming, RS-232, Encoder
STM24QF-3RN
NEMA 24 Integrated Stepper, Q Programming, RS-485
STM24QF-3RE
NEMA 24 Integrated Stepper, Q Programming, RS-485, Encoder
STM24C-3CN
NEMA 24 Integrated Stepper, CANOpen
STM24C-3CE
NEMA 24 Integrated Stepper, CANOpen, Encoder
303
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Drive
Description
ST Drives
ST5-S
5A DC Stepper Drive, RS-232
ST5-Plus
5A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, RS-232
ST5-Q-NN
5A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, RS-232
ST5-Q-NE
5A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, RS-232, Encoder
ST5-Q-RN
5A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, RS-485
ST5-Q-RE
5A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, RS-485, Encoder
ST5-Q-EN
5A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, Ethernet
ST5-Q-EE
5A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, Ethernet, Encoder
ST5-IP-EN
5A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, EtherNet/IP
ST5-IP-EE
5A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, EtherNet/IP, Encoder
ST5-Si-NN
5A DC Stepper Drive, Si Programming, RS-232
ST5-Si-NE
5A DC Stepper Drive, Si Programming, RS-232, Encoder
ST5-C-CN
5A DC Stepper Drive, CANOpen
ST5-C-CE
5A DC Stepper Drive, CANOpen, Encoder
ST10-S
10A DC Stepper Drive, RS-232
ST10-Plus
10A DC Stepper Drive, RS-232
ST10-Q-NN
10A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, RS-232
ST10-Q-NE
10A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, RS-232, Encoder
ST10-Q-RN
10A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, RS-485
ST10-Q-RE
10A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, RS-485, Encoder
ST10-Q-EN
10A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, Ethernet
ST10-Q-EE
10A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, Ethernet, Encoder
ST10-IP-EN
10A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, EtherNet/IP
ST10-IP-EE
10A DC Stepper Drive, Q Programming, EtherNet/IP, Encoder
ST10-Si-NN
10A DC Stepper Drive, Si Programming, RS-232
ST10-Si-NE
10A DC Stepper Drive, Si Programming, RS-232, Encoder
ST10-C-CN
10A DC Stepper Drive, CANOpen
ST10-C-CE
10A DC Stepper Drive, CANOpen, Encoder
SV Drives
SV7-S-AE
7A DC Servo Drive, RS-232, Encoder
SV7-S-AF
7A DC Servo Drive, RS-232, Encoder, MCF Encoder Feedback Board
SV7-S-RE
7A DC Servo Drive, RS-485, Encoder
SV7-Q-AE
7A DC Servo Drive, Q Programming, RS-232, Encoder
SV7-Q-AF
7A DC Servo Drive, Q Programming, RS-232, Encoder, MCF Encoder Feedback Board
SV7-Q-RE
7A DC Servo Drive, Q Programming, RS-485, Encoder
SV7-Q-EE
7A DC Servo Drive, Q Programming, Ethernet, Encoder
SV7-IP-EE
7A DC Servo Drive, Q Programming, EtherNet/IP, Encoder
SV7-Si-AE
7A DC Servo Drive, Si Programming, RS-232, Encoder
SV7-Si-AF
7A DC Servo Drive, Si Programming, RS-232, Encoder, MCF Encoder Feedback Board
SV7-C-CE
7A DC Servo Drive, CANOpen, Encoder
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
304
Host Command Reference
Drive
Description
Blu Servo Drives
BLuDC4-S
4A DC Servo Drive, RS-232
BLuDC4-SE
4A DC Servo Drive, RS-232, Expanded I/O
BLuDC4-Q
4A DC Servo Drive, RS-232, Q Programming
BLuDC4-QE
4A DC Servo Drive, RS-232, Q Programming, Expanded I/O
BLuDC4-Si
4A DC Servo Drive, RS-232, Si Programming
BLuDC9-S
9A DC Servo Drive, RS-232
BLuDC9-SE
9A DC Servo Drive, RS-232, Expanded I/O
BLuDC9-Q
9A DC Servo Drive, RS-232, Q Programming
BLuDC9-QE
9A DC Servo Drive, RS-232, Q Programming, Expanded I/O
BLuDC9-Si
9A DC Servo Drive, RS-232, Si Programming
BLuAC5-S
5A AC Servo Drive, RS-232
BLuAC5-SE
5A AC Servo Drive, RS-232, Expanded I/O
BLuAC5-Q
5A AC Servo Drive, RS-232, Q Programming
BLuAC5-QE
5A AC Servo Drive, RS-232, Q Programming, Expanded I/O
BLuAC5-Si
5A AC Servo Drive, RS-232, Si Programming
STAC5 Stepper Drives
STAC5-S-N120
5A 120VAC Stepper Drive, Ethernet
STAC5-S-N220
5A 220VAC Stepper Drive, Ethernet
STAC5-S-E120
5A 120VAC Stepper Drive, Ethernet, Encoder
STAC5-S-E220
5A 220VAC Stepper Drive, Ethernet, Encoder
STAC5-Q-N120
5A 120VAC Stepper Drive, Ethernet, Q Programming
STAC5-Q-N220
5A 220VAC Stepper Drive, Ethernet, Q Programming
STAC5-Q-E120
5A 120VAC Stepper Drive, Ethernet, Q Programming, Encoder
STAC5-Q-E220
5A 220VAC Stepper Drive, Ethernet, Q Programming, Encoder
STAC5-IP-N120
5A 120VAC Stepper Drive, EtherNet/IP
STAC5-IP-N220
5A 220VAC Stepper Drive, EtherNet/IP
STAC5-IP-E120
5A 120VAC Stepper Drive, EtherNet/IP, Encoder
STAC5-IP-E220
5A 220VAC Stepper Drive, EtherNet/IP, Encoder
STAC6 Stepper Drives
STAC6-S
6A 120VAC Stepper Drive, RS-232
STAC6-S-220
6A 220VAC Stepper Drive, RS-232
STAC6-SE
6A 120VAC Stepper Drive, RS-232, Expanded I/O
STAC6-SE-220
6A 220VAC Stepper Drive, RS-232, Expanded I/O
STAC6-Q
6A 120VAC Stepper Drive, RS-232, Q Programming
STAC6-Q-220
6A 220VAC Stepper Drive, RS-232, Q Programming
STAC6-QE
6A 120VAC Stepper Drive, RS-232, Q Programming, Expanded I/O
STAC6-QE-220
6A 220VAC Stepper Drive, RS-232, Q Programming, Expanded I/O
305
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Host Command Reference
Drive
Description
STAC6-Si
6A 120VAC Stepper Drive, RS-232, Si Programming
STAC6-Si-220
6A 220VAC Stepper Drive, RS-232, Si Programming
STAC6-C
6A 120VAC Stepper Drive, CANOpen
STAC6-C-220
6A 220VAC Stepper Drive, CANOpen
SVAC3 Servo Drives
SVAC3-S-E-120
3A 120VAC Servo Drive, Ethernet
SVAC3-S-E-220
3A 220VAC Servo Drive, Ethernet
SVAC3-Q-E-120
3A 120VAC Servo Drive, Ethernet, Q Programming
SVAC3-Q-E-220
3A 220VAC Servo Drive, Ethernet, Q Programming
SVAC3-IP-E-120
3A 120VAC Servo Drive, Ethernet, Q Programming, EtherNet/IP
SVAC3-IP-E-220
3A 220VAC Servo Drive, Ethernet, Q Programming, EtherNet/IP
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
306
Host Command Reference
(This page intentionally left blank)
307
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Applied Motion Products
404 Westridge Drive
Watsonville, CA 95076
USA
tel / 831-761-6555
fax / 831-761-6544
www.applied-motion.com
920-0002 Rev. H
1/2012
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement